JP7794253B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to be configured to award a benefit to the player by transitioning the gaming state to a special control state when a predetermined transition condition is met.

Specific examples of pachinko machines include those that transition to a special control state when an internal lottery is won based on a gaming ball entering a ball entry section in the play area, and those that transition to a special control state when a gaming ball enters a specified ball entry section. When a transition to a special control state occurs, for example, a ball entry device in the play area begins to open and close, and gaming balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-009055

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that allows for suitable management of the gaming machine .

In order to solve the above problem, the invention of claim 1 comprises a predetermined storage execution means for executing a predetermined storage process so that when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, thereby storing the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means;
an information calculation means for calculating, each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, behavior information corresponding to a game result during a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
a result storage execution means for sequentially storing the aspect information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means;
Equipped with
the result storage execution means includes means for causing the mode information to be stored among the mode information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means to be stored in the calculation result storage means;
the state information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means, which is not a storage target, is not stored in the calculation result storage means;
The gaming machine is provided with a means for generating a specific advantageous period when a specific opportunity occurs,
When a specific event occurs that stops the game progress control, the predetermined storage process is not executed by the predetermined storage execution means.
the information calculation means calculates the status information using the predetermined information in the specific advantageous period as the status information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period ,
The present invention is characterized in that the notification means capable of notifying the contents corresponding to the status information stored in the calculation result storage means is provided in a position that is visible when the door body that can be opened and closed is in the open state .

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately manage gaming machines .

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. 10A to 10J are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display content on the display surface of the pattern display device. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display content on the display surface of the pattern display device. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration for discharging game balls that have flowed down the game area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the low probability of winning or losing table for the first special chart, (b) An explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability of winning or losing table for the first special chart, (c) An explanatory diagram for explaining the low probability of winning or losing table for the second special chart, and (d) An explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability of winning or losing table for the second special chart. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an allocation table for a first special symbol, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an allocation table for a second special symbol. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensor are input to the main CPU. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. A block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a dispensing control device and various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the dispensing CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence relationship memory; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a history memory. 10 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a management-side CPU. 10A to 10D are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the signal types is stored in the correspondence memory. 10 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management-side CPU. 10A to 10E are time charts showing how history information is stored in a history memory. 10 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. This is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged view of the area where the special winning device is installed. FIG. 10A and 10B are perspective views of the passage formation body and the opening/closing member, illustrating how the opening/closing member opens and closes the inlet portion of the fourth discharge passage portion. FIG. 2 is a plan view of the opening/closing member and the drive unit for special power. 29(a) and 29(b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA in FIG. 29(a) and 29(b). (a) to (e) are time charts showing how winning occurs in the second operating port in the opening and closing execution mode. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution manner of the opening and closing execution mode. (a1) to (b3) are time charts for explaining the execution mode of the opening and closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a small win result. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal power control process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a special chart special power control process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring hold information executed by the main CPU. This is a flowchart showing the special chart change start processing executed by the main CPU. This is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the special call start processing executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the special call release process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the special line closed processing executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a special call termination process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a management-side CPU. 10A to 10H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the signal types is stored in the correspondence memory. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of a management IC according to a third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. 10 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by a main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by a management CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by a control CPU in the fourth embodiment; 13A is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by a main CPU in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by a main CPU in the sixth embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by a control-side CPU in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a control-side CPU in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the ninth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management-side CPU. FIG. 22 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 22 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main control device in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a history memory. 10 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management-side CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a parameter management process executed by a main CPU. A block diagram to explain the configuration of the signal path that transmits the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor to the main CPU and management IC in the 12th embodiment. 20A to 20C are time charts for explaining the execution of the opening/closing execution mode in the thirteenth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the special call start processing executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the special call release process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the special line closed processing executed by the main CPU. FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board in the fourteenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how a game ball enters the first special ball entrance or the second special ball entrance in the opening and closing execution mode. FIG. 23 is a front view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment. 78(a) and 78(b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA in FIG. 78. 78(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 78, and FIG. 78(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 78. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the low probability of winning or losing table for the first special chart, (b) An explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability of winning or losing table for the first special chart, (c) An explanatory diagram for explaining the low probability of winning or losing table for the second special chart, and (d) An explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability of winning or losing table for the second special chart. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution manner of the opening and closing execution mode. 10 is a flowchart showing the special call release setting process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board in the sixteenth embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the open setting process for special power lines executed by the main CPU, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the close setting process for special power lines executed by the main CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing the opening and closing of the first special electric prize winning device and the second special electric prize winning device. A vertical cross-sectional view of a game board to explain the configuration of the special electric winning device in the 17th embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a flow-down prevention control process executed by the main CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts for explaining the relationship between the open/closed state of each special electric winning device and the operating position of the flow-down prevention member. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the open/closed state of each special electric prize winning device and the operating position of the flow prevention member. FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board in the eighteenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the process of obtaining hold information on the normal side executed by the main side CPU. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the pattern display device. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how reservation information on the normal side is obtained. A front view of the game board in the 19th embodiment. 96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA in FIG. 95.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. For convenience, Fig. 2 omits the components within the play area PA of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so that it can rotate forward. The outer frame 11 is made up of wooden boards connected at all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may also be attached to the island equipment of the amusement hall.

As shown in Figure 2, the gaming machine main body 12 comprises an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a rear pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. In detail, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. A rear pack unit 15 is also rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is equipped with a locking device at its pivot tip, which functions to lock the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also functions to lock the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states can be released by using an unlocking key to unlock the cylinder lock 17, which is exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12.

The inner frame 13 is primarily composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is approximately the same as that of the outer frame 11. A roughly oval window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a play area PA formed on the front of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 in the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on Figure 3. Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define part of the outer edge of the play area PA, and these inner rail portion 25 and outer rail portion 26 form a guide rail that serves as a guide means. Game balls launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the top of the play area PA by the guide rail.

The game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launching rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 55a (described below) onto the launching rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by rotating the launch operating device (or operating handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game balls are launched.

The game board 24 has multiple large and small openings that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening is equipped with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special symbol unit 37, and a general symbol unit 38. There are a total of four general winning openings 31, and one of each of the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls will be paid out. On the other hand, when balls enter the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize opening 32, the first actuation opening 33, and the second actuation opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls will be paid out. Specifically, when one game ball enters the first actuation opening 33 or when one game ball enters the second actuation opening 34, one prize ball will be paid out; when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31, ten prize balls will be paid out; and when one game ball enters the special electric prize opening 32, fifteen prize balls will be paid out.

The number of prize balls is optional; for example, the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have fewer prize balls than the first actuation port 33, or the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have more prize balls than the first actuation port 33.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. The game board 24 is also equipped with numerous nails 24b to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the game balls fall, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, "entering" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a game ball passing through an opening and being discharged from the game area PA, but also a game ball continuing to flow down the game area PA without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish game balls entering the outlet 24a from game balls entering the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and through gate 35, the term "winning" will also be used.

The variable display unit 36 includes a pattern display device 41 with a rectangular display surface, and a center frame 36a that surrounds the periphery of the display surface of the pattern display device 41. Portions of the center frame 36a along the top, left, and right edges of the display surface of the pattern display device 41 protrude forward beyond the surface of the gaming board 24, and the variable display unit 36 is located in the center of the gaming area PA. This divides the gaming area PA into an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located to the left of the variable display unit 36, a right area PA3 located to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area PA4 located below the variable display unit 36. In other words, a gaming ball launched into the gaming area PA will first reach the upper area PA1, but after reaching the upper area PA1, the gaming ball will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → left area PA2 → lower area PA4, or upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4; a gaming ball flowing down one of the left area PA2 and right area PA3 will not flow down the other.

The first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are located in the lower area PA4, which is the area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The lower area PA4 is continuous with the left area PA2, which is the area to the left of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, downstream, and is also continuous with the right area PA3, which is the area to the right of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, downstream. Therefore, a game ball flowing down from any position in the upper area PA1, which is the area above the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, can reach the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. For example, a game ball can reach the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 even when the launch operation device 28 is rotated to the maximum operation amount. Furthermore, when a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning through the first actuation port 33, not only is it possible for a winning ball to be placed in the first actuation port 33, but it is also possible for a winning ball to be placed in the second actuation port 34; and when a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning through the second actuation port 34, it is also possible for a winning ball to be placed in the first actuation port 33.

The first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are unitized as an actuation port device, arranged side by side vertically with the first actuation port 33 on top and the second actuation port 34 on the bottom. The first actuation port 33 is not provided with any components to vary the frequency with which game balls enter the first actuation port 33, and the probability of game balls entering the first actuation port 33 when comparing the left-side area PA2 in a predetermined manner in which game balls flow down is the same regardless of the game state. Therefore, the player can perform a firing operation aimed at entering a game ball into the first actuation port 33 in any situation.

A stage section 36c is provided in the lower frame section 36b, which is the portion below the display surface of the pattern display device 41 in the center frame 36a, extending horizontally above the first operating port 33. A warp passage entrance section 36e is formed in the left frame section 36d, which is the portion to the left of the pattern display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, allowing game balls flowing down the left area of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage section 36c. The horizontal center section of the stage section 36c is located vertically above the first operating port 33, and a lead-out section 36f is formed in this center section to lead game balls under their own weight to below the stage section 36c. In this case, game balls that are guided to the stage portion 36c from areas other than the lead-out portion 36f to below the stage portion 36c are unlikely to enter the first operating port 33, but game balls that are guided from the lead-out portion 36f to below the stage portion 36c have a high probability of entering the first operating port 33.

The second operating port 34 is provided with a normal power device 34a, which acts as a guide piece consisting of a pair of movable pieces on the left and right. When the normal power device 34a is in a closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, but when the normal power device 34a is in an open state, the game ball can enter the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operating port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows, more specifically in the right-hand area PA3. The through gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) that runs vertically through it, and game balls that enter the through gate 35 flow down the game area PA after winning. This allows game balls that enter the through gate 35 to enter the second operating port 34.

Based on a win at the through gate 35, the normal power feature 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from a closed state to an open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is conducted when a win is made at the through gate 35, and a changing image is displayed on the normal map display section 38a of the normal map unit 38, which is located in the lower right corner of the play area PA, an area through which game balls do not pass. If the result of the internal lottery is a win to open the normal power feature, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the changing display on the normal map display section 38a ends, the system transitions to the normal power open state. In the normal power open state, the normal power feature 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The map display unit 38a is configured as a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this and may be configured as other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. Possible patterns displayed on the map display unit 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of letters are displayed in a variable manner, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed in a variable manner, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed in an alternating manner.

In the normal map unit 38, a normal map reserve display section 38b is provided adjacent to the normal map display section 38a. Up to four game balls that enter the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the normal map reserve display section 38b.

A winning lottery is triggered by a winning entry into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The results of the lottery are then displayed clearly through the display effects on the special symbol unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special symbol unit 37 in more detail, the special symbol unit 37 is provided with a first special symbol display section 37a and a second special symbol display section 37b. In the first special symbol display section 37a, a winning lottery is held, triggered by a winning entry into the first operating port 33, and a changing image display is performed. The result corresponding to the lottery result is then displayed. In addition, in the second special symbol display section 37b, a winning lottery is held, triggered by a winning entry into the second operating port 34, and a changing image display is performed. The result corresponding to the lottery result is then displayed. Note that the first special symbol display section 37a and the second special symbol display section 37b are configured as segment displays in which a plurality of segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner, but are not limited to this and may be configured as other types of display devices, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. Furthermore, the images displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a and the second special symbol display unit 37b may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple types of colors.

In the special symbol unit 37, a first special symbol reserve display unit 37c and a second special symbol reserve display unit 37d are provided adjacent to the first special symbol display unit 37a and the second special symbol display unit 37b. A maximum of four game balls that enter the first operating port 33 can be reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the first special symbol reserve display unit 37c. Furthermore, a maximum of four game balls that enter the second operating port 34 can be reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the second special symbol reserve display unit 37d.

In more detail, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described below. Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device with a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

In the pattern display device 41, when a changing pattern is displayed in the first special pattern display unit 37a based on a winning entry into the first operating port 33, the pattern is changed accordingly, and when a changing pattern is displayed in the second special pattern display unit 37b based on a winning entry into the second operating port 34, the pattern is changed accordingly. In addition to display effects triggered by a winning entry into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the pattern display device 41 also displays effects during the opening and closing execution mode to which it shifts after a winning entry.

The display content when the pattern display device 41 displays a changing pattern will be explained in detail with reference to Figures 4 and 5. Figure 4 is a diagram showing individual patterns that are displayed in a changing manner on the pattern display device 41, and Figure 5 is a diagram showing the display surface of the pattern display device 41.

As shown in Figures 4(a) to (j), the design, which is a type of picture, is composed of nine main designs, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main designs are composed of nine character designs, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in Figure 5(a), the display surface of the pattern display device 41 has three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 set as multiple display areas: upper, middle, and lower. Each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is configured with main and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, the upper pattern column Z1 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. The lower pattern column Z3 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern.

In other words, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are each composed of 18 symbols. In contrast, the middle symbol row Z2 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with a "4" main symbol additionally arranged between the "9" main symbol and the "1" main symbol, with one sub-symbol between each of these main symbols. In other words, the middle symbol row Z2 alone has 10 main symbols arranged, for a total of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols in each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclical, scrolling manner in a predetermined direction.

As shown in Figure 5(b), the display surface is designed so that three symbols are stopped and displayed per symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being stopped and displayed (3 x 3). Also, as shown in Figure 5(a), the display surface has five active lines: a left line L1, a center line L2, a right line L3, a downward-right line L4, and an upward-right line L5.

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display surface based on a winning entry into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, the variable display begins so that the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction. The display then switches from variable display to standby display in the order of upper symbol column Z1 → lower symbol column Z3 → middle symbol column Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined symbols statically displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Furthermore, when the display of changing patterns has finished, if the result of the internal lottery is a 16R high probability result described below, a combination of "7" symbols will be formed on one of the valid lines; if the result of the internal lottery is any of a 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R high probability result, or 10R high probability result described below, a combination of the same odd symbols other than "7" symbols will be formed on one of the valid lines; if the result of the internal lottery is any of a 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result, or 16R low probability result described below, a combination of the same even symbols will be formed on one of the valid lines; and if the result of the internal lottery is any of a first small win result, second small win result, or third small win result described below, a predetermined combination of symbols that is not the same symbol combination and is not a reach symbol combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") will be formed on one of the valid lines.

Furthermore, based on a win in either of the operating ports 33, 34, display begins on either of the special symbol display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41, and one game session is played until the predetermined result is displayed and the game ends. Furthermore, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and can be arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the symbols displayed in the symbol display device 41 are not limited to those described above, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are displayed as symbols can be used.

If a jackpot is won in the lottery based on a win through the first operating port 33, the system transitions to an opening/closing execution mode in which a win is possible in the special electric winning device 32. Also, if a jackpot or small jackpot is won in the lottery based on a win through the second operating port 34, the system transitions to an opening/closing execution mode in which a win is possible in the special electric winning device 32. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 is located in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. Therefore, game balls flowing down the left area PA2 cannot win in the special electric winning device 32. However, a game ball can win in the special electric winning device 32 only when a launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, such as when the launch operation device 28 is rotated to the maximum amount of operation. The configuration of the special electric winning device 32 will be explained in detail later.

Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration for discharging game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, a game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and outlet 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, a game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and enters the game area PA is discharged from the game area PA by entering any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and outlet 24a. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and outlet 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back of the gaming board 24, discharge passages 42-48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a, respectively. Gaming balls that flow into the discharge passages 42-48 flow down the discharge passages 42-48, leading to the lower end of the gaming board 24 on the back side of the gaming board 24 and being collected by a discharge ball collection section (not shown). The gaming balls collected by the discharge ball collection section are then discharged to a ball circulation device in the island equipment where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall.

Each discharge passage section 42-48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a-48a for detecting game balls. These discharge passage sections 42-48 and detection sensors 42a-48a are described below. As already explained, there are four general winning openings 31, and therefore there is a discharge passage section 42-44 corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for the first discharge passage section 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31, and one detection sensor 43a is provided for the second discharge passage section 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to it to the right. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the first discharge passage section 42, and the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the second discharge passage section 43. A gaming ball that enters the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a as it passes through the first discharge passage 42, and a gaming ball that enters the general winning opening 31 adjacent to it on the right is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a as it passes through the second discharge passage 43. A third discharge passage 44 is provided for the two right-side general winning openings 31, and is formed to merge midway. The third discharge passage 44 has entrance-side regions corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and these entrance-side regions merge midway to form a single exit-side region. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range is located midway in the exit-side region of the third discharge passage 44. A gaming ball that enters either of the two right-side general winning openings 31 is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a as it passes through the third discharge passage 44.

A fourth discharge passage section 45 exists in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists midway through the fourth discharge passage section 45, and a game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a as it passes through the fourth discharge passage section 45. A fifth discharge passage section 46 exists in correspondence with the first operating port 33. A first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists midway through the fifth discharge passage section 46, and a game ball that enters the first operating port 33 is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a as it passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. A sixth discharge passage section 47 exists in correspondence with the second operating port 34. A second actuation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the sixth discharge passage 47, and a gaming ball that enters the second actuation port 34 is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a as it passes through the sixth discharge passage 47. A seventh discharge passage 48 exists in correspondence with the outlet 24a. An outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the seventh discharge passage 48, and a gaming ball that enters the outlet 24a is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a as it passes through the seventh discharge passage 48.

A gaming ball that is detected by one of the various detection sensors 42a-48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and gaming balls that pass through the through gate 35 on their way down the play area PA are detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

The various detection sensors 42a-49a are all electromagnetic induction proximity sensors, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect game balls individually. The various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to the main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a-49a output a LOW level signal when they are not detecting a game ball, and output a HI level signal when they are detecting a game ball. However, this is not limited to this, and the HI and LOW relationship may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13, which is formed by attaching the game board 24 configured as described above to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 has a window portion 51 formed therein, which allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 is approximately elliptical in shape and has a window panel 52 fitted into it. The window panel 52 is made of colorless and transparent glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, or may be made of colored and transparent as long as the game area PA can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

A display light-emitting unit 53 is provided above the window 51. A pair of left and right speakers 54 are also provided, which output sound effects according to the game status. An upper bulge 55 and a lower bulge 56, which bulge toward the front, are arranged side by side below the window 51. An upper tray 55a with an upward opening is provided inside the upper bulge 55, and a lower tray 56a with a similar upward opening is provided inside the lower bulge 56. The upper tray 55a temporarily stores game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 76 (described below) and guides them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism 27. The lower tray 56a also stores surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, we will explain the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) is equipped with a main control device 60, which is responsible for the primary control of the game. The main control device 60 consists of a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The board box 60a may be provided with a trace means or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Possible trace means include a joint structure that inseparably connects the multiple case bodies that make up the board box 60a and requires destruction of a specified portion when they are separated, or a structure in which a seal is affixed across the boundaries between the multiple case bodies, leaving a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the bonded object when peeled off. Another possible trace structure is a structure in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the multiple case bodies that make up the board box 60a.

The rear pack unit 15 is installed to cover the rear side of the inner frame 13, including the main control device 60. The rear pack unit 15 includes a rear pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, to which a dispensing mechanism 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls are successively replenished from the island equipment in the gaming hall, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. Game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged onto the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device aggregate unit 74 is equipped with a payout control device 77 that has the function of controlling the payout device 76, and a power supply/launch control device 78 that generates and outputs the predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the launch operation device 28. The payout control device 77 and power supply/launch control device 78 are stacked one behind the other, with the payout control device 77 at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61, which is responsible for the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 67, which monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62. The MPU 62 contains a main CPU 63, which is a processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit, as well as a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 also contains an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits such as a random number generator, and more.

The main ROM 64 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 63.

The main RAM 65 is a type of memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM or DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is randomly accessible and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared for the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control programs stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entry patterns of game balls in the game area PA based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Details will be described later, but the management IC 66 keeps track of the entry history of game balls into the general entry opening 31, the special electric entry device 32, the first actuation opening 33, the second actuation opening 34, and the outlet 24a, and, based on this ball entry history, keeps track of the frequency of balls entering the general entry opening 31, the special electric entry device 32, the first actuation opening 33, and the second actuation opening 34.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 67 and a dispensing control device 77 provided in the main control device 60. The power outage monitoring board 67 is connected to a power supply/launch control device 78, which has the function of supplying operating power, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power outage monitoring board 67.

Various sensors, such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a, are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As already explained, the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a are the first prize entry detection sensor 42a, the second prize entry detection sensor 43a, the third prize entry detection sensor 44a, the special electric current detection sensor 45a, the first operating port detection sensor 46a, the second operating port detection sensor 47a, the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether a ball has entered each entry area. The main CPU 63 also performs various lotteries based on whether a ball has entered the first operating port 33, and various lotteries based on whether a ball has entered the second operating port 34.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and an audio/light emitting control device 81. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77, for example, when a game ball enters a prize ball entry section among the entry sections, where the occurrence of the ball entry corresponds to the payout of the game ball. Various commands, such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command, are output to the audio/light emitting control device 81.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 62 are the special power drive unit 32b, which opens and closes the opening/closing member 202 (described later) of the special power winning device 32; the normal power drive unit 34b, which opens and closes the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34; the special chart unit 37; and the normal chart unit 38. Incidentally, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a first special chart display unit 37a, a second special chart display unit 37b, a first special chart reserve display unit 37c, and a second special chart reserve display unit 37d, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal chart unit 38 is provided with a normal chart display unit 38a and a normal chart reserve display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units and displays through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the main CPU 63 controls the drive of the special power drive unit 32b so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the normal power open state of the normal power device 34a is selected, the main CPU 63 controls the drive of the normal power drive unit 34b so that the normal power device 34a is opened and closed. Furthermore, during each game round, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special chart display unit 37a. Furthermore, when the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal power device 34a is to be opened is to be displayed, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the normal chart display unit 38a. In addition, when a win occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when a change display starts in the special chart display units 37a and 37b, the main CPU 63 executes display control for the special chart reserve display units 37c and 37d, and when a win occurs in the through gate 35, or when a change display starts in the regular chart display unit 38a, the main CPU 63 executes display control for the regular chart reserve display unit 38b.

The power outage monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78, and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall. It generates the operating power required for the main control board 61, payout control device 77, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage, such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, this power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage supplies power for memory retention to the main RAM 65 of the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77. The power supply and launch control device 78 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, which is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The audio and light control device 81 drives and controls the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. The display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on commands received from the audio and light-emitting control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

During play, the main CPU 63 uses various counter information to perform the jackpot occurrence lottery, set the display of the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, set the symbol display on the symbol display unit 41, and set the display of the normal symbol display unit 38a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, it uses a hit random number counter C1 used to draw the jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, a reach random number counter C3 used to draw the reach occurrence lottery when the symbol display unit 41 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the change display period on the special symbol display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display unit 41. Furthermore, it uses a normal power random number counter C4 used to draw the lottery to determine whether the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the normal power open state. The above counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are located in the various counter area 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special symbol reserve area 65a provided as acquired information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a win occurs in the first actuation port 33 or second actuation port 34. The special symbol reserve area 65a comprises a first special symbol reserve area 85, a second special symbol reserve area 86, and an execution area 87 for special symbols.

The first special symbol reserve area 85 comprises a first area 85a, a second area 85b, a third area 85c, and a fourth area 85d, and the numerical information of the win random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 85a-85d as reserved information on the special symbol side in accordance with the winning history of the first actuation port 33. In this case, if multiple consecutive winnings occur in the first actuation port 33, the numerical information is stored in the first area 85a-4 area 85d in chronological order: first area 85a → second area 85b → third area 85c → fourth area 85d. By providing four areas 85a-85d in this way, up to four winning history records of game balls entering the first actuation port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of reserved items that can be stored in the first special chart reservation area 85 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be a single number.

The second special symbol reserve area 86 comprises a first area 86a, a second area 86b, a third area 86c, and a fourth area 86d, and the numerical information of the win random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 86a-86d as reserved information for the special symbol in accordance with the winning history of the second actuation port 34. In this case, when multiple consecutive wins into the second actuation port 34 occur, the numerical information is stored in the first area 86a-4 area 86d in chronological order: first area 86a → second area 86b → third area 86c → fourth area 86d. By providing four areas 86a-86d in this way, up to four winning history records of game balls entering the second actuation port 34 can be reserved and stored. The number of reserved items that can be stored in the second special chart reservation area 86 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be a single number.

The execution area 87 for special symbols is an area where reserved information for special symbol hit/fail judgments and allocation judgments is stored when variable display is started in either special symbol display unit 37a, 37b. Specifically, when variable display in the first special symbol display unit 37a is started, the reserved information stored in the first area 85a of the first special symbol reserve area 85 is moved to the execution area 87 for special symbols. On the other hand, when variable display in the second special symbol display unit 37b is started, the reserved information stored in the first area 86a of the second special symbol reserve area 86 is moved to the execution area 87 for special symbols.

Information corresponding to the normal random number counter C4 is stored in the normal map reserve area 65c when a winning ball enters the through gate 35. The normal map reserve area 65c includes a first area 88a, a second area 88b, a third area 88c, and a fourth area 88d. The numerical information of the normal random number counter C4 is stored in one of the areas 88a-88d as reserved information for the normal map side according to the winning history of the through gate 35. In this case, when multiple consecutive winning balls enter the through gate 35, the numerical information is stored in the first area 88a-4 area 88d in chronological order: first area 88a → second area 88b → third area 88c → fourth area 88d. By providing four areas 88a-88d in this way, up to four winning ball entries into the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored. The number of reserved items that can be stored in the regular map reservation area 65c is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or even a single number. The regular map reservation area 65c has an execution area 89 for regular maps. The execution area 89 for regular maps is an area where reserved information for which the regular power release lottery process is performed is stored when the regular map display unit 38a begins changing display. Specifically, when the regular map display unit 38a begins changing display, the reserved information stored in the first area 88a of the regular map reservation area 65c is moved to the execution area 89 for regular maps.

We will explain each of the above counters in detail below.

First, we will explain the normal power random number counter C4. The normal power random number counter C4 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. The normal power random number counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the normal power reserve area 65c of the main RAM 65 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the normal power device 34a to an open state based on the value of the stored normal power random number counter C4.

This pachinko machine 10 has only one support mode. Therefore, the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery process using the normal power random number counter C4 and the determination method for the variable display period when the variable image display is executed on the normal power display unit 38a are constant regardless of the game state. Furthermore, the execution method for the drive control of the normal power device 34a, such as the number of times the normal power device 34a is opened in the normal power release state, the opening period of the normal power device 34a, and the closing period from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state when the normal power device 34a opens multiple times in the normal power release state, are also constant regardless of the game state. This eliminates the need to change the display control method of the normal power display unit 38a and the drive control method of the normal power device 34a depending on the type of support mode, thereby reducing the program capacity and data capacity required to execute these controls. Since there is only one type of support mode, the normal gaming state in this embodiment is a gaming state in which the win/lose lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the high probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state in which the win/lose lottery mode is a high probability mode.

Next, we will explain the winning random number counter C1. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the special chart holding area 65a of the main RAM 65 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. This stored winning random number counter C1 value is then used to determine whether the game has won or lost.

The random number value that is determined to be a winning result when determining whether or not a win is made is stored in the main ROM 64 as a winning/losing table. The winning/losing table sets out the winning/losing results as a jackpot result, a small winning result, and a losing result. A jackpot result is a winning/losing result that can trigger a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, and can also trigger a transition to a winning/losing lottery mode. A small winning result is a winning/losing result that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, but does not trigger a transition to a winning/losing lottery mode. A losing result is a winning/losing result that does not trigger a transition to an opening/closing execution mode, and does not trigger a transition to a winning/losing lottery mode either.

The opening/closing execution mode, which is executed when a jackpot result is achieved, is a round-number-defined mode in which a predetermined number of rounds of play is played up to a maximum. Round play refers to play that continues until either the maximum number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed is reached, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls enter the special electric prize winning device 32. In this embodiment, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once per round of play, and the open duration for each round of play is set to 29 seconds. The maximum number of prizes that can be entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 is set to 10. When the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area PA every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the open duration for round play is set to a time longer than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the maximum number of prizes that can be entered in one round of play. Therefore, it is possible to expect that more than the upper limit number of game balls will enter the special electric prize-winning device 32 during each round of play. Furthermore, the number of rounds of play executed in the round number specified mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result.

The opening/closing execution mode, which is executed when a small win is achieved, is a fixed opening/closing count mode in which round play is not set and which ends when either the maximum number of times the special electric winning device 32 opens and closes is reached, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls enter the special electric winning device 32. In the fixed opening/closing count mode, multiple types of open durations are set for each opening of the special electric winning device 32. While all of these open durations are set longer than the game ball firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds), there are periods that are less than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the maximum number of winning balls (specifically, 10), and periods that are greater than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the maximum number of winning balls (specifically, 10). The opening/closing execution mode, which is executed when a small win is achieved, allows the player to increase their ball inventory, although by a smaller number than the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed when a big win is achieved.

As shown in the explanatory diagrams of Figures 9(a) to 9(d), the hit/fail tables include a hit/fail table for the first special symbol used to determine whether the first reserved information stored in the first special symbol reserve area 85 is a hit/fail based on a win in the first operating port 33, and a hit/fail table for the second special symbol used to determine whether the second reserved information stored in the second special symbol reserve area 86 is a hit/fail based on a win in the second operating port 34. Furthermore, the hit/fail table for the first special symbol includes a low-probability hit/fail table and a high-probability hit/fail table, and similarly, the hit/fail table for the second special symbol includes a low-probability hit/fail table and a high-probability hit/fail table. In other words, this pachinko machine 10 references different hit/fail tables for the first and second reserved information, and in either case, there are low-probability and high-probability hit/fail lottery modes for the hit/fail determination.

To explain each win/loss table in more detail, the low-probability win/loss table for the first special chart, as shown in Figure 9(a), has two random number values that result in a jackpot (for example, "5" and "305"), and all other random number values result in a miss. In other words, when the win/loss lottery mode is in low-probability mode and a win/loss determination is made on the first pending information, the result can be either a jackpot or a miss, but it will never be a small win.

As shown in Figure 9(b), the high-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol has a larger number of random number values that result in a jackpot than the low-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol; specifically, 20 (e.g., "5," "34," "65," "130," "163," "192," "220," "245," "276," "305," "334," "365," "392," "420," "470," "495," "520," "558," "575," and "599"). In this case, the set of win random number counter C1 values that result in a jackpot in low-probability mode are included in the set of win random number counter C1 values that result in a jackpot in high-probability mode. Any other random number value will result in a loss. In other words, when a win/loss determination is made on the first pending information when the win/loss lottery mode is high-probability mode, the result will be either a jackpot or a loss, but it will never result in a small win.

In the low probability win/loss table for the second special design, as shown in Figure 9(c), the random number value that results in a jackpot is the same as in the low probability win/loss table for the first special design. On the other hand, the random number values other than the random number that results in a jackpot are the random number values that result in a small win. In other words, when the win/loss lottery mode is in low probability mode and the win/loss determination process is performed on the second pending information, the result will be either a jackpot or a small win. In addition, the first small win result, second small win result, and third small win result are set as the small win results. The first small win result, second small win result, and third small win result differ in the execution manner of the open/close execution mode, as will be described in detail below. In addition, the winning probability for these first to third small win results is the same at 199/600.

As shown in Figure 9(d), in the high probability win/loss table for the second special symbol, the random number values that result in a jackpot are the same as in the high probability win/loss table for the first special symbol. Therefore, the number of random number values that result in the jackpot is greater than in the low probability win/loss table for the second special symbol. On the other hand, the random number values other than those that result in a jackpot are those that result in a small win. In other words, when the win/loss lottery mode is in high probability mode and a win/loss determination is made on the second pending information, the result will be either a jackpot or a small win. As with the low probability win/loss table for the second special symbol, the first small win result, the second small win result, and the third small win result are set as small win results. The winning probabilities for these first to third small win results are approximately the same at 193/600 or 194/600.

As described above, by configuring the system so that a small win result can occur when the second pending information triggers a win/loss determination, it becomes easier for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the small win result to occur when a winning entry occurs in the second operating port 34. Furthermore, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the small win result can be triggered, allowing the player to slightly increase the number of balls they have.

In addition, if the probability of a jackpot result is higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a win are arbitrary, and the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result in low probability mode may be configured so that only a portion of the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result in high probability mode is included, or may not be included at all.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special symbol holding area 65a when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

This pachinko machine 10 has multiple jackpot results. These multiple jackpot results are set by providing differences in two conditions: the number of rounds played in the opening/closing execution mode, and the win/loss lottery mode used by the win/loss lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

As shown in the explanatory diagrams of Figures 10(a) and 10(b), the distribution table sets the following types of jackpot results: 2R low probability result, 2R high probability result, 4R low probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R low probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R low probability result, 10R high probability result, 16R low probability result, and 16R high probability result.

A 2R low-probability result and a 2R high-probability result will result in two rounds of play in the open/close execution mode; a 4R low-probability result and a 4R high-probability result will result in four rounds of play in the open/close execution mode; a 6R low-probability result and a 6R high-probability result will result in six rounds of play in the open/close execution mode; a 10R low-probability result and a 10R high-probability result will result in ten rounds of play in the open/close execution mode; and a 16R low-probability result and a 16R high-probability result will result in sixteen rounds of play in the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, for a 2R low-probability result, a 4R low-probability result, a 6R low-probability result, a 10R low-probability result, and a 16R low-probability result, the win/loss lottery mode after the open/close execution mode ends will be the low-probability mode, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode used before switching to the open/close execution mode. This low-probability mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the game switches to the open/close execution mode. On the other hand, for 2R high probability results, 4R high probability results, 6R high probability results, 10R high probability results, and 16R high probability results, the win/loss lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be high probability mode, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before switching to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the switch to the opening/closing execution mode occurs as a result.

As shown in Figures 10(a) and 10(b), the allocation tables include an allocation table for the first special symbol used when determining the allocation of the first reserved information acquired based on a win at the first operating port 33, and an allocation table for the second special symbol used when determining the allocation of the second reserved information acquired based on a win at the second operating port 34.

To explain each allocation table in detail, as shown in Figure 10(a), the allocation table for the first special chart has the following types of jackpot results to be allocated: 2R low probability result, 2R high probability result, 4R low probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R low probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R low probability result, 10R high probability result, 16R low probability result, and 16R high probability result. In the allocation table for the first special chart, "0-1" corresponds to a 2R low probability result, "2-5" corresponds to a 2R high probability result, "6-7" corresponds to a 4R low probability result, "8-11" corresponds to a 4R high probability result, "12-13" corresponds to a 6R low probability result, "14-17" corresponds to a 6R high probability result, "18-19" corresponds to a 10R low probability result, "20-23" corresponds to a 10R high probability result, "24-25" corresponds to a 16R low probability result, and "26-29" corresponds to a 16R high probability result. In this case, the probability of a 2R low probability result, a 4R low probability result, a 6R low probability result, a 10R low probability result, and a 16R low probability result is each approximately 6.7%, and the probability of a 2R high probability result, a 4R high probability result, a 6R high probability result, a 10R high probability result, and a 16R high probability result is each approximately 13%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the allocation table for the second special symbol sets a 16R low probability result and a 16R high probability result as the types of jackpot results to be allocated. In the allocation table for the second special symbol, "0-9" corresponds to a 16R low probability result, and "10-29" corresponds to a 16R high probability result. In this case, the probability of a 16R low probability result is approximately 33%, which is the same as the probability of a 2R low probability result, a 4R low probability result, a 6R low probability result, a 10R low probability result, or a 16R low probability result being selected in the allocation table for the first special symbol. Furthermore, the probability of a 16R high probability result is approximately 67%, which is the same as the probability of a 2R high probability result, a 4R high probability result, a 6R high probability result, a 10R high probability result, or a 16R high probability result being selected in the allocation table for the first special symbol.

The allocation table for the first special symbol and the allocation table for the second special symbol have the same probability of switching to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode in the event of a jackpot win. Meanwhile, the average number of rounds played is higher with the allocation table for the second special symbol than with the allocation table for the first special symbol. Therefore, in terms of the types of jackpot results that can be selected in the event of a jackpot win, it is more advantageous for the player if a win occurs in the second actuation port 34 and an internal lottery is held than if a win occurs in the first actuation port 33 and an internal lottery is held.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. Here, the present pachinko machine 10 is configured with an expectation effect as one type of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expectation effect refers to a display state that makes the player believe that a variable display state that is likely to result in a prize-related result is one that is likely to result in a prize-related result, from the start of the symbol display on the symbol display device 41 to the derived and displayed result, in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in which the final stop result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result is a prize-related result. Specifically, the prize-related result is the display of a combination of symbols with the same number on one of the pay lines.

There are two types of expected effects: a reach display and a warning display that is set before a reach display occurs, to anticipate the occurrence of a reach display or a corresponding result.

The reach display includes a display state in which a reach pattern combination is displayed by freezing the patterns in some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device 41, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows are displayed with varying patterns. It also includes a reach display in which, while a reach pattern combination is displayed as described above, the remaining pattern rows are displayed with varying patterns, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, creating a reach effect; or a reach display in which the reach pattern combination is displayed in a reduced size or is hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image across almost the entire display surface, creating a reach effect.

Pre-announcement displays include a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows when symbols are displayed in a changing manner in all symbol rows, or when symbols are displayed in a changing manner in some but multiple symbol rows, after the display of changing symbols on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 has begun. They also include a mode in which the background screen is displayed in a predetermined mode different from its previous mode, or a mode in which the symbols on the symbol rows are displayed in a predetermined mode different from their previous mode. Such pre-announcement displays can occur in both gameplays when a reach display is made and when a reach display is not made, but are set to occur with a higher probability when a reach display is made than when a reach display is not made.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game in which the same symbol combination is ultimately displayed. Furthermore, in a game in which a small win result is achieved, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Furthermore, in a game in which a miss result is achieved, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referencing the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision on whether to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60, but by the audio and light control device 81. In this case, the audio and light control device 81 executes a lottery process for preview displays so that a game turn corresponding to a jackpot result is more likely to produce a preview display, and/or a preview display with a low occurrence rate is more likely to occur, compared to a game turn corresponding to a loss result. Incidentally, the result of this lottery is reflected when the effect for the game turn is executed by the symbol display device 41.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. The change type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the change display period in the special chart display units 37a and 37b and the change display period of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is repeatedly updated, and is obtained when determining the change pattern at the start of the change display in the special chart display units 37a and 37b and when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, we will explain the various processes executed to progress the game by the main CPU 63. The processes of the main CPU 63 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). During this power-on wait process, the system waits for a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) after the main process is started, without proceeding to the next process. During this power-on wait process, the pattern display device 41 starts operating and is initialized. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function registers of the main CPU 63 are set (step S103).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 has been manually operated (step S104), and further whether the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 has been set to "1" (step S105). It also executes a checksum calculation process (step S106) to calculate a checksum, and determines whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was shut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data (step S107).

In this pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized upon power-on, for example, when an amusement hall opens for business, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch is pressed, processing proceeds to step S108. Processing also proceeds to step S108 if no power-off occurrence information has been set or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by checksum. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Then, processing proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, predetermined areas of the main RAM 65 are set to initial values, such as initializing the power outage flag, and a command corresponding to the current game status is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. Furthermore, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) is executed to have the management IC 66 recognize various information, and a data output process is executed to output various data to a reading device connected to the MPU 62 (step S111). Details of these recognition processes and data output processes will be explained later.

The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but timer interrupt processing is prohibited when main processing begins. This state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited is released when step S111 is completed and before step S112 is executed, and timer interrupt processing is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins, the data output processing of step S111 ends and timer interrupt processing is not executed until before step S112 is started. Therefore, processing to progress the game in the main CPU 63 will not begin until this situation is reached.

Then, the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 continues. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time will be used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S113, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S114, a fluctuation counter update process is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. These update processes read the current numerical information from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, add 1 to the read numerical information, and then overwrite the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, in step S115, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing step S115, the process returns to step S112, and steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 12. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, the power outage information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it monitors whether a power outage signal corresponding to a power outage has been received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if a power outage is identified, the power outage process is executed and then an infinite loop is entered. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

Then, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and normal power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and normal power random number counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, after which the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0." Then, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S113, and in step S204, a variable counter update process is executed as in step S114.

Then, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether a specific event set as a target for fraud monitoring has occurred (step S205). This fraud detection process monitors the occurrence of multiple types of events, and when a specific event has occurred, a game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". In the following step S206, it is determined whether the game has stopped by determining whether the game stop flag has been set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the process from step S207 onwards is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In port output processing, if output information was set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to provide output corresponding to that output information to the various drive units 32b, 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the special power winning device 32 to an open state, output of a drive signal to the special power drive unit 32b is initiated, and if information is set to switch to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, if information is set to switch the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 to an open state, output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is initiated, and if information is set to switch to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, a reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

Then, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S209). In this ball entry detection process, the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a are read, and based on the read results, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, or through gate 35. Details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Then, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of multiple types of timer counters stored in the main RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is updated by subtraction are handled collectively, but it is also possible to configure the system to collectively update both subtractive timer counters and additive timer counters.

Then, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of gaming balls (step S211). While the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 continues, one gaming ball is launched at a predetermined launch cycle of 0.6 seconds. In the following step S212, an input status monitoring process is performed, which checks for disconnections in each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a and whether the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 are open, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208.

Then, a special power control process for special symbols is executed to control the execution of the game round and the open/close execution mode (step S213), and a normal power control process for normal symbols is executed to control the display of the normal symbol display unit 38a and the drive of the normal power device 34a (step S214). The processing contents of the special power control process for special symbols and the normal power control process for normal symbols will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information items related to special map display units 37a and 37b in special map reserved display units 37c and 37d, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information items related to regular map display unit 38a in regular map reserved display unit 38b. Also, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information is set to update the display content of special map display units 37a and 37b, and output information is set to update the display content of regular map display unit 38a.

Then, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout status receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation results (step S216). A payout output process is also executed to set the prize ball command as the output target (step S217). An external information setting process is also executed to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process (step S218). A management output process is then executed to output information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S219). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

<Goal detection processing>
Next, a description will be given of the configuration for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a in the main CPU 63. Figure 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration for inputting the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle eight types of signals simultaneously. An area where information of "0" or "1" is stored depending on the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, this area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. Although more than eight types of signals can be input to the input port 63a, in order to limit the number of signals that can be input simultaneously to eight, the group of signals that are input to the input port 63a is switched through switching control by a driver IC.

During the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), the signals to be input to input port 63a are set to the signals from each ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a. When this setting is made, bit 0 D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first entry port detection sensor 42a, bit 1 D1 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second entry port detection sensor 43a, bit 2 D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third entry port detection sensor 44a, bit 3 D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric current detection sensor 45a, bit 4 D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first operation port detection sensor 46a, bit 5 D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second operation port detection sensor 47a, bit 6 D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and bit 7 D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not currently detecting a passing game ball as a detection signal when it has not detected the passing of a game ball, and outputs a HIGH level signal indicating that it is currently detecting a passing game ball as a detection signal when it has detected the passing of a game ball. Input port 63a stores a "0" in the corresponding bit when it receives a LOW level signal, and stores a "1" in the corresponding bit when it receives a HIGH level signal. In other words, when the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a have not detected the passing of a game ball, a "0" corresponding to the information indicating that it is not currently detecting is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it has detected the passing of a game ball, a "1" corresponding to the information indicating that it is currently detecting is stored in the corresponding bit.

Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12).

If it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first prize opening detection sensor 42a (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the 10-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S303). The first output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first prize opening detection sensor 42a should be output to the management IC 66. The 10-prize ball counter is a counter that specifies to the main CPU 63 the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or greater, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 each time the 10 prize ball command is output. When the payout control device 77 receives a 10 prize ball command, it controls the drive of the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

If it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). The second output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). The third output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), the fourth output flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312), and the value of the 15-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special electric winning flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode. The special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) determines that one game ball has entered the special power winning device 32 by confirming that the special power winning flag is set to "1," and subtracts one from the remaining number of balls that can enter the special power winning device 32 in the round play or open/close execution mode. When this process of subtracting one from the number of balls that can enter is executed, the special power winning flag is cleared to "0." The fourth output flag is a flag that instructs the main CPU 63 to output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special power detection sensor 45a to the management IC 66. The 15-ball counter is a counter that instructs the main CPU 63 to determine the number of times 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or greater, a 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), and the value of the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 each time the 15 prize ball command is output. When the payout control device 77 receives a 15 prize ball command, it controls the drive of the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

If it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a (step S314: YES). In this case, the first actuation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316), and the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S317). The first actuation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the first actuation port 33. The special symbol special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) confirms that the first activation winning flag is set to "1." If the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the special symbol reserve area 65a is less than the upper limit of four, a process to store new reserved information is executed. The special power special power control process (step S213) confirms that the first activation winning flag is set to "1." If the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the first activation winning flag is cleared to "0." The fifth output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first activation port detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. The single prize ball counter is a counter that specifies to the main CPU 63 the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the 1 prize ball counter is 1 or greater, a 1 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), and the value of the 1 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 each time the 1 prize ball command is output. When the payout control device 77 receives a 1 prize ball command, it controls the operation of the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

If it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a (step S318: YES). In this case, the second actuation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320), and the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S321). The second actuation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the second actuation port 34. The special symbol special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12) confirms that the second activation winning flag is set to "1" and executes a process to store new reserved information, provided that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the special symbol reserve area 65a is less than the upper limit of four. The special power special power control process (step S213) confirms that the second activation winning flag is set to "1" and, if the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the second activation winning flag is cleared to "0." The sixth output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second activation port detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one gaming ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S322: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag stored in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the normal map normal power control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), by confirming that the gate winning flag is set to "1", the process is executed to store the current numerical information of the normal power random number counter C4 as normal map side reserved information in the normal map reserve area 65c, provided that the number of normal map side reserved information stored in the normal map reserve area 65c is less than the upper limit of four. The normal map and normal power control process (step S214) confirms that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and if processing corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

As already explained, the timer interrupt process (Figure 12) is initiated at 4 msec intervals. Therefore, when one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a begins detecting a single game ball, the main CPU 63 determines that one game ball has been detected by that ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a while that sensor continues to detect that single game ball. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first through seventh output flags.

<Configuration for Paying Out Gaming Balls>
Next, we will explain the processing executed by the dispensing control device 77. First, we will explain the electrical configuration of the dispensing control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device 77 with reference to the block diagram of Figure 15.

The dispensing control device 77 is equipped with an MPU 91. In addition to a dispensing side CPU 92, which is a processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit, the MPU 91 also contains a dispensing side ROM 93, a dispensing side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The payout-side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout-side CPU 92.

The dispensing-side RAM 94 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM or DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The dispensing-side RAM 94 is randomly accessible and takes less time to read data than the dispensing-side ROM 93 when compared for the same data capacity. The dispensing-side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the dispensing-side ROM 93.

The payout CPU 92 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main CPU 63. By receiving a prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout CPU 92 controls the payout device 76 to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command. The payout CPU 92 also monitors whether the payout of game balls can be performed normally, and if it determines that the payout of game balls cannot be performed normally, it stops the payout device 76 even if information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the payout RAM 94. The payout CPU 92 also transmits a payout limit command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the payout of game balls cannot be performed normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout limit command, it transmits a notification command to the audio/light-emitting control device 81 so that the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 issue a notification indicating that the payout of game balls cannot be performed normally. The states in which game balls cannot be paid out normally include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 has not been replenished with game balls, an abnormal payout state in which the payout device 76 is not operating normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is open from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is open from the inner frame 13.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided midway along the game ball passageway leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection results of this full tank detection sensor are input to the payout CPU 92. The payout CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and determines that the full tank state has been released when the state in which game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released.

A no-ball detection sensor (not shown) is provided midway along the game ball passageway leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection results of the no-ball detection sensor are input to the payout CPU 92. The payout CPU 92 determines that a no-ball state exists when the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect game balls, and determines that the no-ball state has been lifted when the state in which the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect game balls is lifted.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection results of the payout detection sensor are input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Furthermore, the payout side CPU 92 determines that an abnormal payout state exists when the payout detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball even though the payout device 76 is being driven and controlled so that a game ball is paid out, and determines that the abnormal payout state has been released when the state in which the payout detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball is released.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front portion of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2 ), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the dispensing-side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closed detection signal to the dispensing-side CPU 92, and when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the dispensing-side CPU 92. The dispensing-side CPU 92 determines that the front door frame 14 is closed when it receives a closed detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and determines that the front door frame 14 is open when it receives an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. In addition, the dispensing-side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main-side CPU 63 when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a front door close command to the main-side CPU 63 when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when it receives a front door open command, and determines that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when it receives a front door close command.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2 ), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the payout CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout CPU 92. The payout CPU 92 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives a closed detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when it receives an open detection signal from the main body open sensor 96. In addition, the payout CPU 92 transmits a main body open command to the main CPU 63 when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a main body close command to the main CPU 63 when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when it receives a main body open command, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when it receives a main body close command.

Referring to the time chart in Figure 16, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the dispensing CPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly activated at a predetermined interval (e.g., every 2 msec).

First, full tank processing is executed (step S401). As already explained, full tank processing determines whether the tank is full based on the detection results of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, it executes processing to stop the payout of game balls and sends a command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the tank is full. Furthermore, if the full tank state is released, it executes processing to enable the payout of game balls and sends a command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the full tank state has been released.

Then, no-ball processing is executed (step S402). As already explained, the no-ball processing determines whether or not the state is a no-ball state based on the detection results of the no-ball detection sensor, and if the state is a no-ball state, it executes processing to stop the payout of game balls and sends a command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the no-ball state is in effect. Furthermore, if the no-ball state is released, it executes processing to enable the payout of game balls and sends a command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the no-ball state has been released.

Then, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). As already explained, the payout abnormality monitoring process determines whether or not a payout abnormality state exists based on the detection results of the payout detection sensor, and if a payout abnormality state exists, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls and a command indicating that a payout abnormality state exists is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, if the payout abnormality state is resolved, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls and a command indicating that the payout abnormality state has been resolved is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, a front door open monitoring process is executed (step S404). As already explained, the front door open monitoring process determines whether the front door frame 14 is open or not based on the detection results of the front door open sensor 95. If the front door frame 14 is open, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls, and a front door open command is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, if the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a front door close command is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, the main body open monitoring process is executed (step S405). As already explained, the main body open monitoring process determines whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, it executes a process to stop the payout of gaming balls and sends a main body open command to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, if the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, it executes a process to enable the payout of gaming balls and sends a main body close command to the main CPU 63.

Then, a command reading process is executed (step S406). In this command reading process, a process is executed to read the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63. The prize ball command is then stored in the payout RAM 94. A prize ball setting process is then executed to add the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball count information in the payout RAM 94 (step S407), and then a payout control process is executed to control the execution of the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 (step S408). In the payout control process, if the unpaid prize ball count information stored in the payout RAM 94 is a value of 1 or greater, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and if the payout detection sensor detects one game ball, the value of the prize ball count information is decremented by 1. If the value of the prize ball count information becomes "0," the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of external signal output according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process (step S409).

<Configuration for external output to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC installed in the gaming hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the payout CPU 92. Because the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are each electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 can externally output information to the hall computer HC, as shown in FIG. 15.

One external terminal on the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and another external terminal on the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. Regarding the detailed configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided midway along the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 has a branch path SL2 that branches off from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is then connected to the front door open external terminal on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92, but also to the front door open external terminal on the external terminal board 97. This allows a signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open to be output to the hall computer HC without control by the dispensing side CPU 92.

Regarding the main body open sensor 96 in more detail, the signal relay board 98 has a branch path SL4 that branches off from the signal path SL3 that runs from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. This branch path SL4 is then connected to an external terminal for main body open on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92, but also to the external terminal for main body open on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without going through control by the payout side CPU 92.

Next, we will explain the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC. First, we will explain the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC.

During the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), the main CPU 63 sets information output to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the win/lose lottery mode is in high probability mode, information indicating that one round of play has ended, information indicating that a predetermined number (e.g., 100) of game balls have been discharged from the play area PA through either the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34.

In the external information setting process (step S409) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 16), the payout CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

The hall computer HC can grasp the manner in which game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 via the external terminal board 97. For example,
The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of payout balls generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The payout rate in a normal game state other than the open/close execution mode and the high probability mode (hereinafter, this payout rate will be referred to as "B")
・Ball payout rate in the open/close execution mode ・Ball payout rate in the high probability mode ・Number of games played until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this rate will be referred to as "S")
B-S x "number of winning balls for winning the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34"
The number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S2")
B - (S1 x "number of winning balls for winning through the first actuation port 33" + S2 x "number of winning balls for winning through the second actuation port 34")
This allows the hall computer HC to manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of prize balls refers to the number of game balls that are paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning status of gaming balls>
Next, we will explain the configuration for managing the winning status of the gaming balls using the management IC 66. First, we will explain the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is equipped with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 is also equipped with an I/F 101 and a read terminal 102.

I/F 101 is an interface for sending and receiving signals between the MPU 62 and devices external to it. I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a and commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of I/F 101, and the main CPU 63 executes various processes based on the input detection results and command content, as previously explained. Furthermore, if a signal is output to a device such as the special power driver 32b as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the signal is output through the output port of I/F 101. Furthermore, if a command is output to the payout CPU 92 and the audio/light-emitting control device 81 as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the command is output through the output port of I/F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting the MPU 62 to a reading device, which is an external device to the pachinko machine 10. The connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a and expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration may also be adopted in which an opening is formed in the board box 60a to expose the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60, allowing the reading device to be electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 without having to destroy the board box 60a.

The management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These devices are connected to each other via an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66, allowing bidirectional communication.

The management side I/F 111 is an interface that receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via a group of one-way communication signal paths 118 built into the MPU 62, and transmits various signals to the reading terminal 102 via a group of one-way communication signal paths 119 built into the MPU 62. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a group of two-way communication signal paths 120 built into the MPU 62.

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain its data (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) and is used as read-only. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management RAM 114 is a memory such as an SRAM or DRAM that requires an external power supply to retain its data (i.e., a volatile storage means) and is used as both read and write. The management RAM 114 is randomly accessible and has a faster read time than the management ROM 113 when compared for the same data capacity. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like in response to the execution of the control programs stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date and time information and is capable of outputting the measured date and time information in response to instructions from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is also equipped with a backup power supply, allowing it to measure date and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM or DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is used to store information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a-122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a-122p. The contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be explained in detail later.

The history memory 117 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding balls entering the game that is received from the main CPU 63 via the management I/F 111. The contents of the history memory 117 will be explained in detail later.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with multiple buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p are provided. Each of the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p can input one type of signal via signal paths 118a-118p, and each of the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p stores "0" as first data when the input signal is at a LOW level, and stores "1" as second data when the input signal is at a HIGH level. Note that the relationship between LOW and HIGH and the first and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and outputs a HI level first signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level first signal has been input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when no new game balls are detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and outputs a HI level second signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level second signal has been input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and outputs a HI level third signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level third signal has been input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and outputs a HI level fourth signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level fourth signal has been input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when no new game balls are detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, and outputs a HI level fifth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level fifth signal has been input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when no new game balls are detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, and outputs a HI level sixth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level sixth signal has been input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and outputs a HI level seventh signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level seventh signal has been input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a low-level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is not in progress, and continuously outputs a high-level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is in progress.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is in effect is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level ninth signal when the high probability mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs a HI level ninth signal when the high probability mode is in effect.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs a HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open.

An output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output the history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period of time when there is a need to output the history information. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level output instruction signal has been input to the 16th buffer 122p.

Although the 11th buffer 122k, 12th buffer 122l, 13th buffer 122m, 14th buffer 122n, and 15th buffer 122o can receive signals from the main CPU 63, they are blank in this pachinko machine 10 and do not receive normal signals. In this way, by providing a greater number of buffers 122a-122p as input ports 121 of the management I/F 111 in this pachinko machine 10 than the number of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, it is possible to use the management IC 66 in models other than this pachinko machine 10. This increases the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a-118p are formed between the primary CPU 63 and the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p, respectively, in a one-to-one correspondence with the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p, but this is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k-118o may not be formed between the primary CPU 63 and the buffers 122k-122o to be blanked.

It was determined during the design stage of the management IC 66 that an output instruction signal will be input to the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 of the management I/F 111, and the management CPU 112 can determine that an output instruction signal will be input to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the types of signals that will be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o were not determined during the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are identified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. The identification of the types of these signals by the management CPU 112 is performed by sending a type identification command from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 when control is initiated in the main CPU 63 and management CPU 112 following the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, as will be described in detail below. In this case, the information on the types of signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of signals while operating power is being supplied, it references the information stored in the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o, which correspond one-to-one to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The first correspondence area 123a stores information indicating that the signal input to the first buffer 122a is a general winning opening 31, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. The first correspondence area 123a also stores information indicating that the signal input to the first buffer 122a is a general winning opening 31, along with information indicating the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31. The second correspondence area 123b stores information indicating that the signal input to the second buffer 122b is a general winning opening 31, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. The second correspondence area 123b also stores information indicating that the signal input to the second buffer 122b is a general winning opening 31, along with information indicating the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31. The third correspondence area 123c stores information indicating that the signal input to the third buffer 122c is from the general winning opening 31, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition to the information indicating that the signal is from the general winning opening 31, the third correspondence area 123c also stores information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is a special electric winning device 32, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal. The fourth correspondence area 123d also stores information indicating that the signal is a special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls (15) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32. The fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that the signal is a first actuation port 33, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. The fifth correspondence area 123e also stores information indicating that the signal is a first actuation port 33, as well as information on the number of game balls (1) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the first actuation port 33. The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that the signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is from the second actuation port 34, which is information used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal. The sixth correspondence area 123f also stores information indicating that the signal is from the second actuation port 34, as well as information on the number of game balls (1) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second actuation port 34. The seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that the signal is from the outlet 24a, which is information used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the open/close execution mode, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. The ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high probability mode, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. The tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating the front door frame 14, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

As described above, the type of signal to be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is determined by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. This allows the management IC 66 to be used in models other than this pachinko machine 10. This increases the versatility of the management IC 66.

Furthermore, rather than outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, information for recognizing the type of signal is output in advance, and information for identifying the type of signal to be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 each time a signal is output, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o.

In addition, information used by the management CPU 112 to identify the types of signals input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is output when the supply of operating power begins. This allows the management CPU 112 to identify the types of signals input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o when play begins on this pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the information that an output instruction signal will be input to the 16th buffer 122p is set during the design stage of the management IC 66. This makes it possible to omit the process of identifying the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p for output instruction signals that are reliably used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other models of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the process for identifying the type of such signal.

Next, we will explain the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. Figure 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 has a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. The history area 124 contains multiple pointer information items, each numbered consecutively. A history information storage area 125 is also provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each pointer information item. Each history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. Each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, with 1 byte allocated as an area for storing RTC information and 1 byte allocated as an area for storing correspondence information. When correspondence information needs to be stored based on signals input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o (actually, the first through tenth buffers 122a through 122j in this pachinko machine 10), the date and time information currently measured by the RTC 115 is first stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. Then, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a-122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a-123o corresponding to those buffers 122a-122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 that corresponds to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, with regard to the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, as already explained, the first through seventh buffers 122a through 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a through 48a, and therefore the first through seventh correspondence areas 123a through 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the type of ball entry sensor 42a through 48a. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry section corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a through 48a is stored in the first through seventh correspondence areas 123a through 123g. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, the first through third prize entry detection sensors 42a through 44a all detect game balls that have entered the general prize entry port 31, and therefore the first through third correspondence areas 123a through 123c corresponding to these first through third prize entry detection sensors 42a through 44a all store information indicating that the general prize entry port 31 is present. Additionally, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33, the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the outlet 24a. If the buffer 122a-122o that triggered the current information storage is one of the first through seventh buffers 122a-122g, information on the type of ball entry point corresponding to that buffer 122a-122g is read from one of the first through seventh correspondence areas 123a-123g, and the read information on the type of ball entry point is stored directly in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

Meanwhile, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether or not the high probability mode is in progress, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high probability mode, and the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating the front door frame 14.

As explained above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW-level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is not active and a HIGH-level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is active. Therefore, the management CPU 112 determines that the open/close execution mode has started when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HIGH, and determines that the open/close execution mode has ended when the 8th signal changes from HIGH to LOW. Furthermore, when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HIGH, or from HIGH to LOW, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HIGH, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the start information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Furthermore, when the eighth signal changes from HI to LOW, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 9th signal at a LOW level when the high probability mode is not active and continuously outputs the 9th signal at a HIGH level when the high probability mode is active. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the high probability mode has started when the 9th signal changes from a LOW level to a HIGH level, and that the high probability mode has ended when the 9th signal changes from a HIGH level to a LOW level. Furthermore, when the 9th signal changes from a LOW level to a HIGH level, or when it changes from a HIGH level to a LOW level, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the 9th signal changes from a LOW level to a HIGH level, not only the information indicating the high probability mode read from the 9th correspondence area 123i but also the start information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Furthermore, when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating the high probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information are stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs a HIGH level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. This allows the management CPU 112 to determine that the front door frame 14 is open when the 10th signal changes from LOW to HIGH, and to determine that the front door frame 14 is closed when the 10th signal changes from HI to LOW. Furthermore, when the 10th signal changes from LOW to HI, or from HI to LOW, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity has occurred to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. In other words, when the 10th signal changes from a LOW level to a HIGH level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Also, when the 10th signal changes from a HIGH level to a LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

The history information storage area 125 is provided for a sufficient number of times to store all history information generated during a 10-day consecutive business day, during which game balls are continuously fired from opening to closing. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times per day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This makes it possible to store and retain all history information in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separate from the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information that allows the management CPU 112 to identify the pointer information currently being written to in the history memory 117. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, the pointer area 126 is set with information specifying pointer information of "0" as the write target. Each time a new piece of history information is stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the last pointer information in the order is to be written and history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to that last pointer information, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that pointer information of "0" is the write target. As a result, if a trigger occurs to store history information that exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, the oldest history information will be overwritten with the newest history information, starting with the oldest history information stored in the history information storage area 125.

In addition, when a reading device reads history information from the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0"s, and the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been read from becoming the read target again.

Next, we will explain the specific processing configuration for managing the winning status of gaming balls using the management IC 66. First, we will explain the processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116. Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing executed by the main side CPU 63. Note that the recognition processing is executed in step S110 of the main processing (Figure 11).

First, the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "15" (step S501). The recognition output counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the remaining number of times information output is required to enable the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each of the buffers 122a-122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 corresponds to. As already explained, the 15 buffers 122a-122o are the targets for signal type recognition, so the recognition output counter is set to "15".

Then, the primary CPU 63 executes the process of outputting an identification start command (step S502). The primary CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to have the management CPU 112 recognize which types of signals the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o correspond to. The first through eighth signals input to the first through eighth buffers 122a through 122h are used to output these commands. In other words, the first through eighth signals (i.e., the first through eighth signal paths 118a through 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information are used to output commands to have the management CPU 112 recognize which types of signals the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o correspond to. This allows for a reduction in the number of signal paths and simplifies the configuration compared to a configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the commands are provided separately from the signal paths 118a through 118p for outputting signals to the first through sixteenth buffers 122a through 122p. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first through eighth buffers 122a through 122h as the first through eighth signals, respectively. Furthermore, in the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HIGH level at the timing when the output of the identification start command begins, in order to allow the management CPU 112 to recognize that a new command has been sent. Furthermore, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HIGH level are set long enough for the management CPU 112 to recognize the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal. By receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 determines that it should begin processing to store information on the correspondence between the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o and signal types in the correspondence memory 116.

Then, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, and then the nth buffer, followed by the (n+1)th buffer, is set as the signal type recognition setting for the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is between "15" and "13", a type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "12", a type identification command indicating the special winning device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "11", a type identification command indicating the first operating opening 33 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "10", a type identification command indicating the second operating opening 34 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "9", a type identification command indicating the outlet 24a is read out; if the recognition output counter is "8", a type identification command indicating the open/close execution mode is read out; if the recognition output counter is "7", a type identification command indicating the high probability mode is read out; if the recognition output counter is "6", a type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read out; and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", a type identification command indicating blank is read out.

Then, the CPU 112 executes output processing for the read type identification command (step S504). Like the identification start command, the type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity, and each bit of data is input to the first through eighth buffers 122a through 122h as signals 1 through 8, respectively. During output processing for the identification type command, the output state of signal 9 is switched to HIGH level when output of the identification type command begins, allowing the management CPU 112 to recognize that a new command has been sent. The output period for the identification type command and the period for which the output state of signal 9 is maintained at HIGH are set long enough for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification type command and signal 9. Upon receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the identification type command in the correspondence area 123a through 123o corresponding to the buffer currently being set among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after decrement is "0" (step S506). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or greater (step S506: NO), processing is executed to output a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after decrement (steps S503 and S504).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), the system executes the output process of the recognition end command (step S507). The recognition end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first through eighth buffers 122a through 122h as the first through eighth signals, respectively. Furthermore, in the recognition end command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HIGH level when the recognition end command output begins, so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. Furthermore, the output period of the recognition end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HIGH are set long enough for the management CPU 112 to recognize the recognition of the recognition end command and the output state of the ninth signal. By receiving the recognition end command, the management CPU 112 determines that the process of storing the information on the correspondence between the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o and signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed.

Next, the management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 22. The management processing is initiated when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is initiated. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is configured to be faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the combination of processing from step S606 onwards in the management processing is executed 16 or more times between the start of one timer interrupt processing (Figure 12) in the main CPU 63 and the start of the next timer interrupt processing (Figure 12).

When an identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of buffer 122a to 122o for which the signal type is to be set. The first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, followed by the nth buffer and then the (n+1)th buffer.

After that, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), a correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, information on the signal type set in the currently received type identification command is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Then, the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

If a negative judgment is made in step S603, or if the processing of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If an identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the processing returns to step S603, and the processing of steps S604 and S605 is executed again, provided that a new type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES).

If an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. In step S607, details will be described later, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117. In step S608, details will be described later, an external output process is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102.

Figure 23 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first through fifteenth buffers 122a-122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a-122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. Figure 23(a) shows the period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first through eighth signals (i.e., the first through eighth signal paths 118a-118h), Figure 23(b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, Figure 23(c) shows the execution period of the identification state during which processing is performed to identify the correspondence between the first through fifteenth buffers 122a-122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a-122o, and Figure 23(d) shows the timing when the correspondence setting process (step S604) is performed by the management CPU 112.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 begins, output of the identification start command using signals 1 through 8 begins at time t1, as shown in Figure 23(a). Also at time t1, the output state of signal 9 changes from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figure 23(b). Then, at time t2, while the output of the identification start command continues, the output state of signal 9 changes from HI to LOW, as shown in Figure 23(b). The management CPU 112 determines that a command has been sent from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of signal 9 has changed from HI to LOW, and then determines the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 by checking the information in buffers 122a through 122h. In this case, because the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making a positive determination in step S601 of the management process (Figure 22). After that, at timing t3, output of the identification start command is stopped, as shown in Figure 23(a).

Then, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using signals 1 through 8 begins, as shown in Figure 23(a). Also at timing t4, the output state of signal 9 changes from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figure 23(b). Then, at timing t5, while the type identification command continues to be output, the output state of signal 9 changes from HI to LOW, as shown in Figure 23(b). The control CPU 112 determines that a command has been sent from the primary CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of signal 9 has changed from HI to LOW, and determines the content of the command received from the primary CPU 63 by checking the information in buffers 122a through 122h. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the control CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at timing t5, as shown in Figure 23(d). In this correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is a general winning slot 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. After that, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in Figure 23(a).

After that, from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the main CPU 63, just as it did from t4 to t6. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 15th type identification command is completed from t16 to t18.

Then, at timing t19, output of the identification end command using signals 1 to 8 begins, as shown in Figure 23(a). Also at timing t19, the output state of signal 9 changes from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figure 23(b). Then, at timing t20, while the output of the identification end command is continuing, the output state of signal 9 changes from HI to LOW, as shown in Figure 23(b). The control CPU 112 determines that a command has been sent from the primary CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of signal 9 has changed from HI to LOW, and determines the content of the command received from the primary CPU 63 by checking the information in buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, because the identification end command has been received, the control CPU 112 ends its identification state at timing t20, as shown in Figure 23(c). Then, at timing t21, output of the identification end command is stopped, as shown in Figure 23(a).

As described above, by configuring the management CPU 112 to recognize whether a command is being output using the 9th signal, it is possible to have the management CPU 112 clearly recognize that a command is being output, even in a configuration in which commands are output using the 1st to 8th signals (i.e., the 1st to 8th signal paths) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 when to store history information.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117. Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the management output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output processing is executed in step S219 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 12).

First, the managed object counter stored in the main RAM 65 is set to "10" (step S701). The managed object counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether there are any managed objects that have not yet been identified as whether the signal output status to the management CPU 112 should be changed in this management output process, and to identify which managed objects the signal output status to the management CPU 112 should be changed for. In one management output process, the managed objects for which the main CPU 63 identifies whether the signal output status to the management CPU 112 should be changed are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a, whether the open/close execution mode is being executed, whether the high probability mode is being executed, and whether the front door frame 14 is open or closed, for a total of 10 objects. Therefore, the managed object counter is initially set to "10".

Then, it is determined whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current value of the managed object counter is at HI level (step S702). If it is not at HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter is 4 or greater, thereby identifying which of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is the managed object corresponding to the value of the managed object counter (step S703).

If a positive judgment is made in step S703, it is determined whether the output flag in the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning slot detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning slot detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "8" and corresponds to the third winning slot detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "6" and corresponds to the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, it determines whether the fifth output flag is set to "1." If the value of the managed counter is "5" and corresponds to the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, it determines whether the sixth output flag is set to "1." If the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, it determines whether the seventh output flag is set to "1." As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" during the ball entry detection process (Figure 14).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to HIGH (step S705). Then, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

If a negative judgment is made in step S703, it is determined whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to HI level (step S707). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether a transition to open/close execution mode has occurred; if the value of the managed counter is "2", it is determined whether a transition to high probability mode has occurred; and if the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has entered an open state. If a positive judgment is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S708).

If a positive judgment is made in step S702, the system determines whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a low level (step S709). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is 4 or greater and the currently managed object is one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a, the system determines whether a high output duration (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first through seventh signals was switched from a low level to a high level. This high output duration is set by the management CPU 112 to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (Figure 22), and is a period that allows the management CPU 112 to reliably identify the output state of the signal that switched from a low level to a high level. Furthermore, if the value of the management target counter is "3" and the current management target is in open/close execution mode, it determines whether the open/close execution mode has ended; if the value of the management target counter is "2" and the current management target is in high probability mode, it determines whether the high probability mode has ended; and if the value of the management target counter is "1" and the current management target is the front door frame 14, it determines whether the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. If an opportunity has arisen to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to a LOW level (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to a LOW level (step S710).

If a negative judgment is made in step S704, if the processing of step S706 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S707, if the processing of step S708 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S709, or if the processing of step S710 is executed, the value of the managed object counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter after the decrement is "0" (step S712). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or greater (step S712: NO), the processing from step S702 onwards is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new managed object counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 25. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (Figure 22).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112, out of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, is set in a confirmation target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116, out of the first through fifteenth correspondence areas 123a through 123o, that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first through tenth correspondence areas 123a through 123j, and therefore in step S801 the confirmation target counter is set to "10."

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, has changed from "0" to "1," it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from LOW to HIGH (step S802). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n," the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the target for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10," the tenth buffer 122j is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information.

If a positive determination is made in step S802, RTC information, which includes date and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). During this write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 currently being written is identified by referencing the pointer area 126 in the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S803 is written to the history information storage area 125 in the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Correspondence information is also read from the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current counter value being checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Furthermore, if the correspondence information is information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high probability mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14, not only the correspondence information but also start information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. If the value of the counter to be checked is "n," the nth correspondence area 123a-123o will be the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10," the tenth correspondence area 123j will be the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth correspondence area 123e will be the target for reading the correspondence information.

By executing the write process as described above, if the value of the counter to be checked is either the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, or second operating opening 34, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written stores a combination of RTC information and correspondence information indicating either the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, or second operating opening 34 as history information. Also, if the value of the counter to be checked is either the open/close execution mode, high probability mode, or front door frame 14, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written stores a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating either the open/close execution mode, high probability mode, or front door frame 14, and start information as history information.

Then, the target pointer is updated (step S805). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and incremented by one. A determination is made as to whether the pointer information after incrementing by one has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after incrementing by one is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S802, or if the processing of step S805 is executed, it is determined whether the correspondence information for which it is to be confirmed whether the signal output has been switched to a LOW level is stored in the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be confirmed (step S806). Specifically, if the current value of the counter to be confirmed is between "8" and "10", the corresponding correspondence area 123h-123j stores information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high probability mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14, and therefore a positive judgment is made in step S806.

If a positive determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current counter value among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is checked to see if it has changed from "1" to "0," thereby determining whether the output state of the input signal from the master CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from HI to LOW (step S807). If a positive determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808), as in step S803, and a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In this write process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Furthermore, correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a through 123o corresponding to the current counter value being checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, not only the correspondence information but also the termination information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. By executing the writing process in this manner, if the value of the counter to be checked is either the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, or the front door frame 14, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating either the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, or the front door frame 14, and the termination information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S805 (step S810).

If a negative judgment is made in step S806, if a negative judgment is made in step S807, or if the processing of step S810 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S812). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S812: NO), the processing from step S802 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in history memory 117 will be described with reference to the timing chart in Figure 26. Figure 26(a) shows the period when a HIGH level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, Figure 26(b) shows the period when a HIGH level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h, Figure 26(c) shows the period when a HIGH level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, Figure 26(d) shows the period when a HIGH level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and Figure 26(e) shows the timing for writing history information to history memory 117.

At time t1, as shown in Figure 26(a), the output state of the signal input to one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW to HIGH. Therefore, at time t1, history information is written to history memory 117 as shown in Figure 26(e). Then, at time t2, as shown in Figure 26(a), the signal that was switched to HIGH at time t1 is switched to LOW. However, since this signal is input to one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the switching to LOW does not result in history information being stored, no history information is written at time t2 as shown in Figure 26(e).

After that, at times t3, t5, t6, t9, t10, t13, and t14, the output state of the signal input to one of the first through seventh buffers 122a through 122g is switched from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figure 26(a). Therefore, at each of these times, history information is written, as shown in Figure 26(e).

As shown in Figure 26(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is HIGH from time t4 to time t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open/close execution mode is active. Therefore, as shown in Figure 26(e), history information is written at time t4, when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to HIGH, and at time t7, when the output state of that signal switches to LOW. In this case, the history information written at time t4 includes start information, and the history information written at time t7 includes end information. This makes it possible to determine the execution period of the open/close execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in chronological order. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is from the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, because the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish by comparing this RTC information whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is from the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in Figure 26(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is HIGH from time t8 to time t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high probability mode has occurred. Therefore, as shown in Figure 26(e), history information is written at time t8, when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to HIGH, and at time t11, when the output state of that signal switches to LOW. In this case, the history information written at time t8 includes start information, and the history information written at time t11 includes end information. This makes it possible to determine the execution period of the high probability mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in chronological order. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is from the high probability mode. Furthermore, because the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is from the high probability mode by comparing this RTC information.

As shown in Figure 26 (d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is HIGH from time t12 to time t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether the front door frame 14 is open or closed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 26 (e), history information is written at time t12, when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to HIGH, and at time t15, when the output state of that signal switches to LOW. In this case, the history information written at time t12 contains start information, and the history information written at time t15 contains end information. This makes it possible to determine the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in chronological order. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 occurred while the front door frame 14 was open. Furthermore, because the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish by comparing this RTC information whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 occurred while the front door frame 14 was open.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the data output processing is executed in step S111 of the main processing (Figure 11).

In the data output process, it is first determined whether a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 has been received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and if the connection signal has been received through the reading terminal 102, a positive determination is made in step S901.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated. In this case, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 must be restarted in order for the data output process to be executed. Therefore, in order for the history information to be output externally, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 must be started with a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. The power control unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is located on the back of the back pack unit 15. Therefore, in order to perform these stopping and starting operations, the gaming machine main body 12 must be opened relative to the outer frame 11 to expose the back of the back pack unit 15. Under these circumstances, by configuring the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 to be started with a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 in order for the history information to be output externally, it becomes difficult for anyone other than the gaming parlor manager to read the history information.

If a positive determination is made in step S901, the control device 102 determines whether a control information confirmation signal has been received from the read terminal 102, thereby determining whether the current connection of the read device to the read terminal 102 corresponds to confirmation of the control information (programs and data) of the main ROM 64 (step S902). The read device is configured to be able to confirm both the control information and the history information. If control information confirmation is selected by manual operation of the read device, a control information confirmation signal is transmitted from the read device. If history information confirmation is selected by manual operation of the read device, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the read device. Note that this is not limited to this, and the read device for control information confirmation and the read device for history confirmation may be separate. In this case, if a read device for control information confirmation is electrically connected to the read terminal 102, a control information confirmation signal is transmitted from the read device. If a read device for history confirmation is electrically connected to the read terminal 102, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the read device.

If a positive determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In this output process, programs and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the read terminal 102. This makes it possible to read the control information using a reading device electrically connected to the read terminal 102, making it possible to confirm whether the control information is authentic and normal.

If a negative judgment is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is sent to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HIGH level. This HIGH level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HIGH level output instruction signal has been input to the 16th buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to HIGH level, processing is executed in the management CPU 112 to output history information. This processing will be explained in detail later.

When the processing of step S903 or step S904 is executed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 continues (step S905). If it continues (step S905: YES), the processing waits in step S905. This makes it possible to prevent processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), the data output processing is terminated.

Next, the external output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 28. Note that the external output processing is executed in step S608 of the management processing (Figure 22).

If the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from LOW to HIGH (step S1001: YES), the process for outputting history information from step S1002 onward is executed. Specifically, the number of balls entering the outlet 24a is calculated by first counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the outlet 24a (step S1002). The number of balls entering the general winning slot 31 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the general winning slot 31 (step S1003). The number of balls entering the special winning slot 32 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the special winning slot 32 (step S1004). The number of balls that have entered the first actuation port 33 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating that the first actuation port 33 is located (step S1005). The number of balls that have entered the second actuation port 34 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is located (step S1006).

Then, by referencing the history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that exist in the period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is calculated (step S1007). The period between the history information storage area 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, if there are multiple sections within the entire consecutive pointer information that have a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 and a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and end information indicating the front door frame 14, the total number of balls scored for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14, but the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 does not store correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14, all history information in the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, the number of balls that entered the game while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1007, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the game calculated in steps S1002 to S1006. The following parameters are then calculated using the number of balls that entered the game after this subtraction: The difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port calculated in step S1002 is designated as the number of balls entering the port K1, the difference between the number of balls entering the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port calculated in step S1003 is designated as the number of balls entering the port K2, the difference between the number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port K3, the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port S1005 is designated as the number of balls entering the port K4, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port S1006 is designated as the number of balls entering the port K5.
First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning at the special winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the skill area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D1").
Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 (K2) / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Third parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 (K3) / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Fourth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 (K4) / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D2")
Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K5) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D3")
Sixth parameter: D1 - (D2 x "number of winning balls for winning through the first actuation port 33" + D3 x "number of winning balls for winning through the second actuation port 34")
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") The ratio of the number of prize balls for the prize) to the number of prize balls for the prize at the special electric prize winning device 32) and the eighth parameter: K3 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the special electric prize winning device 32 / the total number of game balls paid out (K2 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the general prize winning port 31 + K3 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the special electric prize winning device 32 + K4 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the first actuation port 33 + K5 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the second actuation port 34). Next, the oldest and newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is used to calculate the total time required for all the history information currently being calculated to be extracted (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Furthermore, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the first output process.

Then, by referencing the history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that exist in the period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 in the opening and closing execution mode is calculated (step S1011). The period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. Furthermore, if there are multiple sections within the entire set of consecutive pointer information between history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode and history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Furthermore, if there is a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, but the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode does not store correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, all history information in the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode is treated as being in the opening and closing execution mode.

Then, during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is active, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 while the front door frame 14 is in the open state is calculated (step S1012). The method for calculating these numbers of balls is the same as in step S1007, except that it is based on the period in which the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is active.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1012, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1012 is set as the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a, K11; the difference between the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1012 is set as the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a, K12; and the difference between the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1011 is set as the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32. The difference in the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1012 is designated as the number of balls that enter K13, the difference in the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 from the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 is designated as the number of balls that enter K14, and the difference in the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1011 from the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 is designated as the number of balls that enter K15.
11th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") / ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D11")
12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K12/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) 13th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 K13/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) 14th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K14/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D12")
・15th parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K15) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11 - (D12 x "number of winning balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + D13 x "number of winning balls for winning into the second actuation port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") Parameter K13 × "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K12 × "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 × "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 × "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 × "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio. Then, a second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the second output process.

Then, by referencing the history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that exist in the period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high probability mode and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high probability mode, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 in the high probability mode situation is calculated (step S1015). The period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high probability mode and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high probability mode in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. Furthermore, if there are multiple sections within the entire set of consecutive pointer information between history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high probability mode and history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high probability mode, the total number of balls scored for each section is calculated. Also, if there is a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high probability mode, but the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 storing correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high probability mode does not store correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high probability mode, all history information in the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 storing correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high probability mode is treated as being in the high probability mode.

Then, during the period of the high probability mode identified in step S1015, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is calculated (step S1016). The method for calculating these numbers of balls is the same as in step S1007, except that it is based on the period of the high probability mode identified in step S1015.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1016, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1016 is set as the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a, the difference between the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1016 is set as the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a, and the difference between the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1015 is set as the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32. The difference in the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1016 is designated as the number of balls that enter K23, the difference in the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 is designated as the number of balls that enter K24, and the difference in the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1016 is designated as the number of balls that enter K25.
21st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special winning device 32" + K24 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K25 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") / ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D11")
22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K22 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) 23rd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 K23 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) 24th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K24 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D22")
25th parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K25) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D23")
26th parameter: D21 - (D22 x "number of winning balls for winning through the first actuation port 33" + D23 x "number of winning balls for winning through the second actuation port 34")
Thereafter, a third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the third output process. Thereafter, a clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clear process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to all "0", and the pointer area 126 is also cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

<Configuration of the special telephone prize winning device 32>
Next, a description will be given of the configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32. Figure 29 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged area where the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided.

As already explained, the special electric winning device 32 is located in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The special electric winning device 32 is located at the vertical midpoint of the right area PA3, and at this midpoint, the special electric winning device 32 extends horizontally from the right frame portion 36g, which is the right part of the display surface of the pattern display device 41 in the center frame 36a, to the right end portion of the game area PA. By extending the special electric winning device 32 in this horizontal direction, game balls flowing down the right area PA3 will reliably pass through the area where the special electric winning device 32 is located.

The special electric winning device 32 comprises a passage forming body 201 in which the upstream region of the fourth discharge passage section 45 is formed, an opening/closing member 202 that blocks or allows game balls to enter the fourth discharge passage section 45, and a guide member 203 that guides the movement of the opening/closing member 202. The passage forming body 201 is integrated with the right frame section 36g of the center frame 36a and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24. The upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage section 45 is formed in the passage forming body 201 so that an entrance section 45b exists in the right wall section 201a of the passage forming body 201.

The entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is open to the right, allowing game balls flowing down the right-side area PA3 to enter. The upstream area 45c of the fourth discharge passage 45 slopes downward to the left in the area continuing from the entrance 45b, but downstream, the path direction changes to guide game balls toward the back side of the game board 24 and below the game board 24. The exit of the upstream area 45c of the fourth discharge passage 45 is located on the back side of the game board 24 and is connected to the entrance of the downstream area 45d of the fourth discharge passage 45 located on the back side of the game board 24. The downstream area 45d of the fourth discharge passage 45 extends vertically downward below the game board 24. With the above configuration, game balls that enter the fourth discharge passage 45 are discharged below the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24. As already explained, the fourth discharge passage 45 is provided with a special electric detection sensor 45a for detecting game balls that have entered the fourth discharge passage 45 (i.e., game balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32), and this special electric detection sensor 45a is installed in the passage forming body 201.

An opening/closing member 202 is provided to open and close the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45. Figure 30 is a perspective view of the opening/closing member 202, Figure 31 is a perspective view of the passage formation body 201 and the opening/closing member 202 showing how the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is opened and closed by the opening/closing member 202, and Figure 32 is a plan view of the opening/closing member 202 and the special power drive unit 32b.

The opening/closing member 202 is made of synthetic resin and includes a horizontally elongated base portion 211 with a rectangular outer edge and a predetermined width in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in Figure 30, and a blocking portion 212 that is integrally formed with the base portion 211 and stands upright in the vertical direction at one horizontal end of the base portion 211. The base portion 211 has an opening 213 that penetrates the base portion 211 vertically. The opening 213 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and its dimension in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is larger than the diameter of a gaming ball but smaller than twice the diameter of the gaming ball. The horizontal dimension of the opening 213 is set to be at least multiple times the diameter of the gaming ball; specifically, it is set to be larger than five times the diameter of the gaming ball but smaller than six times the diameter of the gaming ball. Although the position at which this opening 213 is formed is biased towards the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the base part 211, it is located midway in both the front-to-back and side-to-side directions of the base part 211, and there is a plate-shaped portion on the base part 211 around the opening 213.

A blocking portion 212 is formed on the base portion 211, rising upward from the left peripheral edge of the opening 213. The blocking portion 212 is formed in a plate shape, with a pair of front and back plate surfaces facing horizontally. The area of the plate surface of the blocking portion 212 is set to a size that is large enough to prevent game balls from flowing into the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, as shown in Figure 31 (a), and more specifically, large enough to completely close the entrance portion 45b.

As shown in Figures 29 and 31, the opening/closing member 202 is supported by the passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 in a state where it can slide in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, as shown in Figure 29, the guide member 203 is provided extending laterally from the right end portion of the play area PA to just in front of the passage forming body 201. The passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 have a slide through hole 221 that penetrates the game board 24 in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. The slide through hole 221 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer edge portion of the opening/closing member 202 when viewed from the front. The opening/closing member 202 is inserted into this slide through hole 221, and the opening/closing member 202 can slide in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the slide through hole 221.

When inserted into the slide through-hole 221, the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202 faces closely to the right-hand plate surface of the right wall portion 201a, where the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed in the passage forming body 201. The distance between the right-hand plate surface of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, but the distance can be any as long as the blocking portion 212 can prevent game balls from entering the fourth discharge passage portion 45. Furthermore, the right-hand plate surface of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 may abut, so that the blocking portion 212 slides along the right-hand plate surface of the right wall portion 201a as the opening/closing member 202 moves.

The opening/closing member 202 can be moved between a closed position, in which the blocking portion 212 blocks the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, as shown in FIG. 31(a), and an open position, in which the blocking portion 212 moves further rearward than the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, opening the entrance portion 45b to the right, as shown in FIG. 31(b). Also, as shown in FIG. 32, a special power drive unit 32b is provided on the rear side of the opening/closing member 202 toward the pachinko machine 10 for sliding the opening/closing member 202 in the fore-and-aft direction of the pachinko machine 10. The special power drive unit 32b is a solenoid, which is an electric actuator. In a non-driven state in which no drive signal is output from the main CPU 63 to the special power drive unit 32b, the output portion 226 of the special power drive unit 32b is positioned in the protruding position due to the biasing force of the biasing member 225 of the special power drive unit 32b. On the other hand, in a driving state in which a drive signal is output from the main CPU 63 to the special power drive unit 32b, a force pulling the output unit 226 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 is applied to the output unit 226, causing the output unit 226 to move toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 against the biasing force of the biasing member 225 and be positioned in a retracted position. The tip of the output unit 226 is connected to the rear end of the open/close member 202. Therefore, when the special power drive unit 32b is in a non-driving state and the output unit 226 is positioned in the protruding position, the open/close member 202 is positioned in the closed position as shown in Figure 31(a), and when the special power drive unit 32b is in a driving state and the output unit 226 is positioned in the retracted position, the open/close member 202 is positioned in the open position as shown in Figure 31(b). Furthermore, since the main body 227 of the special power drive unit 32b is located on the rear side of the game board 24 and the output unit 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening/closing member 202, the special power drive unit 32b is not visible or is difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The state of the special telephone winning device 32 when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position and the open position will be explained with reference to Figures 31(a) and 31(b), as well as Figures 33(a) and 33(b). Figures 33(a) and 33(b) are cross-sectional views taken along line A-A in Figure 29. Furthermore, Figures 31(a) and 33(a) show the state when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, while Figures 31(b) and 33(b) show the state when the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position. First, we will explain the state when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position.

When the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202, as shown in Figures 31(a) and 33(a). As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, game balls are prevented from entering the fourth discharge passage portion 45.

As already explained, the opening 213 of the base 211 exists to the right of the blocking section 212, regardless of whether the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position. Furthermore, the guide plate 214, which is the area of the base 211 that is further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the opening 213, has its front end facing the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 at a position close to it when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position. The distance between the end of this guide plate 214 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of a gaming ball. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, even if a gaming ball resting on the guide plate 214 attempts to flow downward from the front end of the guide plate 214, it is blocked by the window panel 52.

When the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, the left end of the guide plate 214 is inserted into a slide-through hole 221 formed in the passage forming body 201 below the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 and extending in the front-to-rear direction. In this case, the upper surface of the guide plate 214 slopes downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and downward toward the left. In this configuration, the passage forming body 201 protrudes toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24, and the front end of the passage forming body 201 faces the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 in a position close to it. The distance between the front end of the passage forming body 201 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, even if a game ball attempts to move from the left end of the guide plate 214 to the left of the guide plate 214, the path forming body 201 blocks the movement of the game ball. Furthermore, as already explained, the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 not only slopes downward to the left, but also slopes downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, so that when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, game balls placed on the guide plate portion 214 will move under their own weight toward the opening 213 and flow into the opening 213.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the guide member 203 is arranged to protrude forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24, and its forward-protruding portion faces from above the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 when it is in the closed position. The left side region 232 of this forward-protruding portion, excluding the receiving portion 231 on the right end, extends laterally along the opening 213 of the base portion 211 when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position. However, the amount of protrusion of the left side region 232 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is such that the opening 213 of the base portion 211 is not included in the opposing range. This prevents the opening 213 from being blocked by the guide member 203 when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position. Furthermore, because the front-to-rear dimension of the left side region 232 is less than the radius of the game ball, the game ball will not ride up onto the left side region 232.

On the other hand, the receiving portion 231, which is located on the right side of the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 in the guide member 203, protrudes further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the left-side region 232, and its front tip faces the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 at a position close to it. The distance between the tip of this receiving portion 231 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, even if a game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 attempts to flow downward from the front tip of the receiving portion 231, it will be blocked by the window panel 52. Furthermore, because the receiving portion 231 is located at the right end of the game board 24, even if a game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 attempts to flow downward from the right end of the receiving portion 231, it will be blocked by a portion of the resin base 21 located to the right of the game board 24.

The upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is designed so that both the front-to-rear and lateral dimensions are larger than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the front region 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is located closer to the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202, which is in the closed position. A restricting portion 234 is integrally formed on the left edge of this front region 233 to prevent a game ball placed in the front region 233 from falling to the left of the front region 233. In addition, the front region 233 slopes downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, a game ball placed in the front region 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 will move by its own weight to the rear region 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231. The rear area 235 slopes downward to the left, and there is no portion that prevents game balls from flowing downward from the left end of the rear area 235 to the left of the rear area 235. Therefore, when the open/close member 202 is in the closed position, game balls that rest on the rear area 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 will move by their own weight toward the opening 213 of the open/close member 202 and flow into the opening 213.

Next, we will explain the case where the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position. When the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, as shown in Figures 31(b) and 33(b), the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is open to the right without being closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202. This allows game balls to enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45.

When the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, the entire opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 is positioned within the slide through-hole 221, and the guide plate portion 214 in the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 is located to the right of the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. In this case, the guide plate portion 214 extends laterally between the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and the rear region 235 of the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203, as shown in Figure 33(b). As already explained, because the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 slopes downward toward the left end of the rear region 235, a gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves under its own weight toward the guide plate portion 214. Furthermore, because the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 slopes downward toward the left, a gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 moves under its own weight toward the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. In other words, when the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, a gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 or the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 moves under its own weight toward the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and enters the entrance 45b. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, not only is it possible for a gaming ball to enter the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, but the opening/closing member 202 also guides the gaming ball's entry into the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45.

When the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, it moves further toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 than when it is in the closed position, increasing the distance between the front end of the guide plate 214 and the window panel 52. This distance is greater than the diameter of a game ball. Therefore, depending on the direction and force of a game ball flowing down toward the special electric winning device 32 in the right-side area PA3, the game ball may enter the space between the guide plate 214 and the window panel 52 and flow down through that space, resulting in the game ball flowing down below the special electric winning device 32. In other words, even when the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, a game ball that reaches the position of the special electric winning device 32 may flow down below the special electric winning device 32 without winning. However, this is not limited to this, and a protrusion that protrudes upward may be integrally formed over the entire front end of the guide plate portion 214, thereby making it impossible or difficult for game balls placed on the guide plate portion 214 to fall downward from the front end of the guide plate portion 214.

Next, referring again to Figure 29, we will explain the configuration for ensuring that the flow pattern of gaming balls in the right area PA3 is a predetermined pattern.

In the right-side area PA3, upstream of the special electric winning device 32, there is provided a guide means for guiding game balls flowing downstream on the upstream side of the right-side area PA3 to the right end of the special electric winning device 32, more specifically, to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 and its surrounding area. The guide means comprises a guide nail group 241 consisting of multiple nails 24b. The guide nail group 241 is formed by arranging multiple nails 24b downward to the right, creating a guide section that slopes downward from the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. In this case, the distance between the leftmost nail 24b in the guide nail group 241 and the right frame portion 36g is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, and the distance between adjacent nails 24b in the guide nail group 241 is also set to be less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, a gaming ball that reaches the guide nail group 241 is guided by the guide portion of the guide nail group 241 toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203.

When the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, the game ball guided to the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is guided by the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 to the opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202, as already explained, and flows into said opening 213. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, a game ball that flows down the right-side area PA3 and reaches the special electric winning device 32 will flow into the area of the opening 213 in the base portion 211 closer to the receiving portion 231 and flow downward toward the special electric winning device 32.

As already explained, a through gate 35 is provided in the right-side area PA3, and this through gate 35 is located downstream of the special electric winning device 32, near the path forming body 201 of the special electric winning device 32. In addition, a group of restricting nails 242 is provided between the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 to ensure that only game balls that flow down from a position near the path forming body 201 of the special electric winning device 32 to below the special electric winning device 32 can enter the through gate 35. This prevents game balls that reach the special electric winning device 32 from passing through the through gate 35 when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 202 is positioned in the open position, a gaming ball that reaches the special electric winning device 32 flows down the guide plate 214 of the base 211 toward the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45, as already explained. In this case, if the opening/closing member 202 is maintained in the open position until a gaming ball on the guide plate 214 reaches the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45, the gaming ball will enter the entrance 45b. In contrast, if the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position before reaching the entrance 45b, the gaming ball on the guide plate 214 at that time will move toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 in response to the movement of the guide plate 214 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and will then be guided along the slope of the upper surface of the guide plate 214 to the opening 213 of the base 211 and flow into the opening 213. Therefore, if the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position while a gaming ball is present within the predetermined range X near the path forming body 201 on the guide plate portion 214, the gaming ball will flow downward toward the special power winning device 32 at a position near the path forming body 201 and pass through the through gate 35. When the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, reserved information on the normal side is acquired, and an opportunity arises to open the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34. In other words, the opportunity for the ball to enter the through gate 35, i.e., the opportunity to open the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34, only occurs in the opening/closing execution mode.

Referring to the time chart in Figure 34, we will explain how winning occurs in the second operating port 34 in the opening/closing execution mode. Figure 34(a) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, Figure 34(b) shows the open/closed state of the special power winning device 32, Figure 34(c) shows the timing when winning occurs in the through gate 35, Figure 34(d) shows the execution period when the second operating port 34 is open, and Figure 34(e) shows the timing when winning occurs in the second operating port 34. Note that when the normal power opening state is reached, the second operating port 34 will open multiple times, but for the sake of convenience in Figure 34, we will explain it as if the second operating port 34 only opens once.

At timing t1, the open/close execution mode is initiated as shown in Figure 34(a). In this open/close execution mode, as shown in Figure 34(b), rounds of play are played during periods such as timing t2 to timing t3, timing t7 to timing t9, and timing t13 to timing t15, and the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state.

During the round play from timing t2 to timing t3 and the round play from timing t7 to timing t9, when the special electric winning device 32 changes from an open state to a closed state at timings t3 and t9, respectively, a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32. Then, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position at timings t3 and t9, respectively, and the special electric winning device 32 changes from an open state to a closed state, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 falls into the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202. The fallen game ball enters the through gate 35 at timings t4 and t10, respectively, as shown in Figure 34(c). As a result, pending information on the regular map side is acquired, and the display of changing images begins on the regular map display unit 38a. Then, as the display of the changing image ends, the normal electric device 34a of the second actuation port 34 is opened from t5 to t8 and from t11 to t14, as shown in FIG. 34(d). As previously explained, even a game ball flowing down the right-side area PA3 can reach the location of the second actuation port 34. Therefore, by continuing to fire a game ball toward the right-side area PA3 in an attempt to have the game ball enter the special electric winning device 32, a winning ball will enter the second actuation port 34 at t6 and t12, as shown in FIG. 34(e). This causes the second pending information to be acquired. Since the start of a new game round is prevented during the opening/closing execution mode, the execution of the win/loss determination process for the acquired second pending information and the start of a game round triggered by the second pending information will occur after the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, during the round play from timing t13 to timing t15, when the special electric winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state at timing t15, there is no game ball on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32, or even if there is a game ball on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball does not fall to a position where it can enter the through gate 35. Therefore, no game ball enters the through gate 35 at the end of that round play.

Then, at time t16, as shown in Figure 34(a), the opening/closing execution mode occurs. When the opening/closing execution mode ends, the reserved information for the regular map is stored in the regular map reserve area 65c. As a result, at time t17, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the second operating port 34 begins to open as shown in Figure 34(d), and this opening period continues until time t19. During this period, a firing operation is performed to cause the game ball to flow down the left area PA2 or the right area PA3, resulting in a win in the second operating port 34 at time t18, as shown in Figure 34(e). In this case, if the upper limit of second reserved information is not stored in the second special map reserve area 86 at this time, new second reserved information is acquired. This second reserved information is then used to execute the win/loss determination process and trigger the start of a new round of play.

<Execution mode of opening/closing execution mode>
Next, the execution mode of the opening and closing execution mode will be described with reference to Figures 35(a) and 35(b).

As already explained, in this embodiment, the possible jackpot results are a 2R low probability result, a 2R high probability result, a 4R low probability result, a 4R high probability result, a 6R low probability result, a 6R high probability result, a 10R low probability result, a 10R high probability result, a 16R low probability result, and a 16R high probability result. In all of the opening and closing execution modes that occur when these jackpot results are achieved, the interval period between each round of play is set to 3 seconds, as shown in Figure 35(a). Furthermore, in all of these opening and closing execution modes, the maximum number of prizes that can be won by the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round of play is set to 10, and the open duration of each round of play is set to 29 seconds. Furthermore, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once in each round of play.

However, the number of rounds that occur in these opening and closing execution modes differs. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to two for a 2R low probability result and a 2R high probability result, four for a 4R low probability result and a 4R high probability result, six for a 6R low probability result and a 6R high probability result, ten for a 10R low probability result and a 10R high probability result, and sixteen for a 16R low probability result and a 16R high probability result. The more rounds that are executed, the more balls that enter the special electric prize-winning device 32 in one opening and closing execution mode, so a jackpot result with a greater number of rounds is more advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the more rounds of play are performed, the more frequently the opening/closing member 202 of the special power winning device 32 slides between the open and closed positions. As already explained, when the opening/closing member 202 slides from the open position to the closed position, a game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 may enter the through gate 35. Therefore, the more times the opening/closing member 202 slides between the open and closed positions, the more frequently a ball enters the through gate 35. Entering the through gate 35 triggers the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 to open. When the second pending information acquired upon entering the second operating port 34 is subjected to the win/loss determination process, either a jackpot result or a small jackpot result occurs, ensuring that the open/close execution mode is triggered. From this perspective, a jackpot result resulting from a greater number of rounds of play is more advantageous to the player.

Low-probability results and high-probability results are set as jackpot results where the number of rounds is the same. In other words, a 2R low-probability result and a 2R high-probability result are set as jackpot results where two rounds are played. A 4R low-probability result and a 4R high-probability result are set as jackpot results where four rounds are played. A 6R low-probability result and a 6R high-probability result are set as jackpot results where six rounds are played. A 10R low-probability result and a 10R high-probability result are set as jackpot results where ten rounds are played. A 16R low-probability result and a 16R high-probability result are set as jackpot results where sixteen rounds are played. As a result, as jackpot results where the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode is the same, there are low-probability results where the win/loss lottery mode after the open/close execution mode is the low-probability mode, and high-probability results where the win/loss lottery mode after the open/close execution mode is the high-probability mode. Therefore, for the number of rounds that occur in the open/close execution mode, there will be jackpot results that have the same player profit level but different settings for the win/lose lottery mode, increasing the variety of jackpot results that players can look forward to.

As already explained, in this embodiment, there are three small win results: a first small win result, a second small win result, and a third small win result. In all of the opening and closing execution modes that occur when these small win results are obtained, the upper limit on the number of wins is set to 10, as shown in Figure 35 (b). Meanwhile, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 opens in the opening and closing execution mode, and the duration for which the special electric winning device 32 remains open each time it is opened, differ depending on the small win result.

Figure 36 is a time chart illustrating the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a small win result. Figures 36(a1), 36(a2), and 36(a3) show the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, and Figures 36(b1), 36(b2), and 36(b3) show the period during which the special power winning device 32 is in the open state. Also, Figures 36(a1) and 36(b1) show the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a first small win result, Figures 36(a2) and 36(b2) show the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a second small win result, and Figures 36(a3) and 36(b3) show the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a third small win result.

In the case of the first small win result, when the opening and closing execution mode is executed from timing t1 to timing t4 as shown in Figure 36 (a1), the special electric winning device 32 is opened only once from timing t2 to timing t3 as shown in Figure 36 (b1). The opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 in this single opening is set to 10 seconds as shown in Figure 35 (b). The game ball firing cycle is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 in this opening and closing execution mode is 10, so this opening duration is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter.

In the case of a second small jackpot result, when the opening and closing execution mode is executed from timing t1 to timing t20 as shown in FIG. 36(a2), the special electric winning device 32 is opened once each from timing t2 to timing t11, timing t12 to timing t13, timing t14 to timing t15, timing t16 to timing t17, and timing t18 to timing t19 as shown in FIG. 36(b2). In other words, in the case of a second small jackpot result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened five times. The open duration of the special electric winning device 32 for each opening is set to two seconds as shown in FIG. 35(b). The game ball firing cycle is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode is 10. Therefore, the open duration for each opening is shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode. However, the total duration of each opening will be longer than the product of the ball firing cycle and the maximum number of winning balls. Also, the total duration of each opening will be equal to the duration of one opening in the opening/closing execution mode for the first small win result.

In the case of a third small win result, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed from timing t1 to timing t40 as shown in Figure 36 (a3), as shown in Figure 36 (b3), the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once each from timing t2 to timing t21, timing t22 to timing t23, timing t24 to timing t25, timing t26 to timing t27, timing t28 to timing t29, timing t30 to timing t31, timing t32 to timing t33, timing t34 to timing t35, timing t36 to timing t37, and timing t38 to timing t39. In other words, in the case of a third small win result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened 10 times. The opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 for each opening is set to 1 second as shown in Figure 35 (b). The game ball firing cycle is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode is 10, so the opening duration of each opening is shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit of winning balls. However, the total opening duration of each opening is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit of winning balls. Furthermore, the total opening duration of each opening is equal to the opening duration of one opening in the opening and closing execution mode for the first small win result, and is equal to the total opening duration of each opening for the second small win result.

As described above, the opening/closing execution mode for each small win result is set so that the fewer the number of openings, the longer the opening duration for each opening. The longer the opening duration of the special electric winning device 32, the more likely it is that a win will occur in the special electric winning device 32. On the other hand, the more times the special electric winning device 32 is opened, the more opportunities there are for the special electric winning device 32 to switch from an open state to a closed state with a game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, making it more likely that a win will occur in the through gate 35. Therefore, with the first small win result, a win in the special electric winning device 32 is most likely to occur, but a win in the through gate 35 is least likely to occur. With the third small win result, a win in the special electric winning device 32 is least likely to occur, but a win in the through gate 35 is most likely to occur. With the second small win result, both a win in the special electric winning device 32 and a win in the through gate 35 are moderately likely to occur. As a result, players hoping to win the special line winning device 32 will be hoping for the first small win result, and players hoping to win the through gate 35 will be hoping for the third small win result. This makes it possible to diversify the targets that players look forward to. Also, since there are benefits to each of the first, second, and third small win results, it is possible to increase the player's attention to each small win result.

In both the second and third small win results, the special electric winning device 32 will open multiple times, but the interval between each opening is the same at 3 seconds. Furthermore, the game ball can reach the specified range X on the guide plate portion 214 after the opening/closing member 202 has been in the open position for 1 second.

<General purpose power control processing>
Next, the processing configuration for switching the second operating port 34 between the open state and the closed state, and the processing configuration for switching the special power winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be explained. First, the processing configuration for switching the second operating port 34 between the open state and the closed state will be explained. Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the normal power control processing executed by the main CPU 63. The normal power control processing is executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 12).

First, a process for acquiring reserved information for the normal map side is executed (step S1101). During this acquisition process, if a win has occurred at the through gate 35 and the maximum number of reserved information for the normal map side has not yet been acquired in the normal map reserve area 65c, the numerical information of the normal random number counter C4 is stored in the normal map reserve area 65c. In this case, the reserved information for the normal map side is stored in the order of the first area 88a → second area 88b → third area 88c → fourth area 88d.

Then, the numerical information of the normal map/normal power counter stored in the main RAM 65 is read (step S1102), and the normal map/normal power address table stored in the main ROM 64 is read (step S1103). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the normal map/normal power counter is obtained from the normal map/normal power address table (step S1104), and the process jumps to the processing indicated by the obtained start address (step S1105).

The normal map/normal power counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine which of the processes in steps S1106 to S1110 in the normal map/normal power control process should be executed. The normal map/normal power address table contains the start address in the program for executing each process in steps S1106 to S1110, corresponding to the numerical information of the normal map/normal power counter. If the value of the normal map/normal power counter is "0," the process jumps to normal map change start processing in step S1106. If the value of the normal map/normal power counter is "1," the process jumps to normal map change processing in step S1107. If the value of the normal map/normal power counter is "2," the process jumps to normal map confirmation processing in step S1108. If the value of the normal map/normal power counter is "3," the process jumps to normal power open processing in step S1109. If the value of the normal map/normal power counter is "4," the process jumps to normal power closed processing in step S1110.

In the normal map change start process of step S1106, provided that normal map side reserved information is reserved and stored in the normal map reserve area 65c, a process is executed to shift the normal map side reserved information stored in the normal map reserve area 65c. Specifically, the normal map side reserved information stored in the first area 88a of the normal map reserve area 65c is shifted to the normal map execution area 89, and then the normal map side reserved information is shifted from the second area 88b to the first area 88a, the third area 88c to the second area 88b, and the fourth area 88d to the third area 88c. The normal power release lottery process is then executed using the normal map side reserved information newly shifted to the normal map execution area 89 as the lottery value. As already explained, in this embodiment, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the probability of winning the normal power open state in the normal power open lottery process is constant regardless of the game state, such as whether or not the game is in open/close execution mode, and whether or not the win/lose lottery mode is in high probability mode; specifically, the probability of winning the normal power open state is 9/10.

However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the normal power release state may be higher or lower than this. Also, rather than executing a normal power release lottery process, the normal power release state may be configured to occur exactly once for each normal power side pending information. In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the normal power release state occurs.

When the normal power release lottery process is executed during the normal map fluctuation start process, a process is executed to start the display of changing patterns on the normal map display unit 38a. In this case, information on the period during which the normal map display unit 38a displays changing patterns is set in a normal map normal power timer counter provided in the main RAM 65. The value set in the normal map normal power timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12) is executed. As already explained, this embodiment has only one support mode. Therefore, the period during which the changing patterns are displayed on the normal map display unit 38a is constant regardless of the game state, such as whether the open/close execution mode is active or not, and whether the win/lose lottery mode is in the high probability mode or not; specifically, it is set to 5 seconds. Then, when the display of changing patterns on the normal map display unit 38a is started, the value of the normal map normal power counter is updated from "0" to "1." As a result, the process to be executed in the next round of the normal map normal power control process becomes the normal map fluctuation process.

However, this is not limited to this, and the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a may be longer or shorter than this. Alternatively, multiple variable display periods for the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a may be set, and the variable display period to be executed may be determined by lottery. Furthermore, in a configuration in which a normal power release lottery process is not executed, but rather a normal power release state occurs reliably once for one normal map side reserved information, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a may not be executed, and if new reserved information on the normal map side is acquired when the normal power release state is not in a normal power release state, or if the normal power release state ends when reserved information on the normal map side is reserved and stored, a new normal power release state may be initiated using the reserved information on the normal map side as a trigger for execution. Conversely, even in a configuration in which a normal power release state occurs reliably once for one normal map side reserved information, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a may be executed, and the normal power release state may be initiated after the variable display of the pattern is executed.

In the normal map change processing of step S1107, processing is executed to update the display of the image in the normal map display unit 38a. Also, if the value set in the normal map normal power timer counter in the main RAM 65 in the normal map change start processing is "0", information about the normal map confirmation period is set in the normal map normal power timer counter in the main RAM 65, and processing is executed to display on the normal map display unit 38a the image corresponding to the result of the normal power release lottery processing that triggered the execution of this image change display in the normal map display unit 38a. Then, the value of the normal map normal power counter is updated from "1" to "2". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the normal map normal power control processing becomes the normal map confirmation processing.

In the normal map confirmation processing of step S1108, if the value of the normal map normal power timer counter is "0", it is determined whether the result of the normal power release lottery processing that triggered the execution of this image change display round was a win for the normal power release state. If the result was not a win for the normal power release state, the value of the normal map normal power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the normal map normal power control processing becomes the normal map change start processing.

If the normal power open state is selected, processing is executed to set the normal power open state. Specifically, the normal power open count counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "3." The normal power open count counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the remaining number of times the normal power device 34a can be opened in the normal power open state. Furthermore, numerical information on the duration of the open state (specifically, 2 seconds) when the normal power device 34a is opened once is set in the normal power timer counter. Furthermore, the normal power winning counter is set to "10." Furthermore, the output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is initiated so that the normal power device 34a is opened. The normal power winning counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the remaining game balls that can enter the second operating port 34 in the normal power open state. Each time a winning ball enters the second operating port 34, the value of the normal power winning counter is decremented by one. When the value of the normal power winning counter reaches "0," the current normal power open state is terminated regardless of the number of times the normal power device 34a remains open or the remaining open duration at that time. The value of the normal power counter is then updated from "2" to "3." This causes the process to be executed in the next normal power control process to become the normal power open process. As already explained, this embodiment has only one support mode. Therefore, the number of times the normal power device 34a is open in the normal power open state, the open duration when the normal power device 34a is opened once, and the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the second operating port 34 in the normal power open state are constant regardless of the game state, such as whether the open/close execution mode is active or not, and whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode or not.

In the normal power open processing of step S1109, if a win has occurred in the second operating port 34, a value corresponding to the number of wins is subtracted from the value of the normal power win counter in the main RAM 65. If the value of the normal power win counter is "0," the value of the normal power open count counter is cleared to "0," the value of the normal power timer counter is cleared to "0," and the output of the drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is stopped to close the normal power device 34a, and the value of the normal power counter is cleared to "0." As a result, the process to be executed in the next round of the normal power control processing becomes the normal power change start processing. Furthermore, even if the value of the normal power win counter is not "0," if the value of the normal power timer counter is "0," the output of the drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is stopped to close the normal power device 34a, and the value of the normal power open count counter in the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1. If the value of the normal power release count counter is not "0", the numerical information for the duration of closure of the normal power device 34a is set in the normal power timer counter, and then the value of the normal power counter is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next normal power control process will be the normal power closed process. If the value of the normal power release count counter is "0", the value of the normal power counter is cleared to "0" without setting a value in the normal power timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next normal power control process will be the normal power change start process.

In the normal power closed processing of step S1110, provided that the value of the normal power timer counter is "0", the normal power device 34a is opened by starting to output a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b, and the numerical information of the open duration (specifically, 2 seconds) when the normal power device 34a is opened once is set in the normal power timer counter. Then, the value of the normal power counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing of the normal power control processing becomes the normal power open processing.

By executing the normal power normal power control process as described above, the occurrence of a winning entry into the through gate 35 triggers the display of a changing pattern in the normal power display section 38a. If the normal power open state is won in the normal power open lottery process, the normal power open state is entered, in which the normal power device 34a in the second operating port 34 is opened. When the normal power open state is entered and the second operating port 34 is opened, it becomes possible for a game ball to enter the second operating port 34, and when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, the second reserve information is stored in the second special chart reserve area 86.

<Special diagram special power control processing>
Next, a process for switching the special power prize winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing the special power control process executed by the main CPU 63. The special power control process is executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 12).

First, the process for acquiring pending information is executed (step S1201). In the process for acquiring pending information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, if a winning entry has occurred in the first activation port 33 (step S1301: YES) and the number of first pending information stored in the first special symbol holding area 85 is less than the upper limit number (step S1302: YES), processing is executed to acquire the first pending information. Whether a winning entry has occurred in the first activation port 33 is determined by determining whether the first activation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1." As already explained, the first activation winning flag is set to "1" in step S315 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14). Furthermore, if a positive determination is made in step S1301, the first activation winning flag is cleared to "0."

In the process for acquiring the first reserved information, the value of the first reserved information counter provided in the main RAM 65 is first incremented by 1 to allow the main CPU 63 to grasp the number of unprocessed first reserved information stored in the first special symbol reserved area 85 (step S1303). Incidentally, the display content of the first special symbol reserved display unit 37c in the special symbol unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special symbol reserved counter. As a result, the display content of the first special symbol reserved display unit 37c corresponds to the number of first reserved information stored in the first special symbol reserved area 85. Next, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special symbol reserved area 85, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step S1303 (step S1304). Then, a first reserved command is transmitted to the audio and light-emitting control device 81 (step S1305). When the audio and light-emitting control device 81 receives the first reserved command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. The symbol display device 41 displays an image to notify the user of the number of first reserved information pieces stored in the first special symbol reserved area 85, and upon receiving a command corresponding to the first reserved command, the display control device 82 updates the content of the image display to reflect the fact that the number of first reserved information pieces has increased by one. When a game play triggered by the first reserved information piece is started, the content of the image display is updated to reflect the fact that the number of first reserved information pieces has decreased by one.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1301, if a negative judgment is made in step S1302, or if the processing of step S1305 is executed, a win has occurred in the second actuation port 34 (step S1306: YES), and further, provided that the number of second pending information stored in the second special chart pending area 86 is less than the upper limit number of stored information (step S1307: YES), processing is executed to acquire the second pending information. Note that the determination of whether a win has occurred in the second actuation port 34 is made by determining whether the second actuation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1." As already explained, the second actuation winning flag is set to "1" in step S319 of the ball entry detection processing (Figure 14). Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step S1306, the second actuation winning flag is cleared to "0."

In the process for acquiring the second reserved information, the main CPU 63 first increments the value of the second reserved information counter provided in the main RAM 65 by 1 to determine the number of unprocessed second reserved information stored in the second special symbol reserved area 86 (step S1308). Incidentally, the display content of the second special symbol reserved display unit 37d in the special symbol unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special symbol reserved counter. As a result, the display content of the second special symbol reserved display unit 37d corresponds to the number of second reserved information stored in the second special symbol reserved area 86. Then, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserved area 86, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory count incremented by 1 in step S1308 (step S1309). Then, a second reserved command is transmitted to the audio and light-emitting control device 81 (step S1310). When the audio and light-emitting control device 81 receives the second reserved command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. The symbol display device 41 displays an image to notify the number of second reserved information items stored in the second special symbol reserved area 86, and when the display control device 82 receives a command corresponding to the second reserved command, it updates the content of the image display to correspond to the number of second reserved information items having increased by one. When a game play triggered by the second reserved information is started, the content of the image display is updated to correspond to the number of second reserved information items having decreased by one.

After executing the pending information acquisition process (step S1201), the numerical information of the special chart special power counter stored in the main RAM 65 is read (step S1202), and the special chart special power address table stored in the main ROM 64 is read (step S1203). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special chart special power counter is obtained from the special chart special power address table (step S1204), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S1205).

The special chart special power counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine which of the processes in steps S1206 to S1212 in the special chart special power control processing should be executed, and the special chart special power address table has a starting address set in the program for executing each process in steps S1206 to S1212 corresponding to the numerical information of the special chart special power counter. If the value of the special diagram special line counter is "0", the process jumps to special diagram change start processing in step S1206; if the value of the special diagram special line counter is "1", the process jumps to special diagram change in progress processing in step S1207; if the value of the special diagram special line counter is "2", the process jumps to special diagram confirmation processing in step S1208; if the value of the special diagram special line counter is "3", the process jumps to special line start processing in step S1209; if the value of the special diagram special line counter is "4", the process jumps to special line open processing in step S1210; if the value of the special diagram special line counter is "5", the process jumps to special line closed processing in step S1211; and if the value of the special diagram special line counter is "6", the process jumps to special line end processing in step S1212. Each process in steps S1206 to S1212 is explained individually below.

<Special chart change start processing>
First, the special chart variation start process of step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 39. Note that the special chart variation start process is not executed in a situation where a game round has already been executed or in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode is executed.

In the special symbol change start process, if second reserved information is not stored in the second special symbol reserve area 86 and first reserved information is stored in the first special symbol reserve area 85 (step S1401: YES, step S1402: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S1403). In the first data setting process, data stored in the first area 85a of the first special symbol reserve area 85 is moved to the execution area 87 for the special symbol. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first special symbol reserve area 85. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first through fourth areas 85a-85d sequentially toward the lower areas. The data in the first area 85a is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area 85b to the first area 85a, the third area 85c to the second area 85b, and the fourth area 85d to the third area 85c. Then, the value of the first special symbol reserve counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the first special symbol pending display section 37c in the special symbol unit 37 is changed to one indicating that the number of first pending information items has decreased by one. Furthermore, in this data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the number of first pending information items in the first special symbol pending area 85 has decreased by one is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 81. When the audio and light emitting control device 81 receives the first decrease command, it sends a corresponding command to the display control device 82. As already explained, the pattern display device 41 displays an image to notify the number of first pending information items stored in the first special symbol pending area 85, and upon receiving the command corresponding to the first decrease command, the display control device 82 updates the content of the image display to content indicating that the number of first pending information items has decreased by one.

On the other hand, if second reserved information is stored in the second special symbol reserved area 86 (steps S1401 and S1402: YES), even if first reserved information acquired before the second reserved information is stored in the first special symbol reserved area 85, a second data setting process is executed (step S1404). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 86a of the second special symbol reserved area 86 is moved to the execution area 87 for the special symbol. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second special symbol reserved area 86. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first through fourth areas 86a through 86d sequentially toward the lower areas. The data in the first area 86a is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted, such as from the second area 86b to the first area 86a, the third area 86c to the second area 86b, and the fourth area 86d to the third area 86c. After that, the value of the second special symbol pending counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special symbol pending display section 37d in the special symbol unit 37 is changed to one indicating that the number of second pending information items has decreased by one. Furthermore, in this data setting process, a second decrease command indicating that the number of second pending information items in the second special symbol pending area 86 has decreased by one is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 81. When the audio and light emitting control device 81 receives the second decrease command, it sends a corresponding command to the display control device 82. As already explained, the symbol display device 41 displays an image to notify the number of second pending information items stored in the second special symbol pending area 86, and upon receiving the command corresponding to the second decrease command, the display control device 82 updates the image display content to one indicating that the number of second pending information items has decreased by one.

Here, if second reserved information is stored as described above, the second reserved information will be subject to shifting to the special symbol execution area 87, even if first reserved information obtained before the second reserved information is stored. As a result, the second reserved information will be consumed with priority over the first reserved information as the target for starting a game round.

If the processing of step S1403 or step S1404 is executed, a win/loss determination process is executed (step S1405). In the win/loss determination process, if the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, a low-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol (see FIG. 9(a)) is read from the main ROM 64; if the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, a high-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol (see FIG. 9(b)) is read from the main ROM 64; if the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, a low-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol (see FIG. 9(c)) is read from the main ROM 64; and if the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, a high-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol (see FIG. 9(d)) is read from the main ROM 64. After reading the hit/miss table, the hit/miss determination information, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1, is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 87 for the special chart, and a determination is made as to whether the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the hit/miss table. Also, if the start target for this game round is the second reserved information and it does not match the numerical information set as the jackpot result, a determination is made as to whether the hit/miss determination information matches any of the numerical information set for each of the first small hit result, second small hit result, and third small hit result in the hit/miss table.

If the result of the hit/miss determination process is a jackpot result (step S1406: YES), the allocation determination process is executed (step S1407). In the allocation determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first reserved information, the allocation table for the first special symbol (see FIG. 10(a)) is read from the main ROM 64, and if the start target of the game round is the second reserved information, the allocation table for the second special symbol (see FIG. 10(b)) is read from the main ROM 64. After reading the allocation table, the allocation determination information, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2, is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 87 for the special symbol, and the allocation table is referenced to determine which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the allocation determination process, the flag in the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in the allocation determination process is set to "1" (step S1408). Then, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S1409). Specifically, information on the stop pattern of the symbol to be ultimately displayed in the special symbol display unit 37a, 37b that is the target for starting the current game round is identified from a stop result table for the jackpot result pre-stored in the main ROM 64, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for the jackpot result, the types of stop patterns of the symbols to be displayed in the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S1409, information on the stop pattern of the symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in step S1408 is stored in the main RAM 65. Note that the stop pattern of the symbols may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or multiple types of stop patterns may be set for at least some jackpot results. The method for selecting the stop result for a jackpot result for which multiple types of stop patterns of symbols are set is arbitrary, but for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is not a jackpot result but a small jackpot result (step S1406: NO, step S1410: YES), the flag in the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of small jackpot result identified in the win/loss determination process is set to "1" (step S1411). Information on the stopping pattern of the symbol to be ultimately displayed in the second special symbol display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the current game round, is then identified from a small jackpot result stopping result table pre-stored in the main ROM 64, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 65. This small jackpot result stopping result table contains settings for the types of symbol stopping patterns to be displayed in the second special symbol display unit 37b that differ for each type of small jackpot result. In step S1412, information on the stopping pattern of the symbol corresponding to the type of small jackpot result identified in step S1411 is stored in the main RAM 65. Note that the stopping pattern of the symbols may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each small win result, or multiple types of stopping patterns may be set for at least some small win results. The method for selecting the stopping result for a small win result for which multiple types of stopping patterns are set is arbitrary, but for example, the stopping result may be selected based on the value of the win random number counter C1. Furthermore, the information on the symbol pattern selected in step S1412 is different from the information on the symbol pattern selected in the case of a big win result.

If the result of the hit/miss determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a small hit result (step S1410: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S1413). Specifically, information on the pattern type to be ultimately displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b in this game round is identified from a stop result table for miss results pre-stored in the main ROM 64, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The pattern type information selected in this case is different from the pattern type information selected for a jackpot result and the pattern type information selected for a small hit result, and is a single type common to both the first special symbol display unit 37a and the second special symbol display unit 37b.

If the processing of step S1409, step S1412, or step S1413 is executed, a process for specifying the variable display period is executed (step S1414). In this process, numerical information from the variable type counter CS is acquired. A determination is also made as to whether or not a reach effect will occur on the pattern display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if any jackpot result occurs in the current game round, a reach effect is determined to occur. If any small jackpot result occurs in the current game round, a reach effect is determined not to occur. If neither a jackpot result nor a small jackpot result occurs in the current game round, a reach effect is determined to occur if the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information stored in the execution area 87 for the special symbol corresponds to the occurrence of a reach effect, and if the numerical information does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach effect, a reach effect is determined not to occur.

If it is determined that a reach effect will occur, the reach occurrence table stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced to obtain information on the variable display period corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS, and the obtained information on the variable display period is set in the special chart special power timer counter. Also, if it is determined that a reach effect will not occur, the reach non-occurrence table stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced to obtain information on the variable display period corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS. In this case, each variable display period is set so that the variable display period when a reach effect occurs is longer than the variable display period when a reach effect does not occur. The obtained information on the variable display period is then set in the special chart special power timer counter. The value set in the special chart special power timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12) is executed.

The variable display period when a reach does not occur is set so that the average period becomes shorter the greater the number of reserved information stored in the first special chart reserve area 85 or the second special chart reserve area 86. Furthermore, the variable display period when a reach does not occur is set so that a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected when the number of reserved information stored in the first special chart reserve area 85 or the second special chart reserve area 86 is the same when the win/loss lottery mode is in a high probability mode than when the win/loss lottery mode is in a low probability mode.

The variable display period selected when a small win result is obtained may be shorter than the variable display period selected when a big win result is obtained, and the average value of the variable display period selected when a small win result is obtained may be shorter than the average value of the variable display period selected when a big win result is obtained. In this case, the second pending information becomes the target for starting a game round, and it becomes possible to speed up the consumption of game rounds when a small win result is obtained.

Here, the maximum variable display period selected when the second reserved information becomes the target for starting a game round when the win/loss lottery mode is in low probability mode is set to a period equal to or less than the maximum variable display period selected when the first reserved information becomes the target for starting a game round when the win/loss lottery mode is in low probability mode. Furthermore, the average period of the variable display period selected when the second reserved information becomes the target for starting a game round but does not result in a jackpot when the win/loss lottery mode is in low probability mode is set to a period equal to or less than the average period of the variable display period selected when the first reserved information becomes the target for starting a game round but does not result in a jackpot when the win/loss lottery mode is in low probability mode. This makes it possible to prevent the consumption rate of game rounds from deteriorating even when the second reserved information becomes the target for starting a game round when the win/loss lottery mode is in low probability mode. However, this is not limited to this, and the average period of the variable display period selected when the second pending information is the target for starting a game round but does not result in a jackpot when the win/loss lottery mode is in the low probability mode may be set to be the same or approximately the same as the average period of the variable display period selected when the first pending information is the target for starting a game round but does not result in a jackpot when the win/loss lottery mode is in the low probability mode. In this case, approximately the same refers to the extent that the average periods are actually different but the difference is not noticeable to the player.

In addition, the average period of the variable display period selected when the second reserved information is the target for starting a game round when the win/lose lottery mode is in the high probability mode but does not result in a jackpot is set to a period shorter than the average period of the variable display period selected when the first reserved information is the target for starting a game round when the win/lose lottery mode is in the high probability mode but does not result in a jackpot. This makes it possible to increase the consumption rate of game rounds when the second reserved information is the target for starting a game round in the high probability mode compared to the consumption rate of game rounds when the first reserved information is the target for starting a game round in the high probability mode.

After the process for specifying the variable display period has been executed, a variable command and type command corresponding to the game turn to be started this time are sent to the audio and light emission control device 81 (step S1415). The variable command includes information on the variable display period specified in step S1414, as well as information indicating whether the game turn to be started corresponds to the first special symbol display area 37a or the second special symbol display area 37b. The variable command also includes information on whether a reach effect will be executed. The type command includes information on whether the game turn to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result, and if so, information indicating the type of jackpot result. The type command also includes information on whether the game turn to be started this time corresponds to a small jackpot result, and if so, information indicating the type of small jackpot result.

Then, the display of the changing image begins on either the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b, whichever display unit is the target for starting the current game round (step S1416). Then, the value of the special symbol special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S1417). When the special symbol change start process is executed, the value of the special symbol special electricity counter is "0", so by incrementing it by 1, the value of the special symbol special electricity counter becomes "1", which corresponds to the special symbol change in progress process (step S1207).

When the sound and light emitting control device 81 receives a variation command and a type command, it executes processing to determine the execution content of the game round presentation corresponding to those commands. It then executes light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the table corresponding to the processing results. As a result, the light emission presentation in the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output presentation in the speaker unit 54 are executed throughout the variable display period of the current game round. The sound and light emitting control device 81 also sends a command corresponding to the execution content of the game round presentation determined this time to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 according to the table corresponding to that command. As a result, the display presentation on the pattern display device 41 is executed throughout the variable display period of the current game round.

In this case, if the current game result is a 16R high probability result, a combination of "7" symbols will be displayed stopped on one of the valid lines. Also, if the current game result is either a 2R high probability result, a 4R high probability result, a 6R high probability result, or a 10R high probability result, a combination of the same odd symbols other than "7" symbols will be displayed stopped on one of the valid lines. Also, if the current game result is either a 2R low probability result, a 4R low probability result, a 6R low probability result, a 10R low probability result, or a 16R low probability result, a combination of the same even symbols will be displayed stopped on one of the valid lines. Also, if the current game result is either the first small win result, the second small win result, or the third small win result, a predetermined combination of symbols (e.g., "3, 4, 1") that is neither the same symbol combination nor a reach symbol combination will be displayed stopped on one of the valid lines. In this way, by displaying a predetermined combination of symbols common to the first, second, and third small win results in the game presentation on the symbol display device 41, it is possible to clearly indicate the occurrence of a small win while making it difficult to distinguish which of the first, second, and third small win results it corresponds to. This increases attention to the opening/closing execution mode that occurs when a small win occurs. Furthermore, in this configuration in which the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined combination of symbols common to the first, second, and third small win results, the second special symbol display unit 37b displays a symbol corresponding to the type of small win result. Therefore, the arcade manager can determine which type of small win result has occurred simply by visually checking the second special symbol display unit 37b. However, this is not limited to this, and the symbol display device 41 may also be configured to display a stop result corresponding to the type of small win result.

<Special chart change processing>
Next, we will explain the special chart change processing executed in step S1207 of the special chart special power control processing (Figure 38).

If the value of the special symbol special power timer counter is 1 or greater, the variable display period for the current game round has not yet elapsed, and it is time to update the display content of the special symbol display unit 37a, 37b that is the target of execution for the current game round, data is set to update the display content of the special symbol display unit 37a, 37b. As a result, the display content of the image on the controlled special symbol display unit 37a, 37b is updated to the display content of the next pattern in the order.

The mode at the start of the display of the changing patterns on the special pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the mode of updating the display of the changing patterns, are performed in a fixed manner regardless of the win/lose judgment results and the allocation judgment results, and are also performed in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the presentation for the game round on the pattern display device 41. For example, by generating a predetermined number of update timings, the displayed content of the patterns will go through one cycle and a display pattern with a fixed display order will be repeated, and when the changing display period has elapsed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round will be displayed regardless of the order in which the display patterns are displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special pattern display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol special power timer counter is "0", i.e., if the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 81. Then, information on the stop mode of the images on the special symbol display units 37a, 37b stored in the main RAM 65 at the start of the game round is read out. As a result, the variable display of the images is stopped with the image corresponding to the game result of the current game round displayed on the special symbol display units 37a, 37b to be controlled. Then, information on the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) is set in the special symbol special power timer counter. This starts measuring the final stop period. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special symbol special power counter. Because the value of the special symbol special power counter is "1" when the special symbol variable processing is executed, adding 1 makes the value of the special symbol special power counter "2", which corresponds to the special symbol confirmation processing (step S1208).

When the audio and light control device 81 receives a final stop command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives this command, it causes the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result of the current game to be displayed as a confirmed combination on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Special drawing confirmation processing>
Next, the special drawing confirmation processing executed in step S1208 of the special drawing special power control processing (FIG. 38) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the special chart special power timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S1501: YES), and the result of this game is a jackpot or a small jackpot (step S1502: YES), the value of the special chart special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1503). Since the value of the special chart special power counter is "2" when the special chart determination process is executed, the increment of 1 causes the value of the special chart special power counter to become "3", which corresponds to the special power start process (step S1209). On the other hand, if the result of this game is neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot (step S1502: NO), the value of the special chart special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S1504). As a result, the value of the special chart special power counter becomes "0", which corresponds to the special chart change start process (step S1206).

<Special call start processing>
Next, the special call start processing executed in step S1209 of the special call control processing (FIG. 38) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the opening period of the open/close execution mode has not yet started (step S1601: YES), if the current game result is a jackpot, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter. If the current game result is a small jackpot, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the small jackpot result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter (step S1602). An opening command is then sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 (step S1603). As a result, the effects corresponding to the opening period are performed in the pattern display device 41, display light emission unit 53, and speaker unit 54.

If the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode has already started (step S1601: NO), the process of setting the number of openings and closings is executed (step S1605) provided that the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter is "0", i.e., the opening period has elapsed (step S1604: YES). In this case, if the current game result is a 2R low probability result or a 2R high probability result, the opening and closing count counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "2", if the current game result is a 4R low probability result or a 4R high probability result, the opening and closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "4", if the current game result is a 6R low probability result or a 6R high probability result, the opening and closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "6", if the current game result is a 10R low probability result or a 10R high probability result, the opening and closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10", and if the current game result is a 16R low probability result or a 16R high probability result, the opening and closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "16". Furthermore, if the current game result is the first small win result, the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", if the current game result is the second small win result, the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "5", and if the current game result is the third small win result, the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10". The opening/closing count counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine the remaining number of times the special power winning device 32 is to be opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, the process for setting the open duration is executed (step S1606). In this setting process, if the current game result is a jackpot result, information about the open duration for the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter. Also, in this setting process, if the current game result is the first small jackpot result, information about the open duration for the first small jackpot result (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter; if the current game result is the second small jackpot result, information about the open duration for the second small jackpot result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter; and if the current game result is the third small jackpot result, information about the open duration for the third small jackpot result (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter.

Then, the process for setting the maximum number of winning prizes is executed (step S1607). In this setting process, regardless of whether the current game result is a big win or a small win, the winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "10." The winning counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine the remaining number of winning prizes up to the maximum number of winning prizes.

Then, the special line open setting process is executed (step S1608). In this open setting process, data is set so that the special line winning device 32 is in an open state. This causes the special line winning device 32 to enter an open state. Then, the value of the special line special line counter is incremented by 1 (step S1609). When the special line start process is executed, the value of the special line special line counter is "3", so by incrementing it by 1, the value of the special line special line counter becomes "4", which corresponds to the special line open process (step S1210).

<Special call open processing>
Next, the special line open processing executed in step S1210 of the special chart special line control processing (Figure 38) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 43.

If the value of the special chart special power timer counter is "0," i.e., if the open duration has elapsed (step S1701: YES), the value of the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1702). Then, the interval information (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special chart special power timer counter (step S1703). Also, a special power close setting process is executed (step S1704). In this close setting process, data is set so that the special power prize winning device 32 is in a closed state. This causes the special power prize winning device 32 to enter a closed state. Then, the value of the special chart special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1705). Since the value of the special chart special power counter is "4" when the special power open process is executed, the increment of 1 causes the value of the special chart special power counter to become "5," which corresponds to the special power closed process (step S1211).

If the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter is not "0", i.e., if the open duration has not elapsed (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether a prize has been won in the special electricity winning device 32 (step S1706). Whether a prize has been won in the special electricity winning device 32 is determined by determining whether the special electricity winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". As already explained, the special electricity winning flag is set to "1" in step S311 of the ball entry detection process (Figure 14). Furthermore, if a positive determination is made in step S1706, the special electricity winning flag is cleared to "0".

If a prize has been won in the special line prize-winning device 32 (step S1706: YES), the value of the prize-winning counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1707). If the value of the prize-winning counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S1708: YES), and the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode was a jackpot (step S1709: NO), the processing of steps S1702 to S1705, which have already been described, is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the prize-winning counter is "0" (step S1708: YES), and the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode was a small jackpot (step S1709: YES), the value of the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1710), and the processing of steps S1704 to S1705, which have already been described, is executed.

<Processing during special line closure>
Next, the special line closed processing executed in step S1211 of the special line control processing (FIG. 38) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode was a small win result and a win occurred in the special electric winning device 32 (step S1801: YES), the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1802). A positive determination is made in step S1801 when the special electric detection sensor 45a detects a game ball that entered the special electric winning device 32 immediately before the special electric winning device 32 changed from an open state to a closed state. If the value of the winning counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S1803: YES), the value of the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1804).

During the special line closing process, if the value of the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1805: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special chart special line timer counter is "0" to determine whether the interval period has elapsed (step S1806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S1806: YES), and the game result that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was a jackpot result (step S1807: YES), the process for setting the maximum number of winnings is executed (step S1808). In this setting process, the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10".

If a negative judgment is made in step S1807, or if the processing of step S1808 is executed, the open duration setting processing is executed (step S1809). In this setting processing, if the game result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is a jackpot result, information about the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter. Also, in this setting processing, if the current game result is a second small jackpot result, information about the open duration for the second small jackpot result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter, and if the current game result is a third small jackpot result, information about the open duration for the third small jackpot result (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter.

Then, the special line open setting process is executed (step S1810). In this open setting process, data is set so that the special line winning device 32 is in an open state. This causes the special line winning device 32 to enter an open state. Then, the value of the special line counter is decremented by 1 (step S1811). When the special line closed process is executed, the value of the special line counter is "5", so by decrementing by 1, the value of the special line counter becomes "4", which corresponds to the special line open process (step S1210).

On the other hand, if the value of the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is "0" (step S1805: YES), the ending period setting process is executed (step S1812). In this case, if the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode was a jackpot result, information corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter. If the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode was a small jackpot result, information corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the small jackpot result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter. Then, an ending command is sent to the sound and light-emitting control device 81 (step S1813). As a result, the performance corresponding to the ending period is performed in the pattern display device 41, display light-emitting unit 53, and speaker unit 54. Then, the value of the special symbol special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S1814). When the special line closing process is executed, the value of the special line counter is "5", so by adding 1, the value of the special line counter becomes "6", which corresponds to the special line termination process (step S1212).

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special call termination process executed in step S1212 of the special call control process (FIG. 38) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter is "0," i.e., the ending period has elapsed (step S1901: YES), and if the game result that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was one of the high-probability results (steps S1902 and S1903: YES), the high-probability flag stored in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S1904). The high-probability flag is a flag that the main CPU 63 uses to determine whether the win/loss lottery mode is high-probability mode or low-probability mode; when the high-probability flag's value is "1," it is the high-probability mode, and when the high-probability flag's value is "0," it is the low-probability mode. Therefore, by executing the processing of step S1904, the win/loss lottery mode after the end of this opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode. Furthermore, if the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode was a low-probability result (step S1902: YES, step S1903: NO), the high-probability flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1905). As a result, the win/loss lottery mode after the current opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low-probability mode.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current open/close execution mode was a small win result (step S1902: NO), neither step S1904 nor step S1905 is executed. As a result, even if the game result is a small win result and the open/close execution mode is initiated, the win/lose lottery mode does not change before or after the open/close execution mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1902, if the processing of step S1904 is executed, or if the processing of step S1905 is executed, a clearing process is executed (step S1906). In this clearing process, the various flags and counters used in the current game round and the current open/close execution mode are cleared to "0". However, the high probability flag in the main RAM 65 is excluded from this "0" clearing. After that, the value of the special chart special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S1907). As a result, the value of the special chart special power counter becomes "0", which corresponds to the special chart variation start processing (step S1206).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When a gaming ball enters any of the general winning slot 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating slot 33, and second operating slot 34, the gaming ball is paid out. Therefore, players play in the hope that a gaming ball will enter one of these slots. In this configuration, when a gaming ball enters any of the outlet slot 24a, general winning slot 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating slot 33, and second operating slot 34 (hereinafter referred to as the history-targeted ball entry slots), the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to store and retain information for managing the number and frequency of gaming balls entering each history-targeted ball entry slot. Using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the status of gaming balls entering each history-targeted ball entry slot. Furthermore, since the history information is stored and retained within the pachinko machine 10 itself, unauthorized access to or alteration of the history information can be prevented.

All ball entry areas that eject game balls from the game area PA are subject to the execution of the history information storage process and are also subject to management using the history information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of balls entering any history-target ball entry area using the history information. It also makes it possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls that enter each history-target ball entry area to the number of game balls ejected from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which corresponds to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball entry area that triggered the storage of that history information. This makes it possible to use the history information to obtain a detailed understanding of the game ball entry history at the history target ball entry area.

The history memory 117 stores not only history information corresponding to game balls entering the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether the open/close execution mode is in effect, history information indicating whether the high probability mode is in effect, and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the game ball entry patterns into the history target ball entry section.

The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device, which is a device external to the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information using the reading device and use the read history information to analyze the manner in which game balls enter the history target ball entry area.

The MPU 62 is provided with a read terminal 102, and a reading device electrically connected to the read terminal 102 can read the program from the main ROM 64. This makes it possible to check whether the program is correct. In this configuration, the read terminal 102, which is used to output the program externally, is used to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 externally. This makes it possible to output the history information externally without complicating the configuration.

It is determined whether the information to be output from the read terminal 102 is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to this determination result is output externally via the read terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is output externally using the read terminal 102 for externally outputting a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be output externally is a program or history information, and outputs the determined information externally. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the read terminal 102 is used for both purposes, it is possible to read out only the necessary information.

Based on information received from a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is determined whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration for selecting information to be output externally.

The MPU 62, which has a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, has a management IC 66 and a read terminal 102. This makes it possible to consolidate the signal path to the read terminal 102 within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal path to the read terminal 102, while still achieving the excellent effects already described.

A management CPU 112 is provided in addition to the main CPU 63, which executes processing to ensure that game balls are paid out based on their entry into either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34. The management CPU 112 executes processing to store history information in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to manage the entry patterns of game balls into each history-targeted entry port without excessively increasing the processing load on the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 and management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a to each buffer 122a-122g of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal path corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. This ensures that the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a-122g (i.e., each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between types of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 sends information corresponding to whether the system is in open/close execution mode, whether the system is in high probability mode, and whether the front door frame 14 is open to each of the buffers 122h-122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. This allows the type of information corresponding to each of these situations to correspond to each of the buffers 122h-122j (i.e., each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information to the management CPU 112, indicating which type of information each buffer 122a-122j (i.e., each signal path 118a-118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store this correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins, the main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information to the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the management IC 66 to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry area in situations where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry area.

The correspondence information is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using signal paths 118a-118g, which are used to transmit information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target entry area. This simplifies the communication configuration compared to a configuration that requires a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the management IC 66 to identify the historical target goal location corresponding to the information to be sent each time the main CPU 63 sends information on the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a-48a. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information on the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a-48a sent from the main CPU 63.

When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 switches from LOW to HIGH, information is output from the management IC 66 to the read terminal 102. In this case, the management CPU 112 can determine that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for transmitting correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a-122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, a number greater than the number of types of information that need to be sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This makes it possible to accommodate changes in the number of types of information depending on the model of pachinko machine 10 without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a-122p. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is sent from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, the history information contains correspondence information indicating the type of history target ball entry area that corresponds to that history information. This makes it possible to use the read history information to identify the manner in which the game ball entered each history target ball entry area.

The management IC 66 uses the history information stored in the history memory 117 to calculate various parameters (parameters 1-8, 11-18, and 21-26) corresponding to the manner in which game balls enter the play area PA over a specified period of time. This makes it possible to externally output the various parameters calculated using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated with historical information corresponding to the situation when the front door frame 14 is open excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters for the normal situation when the front door frame 14 is closed. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the situation in the open/close execution mode and the situation in the high probability mode are calculated. This allows the manager of the amusement hall and others to understand the ball entry patterns according to each situation.

When various parameters have been calculated, a clearing process for the history memory 117 is executed, thereby initializing the history memory 117. This makes it less likely that so much history information will be stored in the history memory 117 that it exceeds its storage capacity, resulting in the history information that should have been stored being overwritten and erased.

When various parameters are output to the read terminal 102, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the read terminal 102. This makes it possible to read out various parameters and analyze the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA, and to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information that served as the basis for calculating the various parameters.

The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which various parameters are calculated.

When the main CPU 63 determines that a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the main CPU 63 sends output instruction information, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters, and the various parameters resulting from the calculations are output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to output various parameters to a reading device external to the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 performs processing at the start of the supply of operating power to determine whether a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and if it determines that a reading device is electrically connected, the main CPU 63 sends output instruction information to the management IC 66. This completes the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the results of those calculations while the main CPU 63 is performing processing at the start of the supply of operating power, i.e., before the main CPU 63 begins normal processing to progress the game. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the results of those calculations from being performed in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, thereby reducing the processing load on the management IC 66.

In a configuration in which an external output corresponding to a game ball entering the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 is sent via the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to easily determine the number and frequency of game balls entering the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 by using the information output via the external terminal board 97, while accurately determining the number and frequency of game balls entering the history target ball entry areas by using the history information stored in the history memory 117.

The through gate 35 is positioned so that the entry of game balls is restricted when the game is not in the open/close execution mode, but game balls are allowed to enter in the open/close execution mode. As a result, by switching to the open/close execution mode, not only is it possible for game balls to enter the fourth discharge passage 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but game balls can also enter the through gate 35. This increases the benefits of switching to the open/close execution mode, making the game more enjoyable.

When a gaming ball enters the through gate 35, reserve information on the normal side is acquired, and when reserve information on the normal side is acquired, there is a high probability that the second operating port 34 will be in an open state. When a gaming ball enters the second operating port 34, either a big win result or a small win result will occur, and the open/close execution mode will be triggered. In other words, the occurrence of the open/close execution mode makes it possible for a gaming ball to enter the through gate 35, and the open/close execution mode can be triggered again when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the open/close execution mode occurs consecutively, making the game more enjoyable.

The open/close execution mode can be triggered when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, which can occur regardless of whether a game ball has entered the through gate 35. As described above, the occurrence of the open/close execution mode allows a game ball to enter the through gate 35, and the open/close execution mode can be triggered again when a game ball enters the through gate 35. In this case, when the open/close execution mode is not active, the player will expect the open/close execution mode to be initiated when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, and when in the open/close execution mode, the player will expect the open/close execution mode to be triggered consecutively when a game ball enters the through gate 35.

The probability that the open/close execution mode will occur when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35 is higher than the probability that the open/close execution mode will occur when a gaming ball enters the first operating port 33. This makes it possible to increase the player's anticipation of the gaming ball entering the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode.

When a gaming ball enters through gate 35 and reserved information on the normal side is acquired, the expected value for the subsequent occurrence of the open/close execution mode does not change depending on the game state. This simplifies the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which this expected value changes depending on the game state, and makes it easier to manage the expected value. However, with a configuration in which the expected value does not change depending on the game state, it becomes difficult to add variety to the game. In contrast, because the configuration allows for the gaming ball to enter through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode as described above, it is possible to add variety to the opportunities for reserved information on the normal side to be acquired, which ultimately makes it possible to add variety to the game.

When a gaming ball enters the through gate 35, it becomes possible for the gaming ball to enter the second operating port 34, and when the gaming ball enters the second operating port 34, an opportunity to transition to the open/close execution mode occurs. As a result, in order to continuously trigger the open/close execution mode, it becomes necessary to allow a gaming ball to enter the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode, and then allow a gaming ball to enter the second operating port 34. This increases the uncertainty regarding the continuous occurrence of the open/close execution mode, which ultimately makes the game more enjoyable.

The special electric winning device 32, second operating port 34, and through gate 35 are located at positions where game balls flowing down or that have flowed down the right-hand area PA3 can enter. This makes it possible to aim for the game ball to enter the special electric winning device 32, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 all at once by rotating the launch operating device 28, for example, with the maximum operating amount, so that the game ball flows down the right-hand area PA3.

This configuration allows game balls to enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 switches from either the open state or the closed state to the other. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the timing of this state switch. This makes it possible to diversify the objects that players should pay attention to in the open/close execution mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game during the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, the through gate 35 is located in a position that allows game balls to enter when the special electric winning device 32 switches from either the open state or the closed state to the other. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above simply by positioning the through gate 35 relative to the special electric winning device 32 as described above.

When the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 moves from one of the open and closed positions to the other, a game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can enter the through gate 35. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player not only pays attention to whether or not a game ball will enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but also to whether or not the guide plate portion 214 moves from one of the open and closed positions to the other while a game ball is resting on it, making the game more enjoyable during the opening/closing execution mode.

The opportunity for a game ball to enter the through gate 35 occurs when the special electric winning device 32 switches from an open state to a closed state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, but also when it switches to the closed state.

The guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is formed so that a gaming ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 flows down to the left along the guide plate portion 214. The through gate 35 is positioned so that if the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position while a gaming ball is placed within a predetermined range X, which is a portion of the range of the guide plate portion 214, the gaming ball will fall downward and enter the through gate 35. In this case, for a gaming ball to enter the through gate 35, not only must the gaming ball be placed on the guide plate portion 214 when the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, but the opening/closing member 202 must also move from the open position to the closed position at the perfect timing when the gaming ball is within the predetermined range X. This draws the player's attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball on the guide plate portion 214 and the timing of the change in the state of the opening/closing member 202, making the game more enjoyable during the opening/closing execution mode.

A group of guide nails 241 is provided upstream of the special electric winning device 32 to guide gaming balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 to the right end of the opening/closing member 202. The predetermined range X, which is the range in the guide plate section 214 that allows gaming balls to enter the through gate 35, is set to be biased toward the left end of the opening/closing member 202. As a result, in order for the gaming ball to enter the through gate 35, the opening/closing member 202 must move from the open position to the closed position at the perfect timing while the gaming ball is flowing down the guide plate section 214. This draws the player's attention to the movement of the gaming ball on the guide plate section 214, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 in the special electric winning device 32 is located to the left of the predetermined range X on the guide plate 214, which is the range within which game balls can enter the through gate 35. This allows game balls that are on the guide plate 214 but do not reach the entrance 45b to enter the through gate 35. Therefore, it is possible to turn the player's sense of disadvantage due to the game ball on the guide plate 214 not winning the special electric winning device 32 into a sense of advantage due to the game ball winning the through gate 35.

For example, jackpot results include a 2R high probability result and a 16R high probability result, and the ease with which a game ball will enter through gate 35 differs between the open/close execution mode triggered by a 2R high probability result and the open/close execution mode triggered by a 16R high probability result. As a result, a player hoping for a game ball to enter through gate 35 will be able to expect the occurrence of an open/close execution mode in which game balls are more likely to enter through gate 35, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In a configuration in which game balls can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed differs between an opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 2R high probability result, for example, and an opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 16R high probability result. This increases the expected value of game balls entering the through gate 35 in an opening and closing execution mode in which the expected value of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is high. This makes it possible to further increase the player's anticipation of the occurrence of an opening and closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed many times.

When a gaming ball enters the second operating opening 34, it can result in not only a big win but also a small win, with the probability of a small win being higher than the probability of a big win. This makes it easier for the opening/closing execution mode to occur by causing a gaming ball to enter the second operating opening 34. In this case, it becomes possible for the ball to enter the through gate 35, which triggers the second operating opening 34 to open, under certain circumstances. This means that players hoping for a gaming ball to enter the second operating opening 34 will be anticipating the occurrence of this certain situation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The above-mentioned predetermined situation is a situation in which the opening and closing execution mode is being executed. As explained above, this makes it possible to create a situation in which, if the opening and closing execution mode occurs once, that opening and closing execution mode will occur repeatedly, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the low-probability mode, the average duration of the variable display period for game turns executed based on a game ball entering the second actuation port 34 but that do not result in a jackpot is the same as, approximately the same as, or shorter than the average duration of the variable display period for game turns executed based on a game ball entering the first actuation port 33 but that do not result in a jackpot. This prevents the completion rate of the former game turns from being significantly lower than the completion rate of the latter game turns. However, if this configuration is also provided and the frequency with which the second actuation port 34 is opened in response to a game ball entering the through gate 35 is constant regardless of the game state, it is expected that games will be played in the low-probability mode with the aim of having the game ball enter the second actuation port 34. In contrast, game balls cannot enter the through gate 35 when the opening/closing execution mode is not active. Therefore, in the low-probability mode, games can be played with the aim of having the game ball enter the first actuation port 33.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the type of buffers for which the type of input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 differs from that of the first embodiment. Also, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to cause the management CPU 112 to identify the type of input signal differs from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will generally be omitted.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment above. In detail, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric current detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

Meanwhile, in the first embodiment described above, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j. However, in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as an opening/closing execution mode signal to the thirteenth buffer 122m, a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input as a high probability mode signal to the fourteenth buffer 122n, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as a door open signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The input of an open/close execution mode signal to the 13th buffer 122m, an open/close execution mode signal to the 14th buffer 122n, an open door signal to the 15th buffer 122o, and an output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p were determined during the design phase of the management IC 66. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the corresponding signals will be input to the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the types of signals input to the first to 12th buffers 122a to 122l were not determined during the design phase of the management IC 66. The types of signals are determined by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. As with the first embodiment, the process for determining the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 begins.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition processing is executed in step S110 of the main processing (Figure 11), as in the first embodiment described above.

First, the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "12," which represents the number of buffers 122a-122l to be recognized for signal type recognition (step S2001). Then, the output process for the identification start signal is executed (step S2002). In this output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are set to a HI level, thereby starting the output of the identification start signal. The period for which these signals are maintained at a HI level is set long enough for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Then, the output count information corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output count information is set in the output count counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2003). The output count counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the number of times the type identification signal has been output.

In this embodiment, when the management CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a through the twelfth buffer 122l, a type identification signal is output the same number of times as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry section corresponding to that signal type. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a through the twelfth buffer 122l in the first through twelfth correspondence areas 123a through 123l of the correspondence memory 116. In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a through the twelfth buffer 122l is recognized as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry section corresponding to that signal type.

In step S2003, if the value of the recognition output counter is "12," "11," or "10," the output count counter is set to "10," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the general winning port 31. If the value of the recognition output counter is "9," the output count counter is set to "15," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32. If the value of the recognition output counter is "8," the output count counter is set to "1," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33. If the value of the recognition output counter is "7," the output count counter is set to "1," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34. If the value of the recognition output counter is "6," the output count counter corresponds to outlet 24a, but even if a game ball enters that outlet 24a, a payout of the game ball will not be executed, so the output count counter is set to "0." Also, if the value of the recognition output counter is between "5" and "1," there is no corresponding ball entry area and it is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0."

Then, the output process of the start trigger signal is executed (step S2004). In this output process, the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is set to a HIGH level, thereby starting the output of the start trigger signal. The period during which the first signal is maintained at a HIGH level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Then, on the condition that the value of the output count counter in the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2005: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or greater was set in the output count counter in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In this output processing, the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the type identification signal. The period for which the second signal is maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Then, the value of the output count counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2007), and it is determined whether the value of the output count counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2008). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or greater (step S2008: NO), the process returns to step S2006.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2005 or if a positive judgment is made in step S2008, output processing of the termination trigger signal is executed (step S2009). In this output processing, the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is set to a HIGH level, thereby starting output of the termination trigger signal. The period for which the third signal is maintained at a HIGH level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2010), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after decrement is "0" (step S2011). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or greater (step S2011: NO), the process returns to step S2003, and processing is performed to recognize the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after decrement.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S2011: YES), an identification end signal output process is executed (step S2012). In this output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the identification end signal. The period for which these signals are maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Next, the management process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 48. As in the first embodiment, the management process begins when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 begins.

When reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2102). Then, on the condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If a type identification signal has been received (step S2104: YES), the value of the reception count counter provided in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2105). The reception count counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to determine the number of times a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception count counter is cleared to "0" if a positive determination is made in step S2103.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2104, or if the processing of step S2105 is executed, it is determined whether or not a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2106). If a termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2106: NO), the process returns to step S2104. If a termination trigger signal has been received (step S2106: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2107). In the correspondence setting process, the value set in the reception count counter is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set to "10," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the general winning port 31; the fourth correspondence area 123d is set to "15," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32; the fifth correspondence area 123e is set to "1," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33; and the sixth correspondence area 123f is set to "1," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34. Additionally, the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l are set to "0." Then, the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2108).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2103, or if the processing of step S2108 is executed, it is determined whether reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has finished (step S2109). If reception of the identification end signal has not finished (step S2109: NO), the processing returns to step S2103, and, on the condition that a start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), processing from step S2104 onwards is executed. If reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has finished (step S2109: YES), the history setting processing of step S2110 and the external output processing of step S2111 are repeatedly executed.

Figure 49 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 49(a) shows the period when the output state of the first signal is HIGH, FIG. 49(b) shows the period when the output state of the second signal is HIGH, FIG. 49(c) shows the period when the output state of the third signal is HIGH, FIG. 49(d) shows the period when the output state of the opening/closing execution mode signal is HIGH, FIG. 49(e) shows the period when the output state of the high probability mode signal is HIGH, FIG. 49(f) shows the execution period of the identification state during which processing is executed to identify the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a-122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a-122l, FIG. 49(g) shows the timing when the value of the reception count counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 49(h) shows the timing when the correspondence setting process (step S2107) is executed by the management CPU 112.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the control CPU 112 begins, at timing t1, the output states of the first signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are changed from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figures 49(a), 49(d), and 49(e). This causes output of an identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the control CPU 112 to begin. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are changed from HI to LOW. This causes output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the control CPU 112 to stop. At timing t2, the control CPU 112 makes a positive determination in step S2101 of the control process (Figure 48), thereby entering the identification state as shown in Figure 49(f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at a HI level from time t3 to time t4, as shown in Figure 49(a). This results in a state in which a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at a HI level from time t5 to time t7, as shown in Figure 49(b). This results in a state in which a type identification signal has been output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at time t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, as shown in Figure 49(g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level from time t8 to time t10, as shown in Figure 49(c). This causes a termination trigger signal to be output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at time t9, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process, as shown in Figure 49(h). Because the value of the reception count counter is "1" when this correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence information of "1" is stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116 that are currently being set.

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at a HI level from timing t11 to timing t12, as shown in Figure 49(a). This results in a state in which a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at a HI level from timing t13 to timing t15, timing t16 to timing t18, timing t19 to timing t21, and timing t22 to timing t24, as shown in Figure 49(b). This results in a state in which a type identification signal has been output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception count counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at timings t14, t17, t20, and t23, as shown in Figure 49(g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level from time t25 to time t27, as shown in Figure 49(c). This causes a termination trigger signal to be output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at time t26, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process, as shown in Figure 49(h). Because the value of the reception count counter is "10" when this correspondence setting process is executed, the information "10" is stored as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l currently being set in the correspondence memory 116.

After that, at timing t28, as shown in Figures 49(c), 49(d), and 49(e), the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. This causes output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 to begin. After that, at timing t29, the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. This causes output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 to stop. At timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes a positive determination in step S2109 of the management process (Figure 48), and the identification state is released as shown in Figure 49(f).

In this embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 also includes, as correspondence information, information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry point that triggered the storage of that history information. In this configuration, if there are multiple entry points with the same number of prize balls, these entry points cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 both have a single prize ball, the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 cannot be distinguished in the history information. In such circumstances, the number of prize balls for the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 may be made different. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 in the history information, even in a configuration in which history information is stored as in the second embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, in step S801 of the history setting process, the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is set to "15." This causes all of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o to become confirmation targets.

According to the present embodiment described above, the control CPU 112 can identify the signal paths corresponding to not only the output instruction signal but also information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is active, information corresponding to whether the high probability mode is active, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open, without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a is the information that the main CPU 63 needs to have the control CPU 112 recognize the correspondence between each piece of information and each signal path 118a-118g. When the control CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, a number of pulse signals equal to the number of winning balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a is output from the main CPU 63 to the control CPU 112 using the second signal. This simplifies the configuration for transmitting correspondence information.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the trigger for executing calculation of various parameters using history information is different from that in the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 50 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The management IC 66 is also provided with a calculation result memory 131. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The calculated parameters are then sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. The parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The trigger for calculating various parameters occurs before the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to differentiate the time when various parameters are calculated from the time when they are externally output to the reading device, thereby distributing the processing load.

In addition, by providing a calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters, it is possible to store not only the various parameters for a single calculation trigger, but also the various parameters for multiple calculation triggers all at once. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to calculate the various parameters at each calculation trigger.

Figure 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. In detail, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third buffer 122c receives a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the fourth buffer 122d receives a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the fifth buffer 122e receives a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. A signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f, a signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the primary CPU 63 to provide the management CPU 112 with an opportunity to calculate various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o, like the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p, was determined during the design phase of the management IC 66. Therefore, without receiving instructions from the primary CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can determine that the corresponding signals described above will be input to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p. Meanwhile, the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n were not determined during the design phase of the management IC 66; instead, the types of these signals are determined by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the primary CPU 63. As with the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and management CPU 112 begins.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration that enables the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger. Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12).

In the power outage information storage process, if a power outage signal corresponding to a power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 67 (step S2201: YES), a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2202). In this output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is long enough for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level. After that, in step S2203, power outage processing is executed, followed by an infinite loop in which the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power outage processing, the power outage flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", and a checksum is calculated and saved.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the power outage response processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the power outage response processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (Figure 22). In the management processing, after receiving an identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the history setting processing in step S607, the external output processing in step S608, and the power outage response processing are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power outage response processing, if the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2301: YES), steps S2302 to S2306 calculate the number of balls that have entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, similar to steps S1002 to S1006 of the external output processing (Figure 28) in the first embodiment described above. Also, in step S2307, similar to step S1007 of the external output processing (Figure 28) in the first embodiment described above, the number of balls that have entered each type when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Furthermore, in step S2308, various parameters are calculated, similar to step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment described above. In step S2309, a total time is calculated, similar to step S1009 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment described above. The calculation result information of step S2308 and the calculation result information of step S2309 are then written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2310). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Furthermore, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time.

Then, in step S2311, the number of balls entering the various types during the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, similar to step S1011 of the external output processing (Figure 28) in the first embodiment described above. In step S2312, the number of balls entering the various types during the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated, similar to step S1012 of the external output processing (Figure 28) in the first embodiment described above. Also, in step S2313, various parameters are calculated, similar to step S1013 of the external output processing (Figure 28) in the first embodiment described above. Then, the information on the calculation results in step S2314 is written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2314). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time.

Then, in step S2315, the number of balls entering the game during high probability mode is calculated, similar to step S1015 of the external output processing (Figure 28) in the first embodiment described above. In step S2316, the number of balls entering the game during high probability mode when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated, similar to step S1016 of the external output processing (Figure 28) in the first embodiment described above. Also, in step S2317, various parameters are calculated, similar to step S1017 of the external output processing (Figure 28) in the first embodiment described above. Then, the information resulting from the calculation in step S2317 is written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2318). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Also, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time. After that, the process enters an infinite loop and waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the external output processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output processing is executed in step S608 of the management processing (Figure 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S2401: YES), calculation result output processing is executed (step S2402). In this output processing, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 only stores various calculation results corresponding to a single calculation trigger, only the various calculation results corresponding to that single calculation trigger are read by the reading device. However, if the calculation result memory 131 stores various calculation results corresponding to multiple calculation triggers, the various calculation results corresponding to those multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device.

Then, a process for outputting history information is executed (step S2403). In this output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is output sequentially to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the various history information stored in the history area 124. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, the worker using the reading device can perform a detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

Then, a clearing process is executed (step S2404). In the clearing process, all of the history information storage area 125 in the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This causes the history area 124 to be initialized. In addition, in the clearing process, all of the areas in the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". This causes the calculation result memory 131 to be initialized.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power will be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, causing the control CPU 112 to calculate various parameters. This makes it possible for the control CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

The various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are written sequentially to the calculation result memory 131. This allows the various parameters to be stored in the management IC 66, and when the various parameters are read using a reading device, it is possible to read out the various parameters for multiple business days all at once.

When various parameters are written to the calculation result memory 131, information that identifies the time when the various parameters were calculated is written to the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze the various parameter information while knowing when the various parameters were calculated.

In addition, when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters for that trigger are written to the calculation result memory 131, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0." This makes it less likely that new history information will be written to the history memory 117 when the maximum number of pieces of history information that can be stored in the history memory 117 has already been stored.

Furthermore, the information to be output to the reading device may be limited to the various parameter information stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output to the outside. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output to the outside.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the power outage response processing executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration that differs from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the power outage response processing executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S2501: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2502). These calculation processes include steps S2302 to S2309, S2311 to S2313, and S2315 to S2317 of the power outage response process (Figure 53) in the third embodiment described above.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S2502 is within a reference range (step S2503).
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio Eighth parameter: Two parameters, namely, the ratio of K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34"), are set as parameters to be determined as to whether they are within a reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, a positive determination is made in step S2503, as it is determined that the predetermined parameters are within the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh and eighth parameters, and other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters instead of or in addition to the seventh and eighth parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 (K2) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) may be set as the predetermined parameter. In this case, for example, if the value of the second parameter is greater than or equal to 0.1 and less than or equal to 0.2, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be within the reference range. Also, only the predetermined parameter to be determined in step S2503 may be calculated in the various calculation processes of step S2502.

If the specified parameters are not within the reference range (step S2503: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2502 are written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2504). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the specified parameter is within the reference range (step S2503: YES), the processing of step S2504 is not executed. As a result, only the various parameters when the specified parameter is not within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, if an abnormal situation occurs, the history of that situation is left in the calculation result memory 131, while reducing the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 131.

If a positive determination is made in step S2503, or if the processing of step S2504 is executed, a clearing process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2505). In this clearing process, all values in the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is also cleared to "0". This resets the history area 124 to an initialized state. After the processing of step S2505 is executed, an infinite loop is entered, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described above, it is determined whether the contents of the various calculated parameters fall within a reference range, and only the various parameters determined to fall within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 131. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131, and therefore the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 131.

Fifth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters differs from that of the third embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the third embodiment. Note that the description of the configuration that is the same as the third embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 56 (a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S712 during the management output process (Figure 24).

It is determined whether a game ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 (step S2601). If a positive determination is made in step S2601, an increment process is executed on the ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2602). In this increment process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is determined based on the number of times step S705 was executed in the management output process (Figure 24) for this processing round. The determined number of game balls is then added to the ball entry counter.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of 500 (step S2603). If it is equal to or greater than 500 (step S2603: YES), a subtraction process is executed on the ball entry counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2604). In this subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 500. Then, a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2605). In this output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level.

Figure 56 (b) is a flowchart showing the calculation processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that this calculation processing is executed in place of the power outage response processing in the third embodiment. Therefore, the calculation processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (Figure 22). In the management processing, after receiving an identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the history setting processing in step S607, the external output processing in step S608, and the calculation processing are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S2701: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2702). These calculation processes are identical to steps S2302 to S2318 of the power outage response process (Figure 53) in the third embodiment described above.

According to the embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 63, making it possible to precisely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA within one business day.

Furthermore, since the various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are calculated on the condition that a game is being played. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless calculations of the various parameters when a game is not being played continuously.

Sixth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters differs from that of the fifth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the fifth embodiment. Note that the description of the configuration that is the same as the fifth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 57 is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S712 during the management output process (Figure 24).

It is determined whether a gaming ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 (step S2801). If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2802). The continuation counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the period of time during which no gaming ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34.

If the value of the continuation counter after incrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2803: YES), the time measurement flag stored in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). The stop reference value is set so that a positive judgment is made in step S2803 if no game balls enter any of the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 for five consecutive seconds. The time measurement flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not to measure time to determine the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. If the value of the time measurement flag is "0," no time measurement is made; if the value of the time measurement flag is "1," time measurement is made. If a positive judgment is made in step S2801, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S2805).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2803, if the processing of step S2804 is executed, or if the processing of step S2805 is executed, and the time measurement flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2806: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2807). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time required to determine the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

It is determined whether the value of the measurement counter after incrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than the indication reference value (step S2808). The indication reference value is set so that a positive determination is made in step S2808 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If a positive determination is made in step S2808, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2809), and output processing of a calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2810). In this output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level.

According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period of time elapses, making it possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when no game is being played, and is resumed from the state before the stop when a game is started. This makes it possible to exclude situations where no game is being played from the calculation of various parameters, and to appropriately derive various parameters when game play is being played.

In addition, instead of using a measurement counter to measure whether a predetermined period has elapsed, it may be measured using the RTC 115.

Seventh Embodiment
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the control CPU 112 to calculate various parameters differs from that of the first embodiment, and the occurrence of a calculation trigger is not determined by the main CPU 63 but is performed independently by the control CPU 112. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that this calculation process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S812 during the history setting process ( Figure 25 ).

During the history setting process for this processing round, it is determined whether history information corresponding to the occurrence of game balls entering any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 has been stored in the history memory 117 (step S2901). If a positive determination is made in step S2901, an increment process is performed on the ball entry counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S2902). In this increment process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is determined based on the number of times history information corresponding to the occurrence of game ball entry has been stored during the history setting process for this processing round. The determined number of game balls is then added to the ball entry counter.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2903). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S2903: YES), a subtraction process is performed on the ball entry counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2904). In this subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". Then, various calculation processes are performed (step S2905). In these calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power outage response process (Figure 53) in the third embodiment are performed.

According to the embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 63, making it possible to precisely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA within one business day.

Furthermore, since the various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are calculated on the condition that a game is being played. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless calculations of the various parameters when a game is not being played continuously.

In addition, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 determines whether the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the calculation trigger for various parameters is determined independently by the management CPU 112. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing to determine the calculation trigger for various parameters, thereby reducing the processing load on the main CPU 63.

Eighth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the configuration that is the same as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 (see Figure 50). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters resulting from the calculation to the calculation result memory 131. In addition, in this embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high probability mode has started, a signal indicating that the high probability mode has ended, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are each sent individually from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

Figure 59 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter in the management RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, the number of correspondence relationship areas in the correspondence relationship memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating which of the ball entry areas they correspond to, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information corresponding to the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information corresponding to the start of the high probability mode, the eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information corresponding to the end of the high probability mode, the twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information corresponding to the start of opening the front door frame 14, and the thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores information corresponding to the end of opening the front door frame 14. Therefore, in step S3001, the confirmation target counter is set to "13."

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, has changed from "0" to "1," it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from LOW to HIGH (step S3002). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n," the nth buffers 122a through 122o are the target for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10," the tenth buffer 122j is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3002, RTC information, which is date and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S3003). Then, a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S3004). In this write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 currently being written to is identified by referencing the pointer area 126 in the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S3003 is written to the history information storage area 125 in the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Furthermore, correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current value of the counter being checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Note that if the value of the counter being checked is "n," the nth correspondence area 123a-123o is the area from which correspondence information is read. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10," the tenth correspondence area 123j will be the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth correspondence area 123e will be the target for reading the correspondence information.

Then, the value of the target pointer is incremented by 1 (step S3005). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and this numerical information is incremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after the increment of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S3006).

If the maximum value is exceeded (step S3006: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S3007). These calculation processes are identical to steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (Figure 28) in the first embodiment described above. The various parameters and total time information for the calculation results are then written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S3008). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Furthermore, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time.

Then, the status information handover process is executed (step S3009). In this handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current status is in open/close execution mode, high probability mode, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. This status information is then written to the management RAM 114.

Then, a clearing process is performed on the history memory 117 (step S3010). In this clearing process, all of the history information storage area 125 in the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This initializes the history area 124. After this clearing process is performed, the status information written to the management RAM 114 in step S3009 is read. If status information indicating that the device is in the open/close execution mode is stored, history information indicating that the device is in the open/close execution mode is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. If status information indicating that the device is in the high probability mode is stored, history information indicating that the device is in the high probability mode is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. Furthermore, if status information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3002, if a negative judgment is made in step S3006, or if the processing of step S3010 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3011). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S3012). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S3012: NO), the processing from step S3002 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated when the amount of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit of the number of items that can be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the number of items to be stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit of the number of items that can be stored, making it impossible to accurately calculate various parameters.

In addition, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been used to calculate various parameters from being used again to calculate various parameters.

In addition, even if the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information handover process is executed. This allows state information to be managed appropriately.

Ninth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from those of the first embodiment. Note that the description of the configurations that are the same as those of the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 60 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o. The first counters 141a to 144a in each of areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has changed from a low level to a high level. The second counters 141b to 144b in each of areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has changed from a low level to a high level. The third counters 141c to 144c in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has changed from a low level to a high level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has changed from a low level to a high level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has changed from a low level to a high level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from a low level to a high level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has changed from a low level to a high level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from a low level to a high level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from a low level to a high level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from a low level to a high level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from a low level to a high level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from a low level to a high level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has changed from a low level to a high level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has changed from a low level to a high level. The 15th counters 141o to 144o in each of areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o has changed from LOW level to HIGH level.

However, the objects of measurement using the first through fifteenth counters 141a-141o, 142a-142o, 143a-143o, and 144a-144o are the first through seventh buffers 122a-122g, which receive signals corresponding to the result of a ball entering either the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34. Therefore, the eighth through tenth buffers 122h-122j, which receive signals corresponding to status information such as whether the machine is in open/close execution mode, whether the machine is in high probability mode, or whether the front door frame 14 is open, are excluded from the above measurement objects. Whether or not these buffers are subject to measurement is determined based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a-123o of the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112, out of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, is set in the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 (step S3101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116, out of the first through fifteenth correspondence areas 123a through 123o, that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first through tenth correspondence areas 123a through 123j, and therefore in step S3101 the confirmation target counter is set to "10."

Then, it is determined whether the buffer 122a-122o corresponding to the current counter to be checked is a buffer to which a status information signal is input (step S3102). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the following correspondence information is stored in the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked: information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high probability mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3102, a state information setting process is executed (step S3103). In this setting process, if the output state of an eighth signal indicating whether or not the device is in the opening/closing execution mode switches from a low level to a high level, first state information indicating that the device is in the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the management RAM 114. If the output state of the eighth signal switches from a high level to a low level, the first state information is erased from the management RAM 114. Furthermore, if the output state of a ninth signal indicating whether or not the device is in the high probability mode switches from a low level to a high level, second state information indicating that the device is in the high probability mode is stored in the management RAM 114. If the output state of the ninth signal switches from a high level to a low level, the second state information is erased from the management RAM 114. Furthermore, when the output state of the tenth signal, which indicates whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, switches from a low level to a high level, third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal switches from a high level to a low level, the third state information is erased from the management RAM 114.

If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the system checks whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current counter value among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, which receives a signal with information different from the status information, has changed from "0" to "1," thereby determining whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from LOW to HIGH (step S3104). If a positive determination is made in step S3104, an increment process is performed on the corresponding total counter (step S3105). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current counter value among the first through fifteenth total counters 141a through 141o in the total area 141 of the history memory 117. For example, if the counter value is "5," the fifth total counter 141e is added; if the counter value is "1," the first total counter 141a is added.

Then, by referencing the status information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether the device is in the first state, i.e., whether it is in the open/close execution mode (step S3106). If the device is in the first state (step S3106: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the first state (step S3107). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the counter to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first counter 142a for the first state is the counter to be incremented.

Then, by referencing the status information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether the device is in the second state, i.e., whether it is in high probability mode (step S3108). If the device is in the second state (step S3108: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the second state (step S3109). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the counter to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first counter 143a for the second state is the counter to be incremented.

Then, by referencing the status information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether the third state is being held, i.e., whether the front door frame 14 is open (step S3110). If the third state is being held (step S3110: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the third state (step S3111). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the one to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first counter 144a for the third state is the one to be incremented.

If the processing of step S3103 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S3104, if a negative judgment is made in step S3110, or if the processing of step S3111 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3112). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S3113). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S3113: NO), the processing from step S3102 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the history of game balls entering the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment above, but is instead stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In this manner, by storing information on the number of times game balls have been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a, the external output processing in this embodiment (Figure 28) does not require the steps of step S1002, which calculates the number of game balls that have entered the outlet 24a; step S1004, which calculates the number of game balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32; step S1005, which calculates the number of game balls that have entered the first operating port 33; and step S1006, which calculates the number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load required to calculate various parameters.

Note that in the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31, such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c all correspond to the general winning opening 31, so it is necessary to perform a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Furthermore, the number of balls entering the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entering the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (Figure 28) in this embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entering the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entering the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (Figure 28) in this embodiment.

Tenth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the storage means for storing history information is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 62 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, main ROM 64, main RAM 65, management IC 66, I/F 101, and read terminal 102. Similarly to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, management CPU 112, management ROM 113, and management RAM 114.

In contrast, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 does not have an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, or a history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 has a calculation result memory 131, as in the third embodiment. Because the management IC 66 does not have an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, or a history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the ball entry history for the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. In other words, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores information necessary when executing a program in the main CPU 63, also serves as a memory for storing ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I/F 111, and when an opportunity arises to calculate various parameters, it accesses the main RAM 65 to read the goal history and uses the read goal history to calculate various parameters. The calculated parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the calculation result memory 131 provides various parameters to the reading device, but the goal history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the goal detection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the goal detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12).

If it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has changed from a value of "0" to a value of "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first prize opening detection sensor 42a (step S3201: YES). In this case, the value of the general prize counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3202). The general prize counter is a counter that stores the number of balls that have entered the general prize opening 31 as a ball entry history. The value of the general prize counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the reading device reads various parameters from the calculation result memory 131. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general prize counter is retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Then, the value of the 10-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3203).

If it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a (step S3204: YES). In this case, the value of the general prize counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3205). Then, the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3206).

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a (step S3207: YES). In this case, the value of the general prize counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3208). Then, the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3209).

If it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from a value of "0" to a value of "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S3210: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3211). The value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3212). The special electric winning counter is a counter that stores the number of balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32 as a ball entry history. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the special electric winning counter is retained even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Then, the value of the 15-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3213).

If it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from "0" to "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a (step S3214: YES). In this case, the first actuation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3215). The value of the first actuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3216). The first actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the first actuation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first actuation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first actuation counter is retained even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Then, the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3217).

If it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from a value of "0" to a value of "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a (step S3218: YES). In this case, the second actuation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3219). The value of the second actuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3220). The second actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the second actuation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second actuation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second actuation counter is retained even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Then, the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3221).

If it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S3222: YES). In this case, the value of the Out Counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3223). The Out Counter is a counter that stores the number of balls that have entered the outlet 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the Out Counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the Out Counter is stored and retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

If it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from a value of "0" to a value of "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S3224: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3225).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the ball entry history for the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65 as the number of balls that have entered each entry point. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to output a signal to the management CPU 112 every time a ball enters any of the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for outputting signals from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In this embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 reads the number of balls that have entered the general winning slot 31 from the general winning counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that have entered the special winning device 32 from the special winning counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that have entered the first operating slot 33 from the first operation counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that have entered the second operating slot 34 from the second operation counter in the main RAM 65, and reads the number of balls that have entered the outlet 24a from the outlet counter in the main RAM 65. The read-out numbers of balls are then used to calculate the first through eighth parameters described in the first embodiment. However, since the number of balls that entered when the front door frame 14 was open is not measured separately from the number of balls that entered when the front door frame 14 was closed, the first through eighth parameters are calculated including the number of balls that entered when the front door frame 14 was open. Furthermore, because the number of balls that enter during the open/close execution mode and the number of balls that enter during the high probability mode are not measured individually, the first through eighteenth parameters and the twenty-first through twenty-sixth parameters described in the first embodiment above are not calculated. The calculated first through eighth parameters are written to the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters currently written in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0."

In addition, instead of the management IC 66 independently accessing the main RAM 65, the information on the number of balls that have been scored, stored in the main RAM 65 as a scoring history, may be transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control from the main CPU 63. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 from accessing the main RAM 65 simultaneously.

Eleventh Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the history of balls entering each ball entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that differ from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Figure 64 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62, as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, main ROM 64, main RAM 65, management IC 66, I/F 101, and read terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is also provided with a management I/F 111, management CPU 112, management ROM 113, management RAM 114, correspondence memory 116, and history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

In contrast, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 does not have an RTC 115. Furthermore, in addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is also provided with an alert light-emitting unit 151. The light emission of the alert light-emitting unit 151 is directly controlled by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 and calculates various parameters using the information on the history of balls entering each entry point read from the history memory 117. The light emission state of the alert light-emitting unit 151 is then controlled according to the content of the various calculated parameters. The alert light-emitting unit 151 is housed in the storage space of the board box 60a of the main control unit 60. However, the board box 60a is formed transparent, and the alert light-emitting unit 151 is provided so that the light emission state of the alert light-emitting unit 151 can be visually confirmed from outside the board box 60a. This allows the gaming machine main body 12 to be opened relative to the outer frame 11, enabling visual inspection of the main control device 60, and makes it possible to visually check the light-emitting state of the notification light-emitting unit 151 without having to open the circuit board box 60a.

Figure 65 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment above. In detail, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric current detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment described above, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j. However, in this embodiment, the signals corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, the signals corresponding to the high probability mode, and the signals corresponding to the front door frame 14 are not input to the input port 121. In other words, no signals related to the ball entry history are input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals that will be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o are not determined during the design stage of the management IC 66; these signal types are identified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. As with the first embodiment, the process for identifying this signal type is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and management CPU 112 begins. On the other hand, it was determined during the design stage of the management IC 66 that an output instruction signal will be input to the sixteenth buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 can identify that an output instruction signal will be input to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63.

Figure 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has changed from a low level to a high level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has changed from a low level to a high level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has changed from a low level to a high level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has changed from a low level to a high level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has changed from a low level to a high level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from a low level to a high level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has changed from a low level to a high level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from a low level to a high level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from a low level to a high level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from a low level to a high level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from a low level to a high level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from a low level to a high level. The thirteenth buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has changed from a low level to a high level. The fourteenth buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has changed from a low level to a high level. The 15th buffer counter 152o stores information about the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o has changed from LOW level to HIGH level.

However, the objects of measurement using the counters for the first to fifteenth buffers 152a to 152o are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, to which signals corresponding to the result of a ball entering either the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the above measurement objects. Whether or not these are objects of measurement is determined based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (Figure 22).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112, out of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, is set in the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 (step S3301). Specifically, the number of correspondence relationship areas in the correspondence memory 116, out of the first through fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a through 123o, that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first through seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a through 123j, and therefore in step S3301 the confirmation target counter is set to "7."

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, has changed from "0" to "1," it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from LOW to HIGH (step S3302). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n," the nth buffers 122a through 122o are the target for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first buffer 122a is the target for checking the numerical information.

If a positive determination is made in step S3302, an increment process is performed on the corresponding buffer counters 152a-152o (step S3303). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first through fifteenth buffer counters 152a-152o in the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth buffer counter 152e is the counter to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first buffer counter 152a is the counter to be incremented.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3302, or if the processing of step S3303 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3304). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S3305). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S3305: NO), the processing from step S3302 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the history of game balls entering the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment above, but is instead stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the external output processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output processing is executed in step S608 of the management processing (Figure 22).

If the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S3401: YES), the number of counters among the first through fifteenth buffer counters 152a through 152o to which the management CPU 112 is to output count information is set in the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S3402). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas among the first through fifteenth correspondence areas 123a through 123o in the correspondence memory 116 that store information other than blank information is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. As already explained in this embodiment, since information other than blank information is stored in the first through seventh correspondence areas 123a through 123g, the output target counter is set to "7" in step S3402.

Then, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read (step S3403), and the count information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the history memory 117 is read (step S3404). In this case, if the output target counter value is "n," the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target from which the correspondence information is read, and the nth buffer counters 152a to 152o are the target from which the count information is read. For example, if the output target counter value is "5," the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target from which the correspondence information is read, and the fifth buffer counter 152e is the target from which the count information is read. If the output target counter value is "1," the first correspondence area 123a is the target from which the correspondence information is read, and the first buffer counter 152a is the target from which the count information is read.

Then, information output processing is executed (step S3405). In the information output processing, a combination of the correspondence information read in step S3403 and the count information read in step S3404 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the count information for the correspondence information to be output this time.

Then, the value of the output target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3406). Then, it is determined whether the value of the output target counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3407). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or greater (step S3407: NO), the processing from step S3403 onwards is executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. Note that if a positive determination is made in step S3407, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12).

First, a determination is made as to whether a trigger for calculating various parameters has occurred (step S3501). This trigger occurs when the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins, and, as in the fifth embodiment, whenever the total number of game balls entering the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special power winning device 32, first actuation port 33, and second actuation port 34 exceeds the trigger threshold number of 500. Because the first execution of the parameter management process after the supply of operating power begins is set as the trigger for calculation, the trigger for calculating various parameters can be easily generated by turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF and then ON again. If a positive determination is made in step S3501, a notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters is executed, as described below. Therefore, the ball entry patterns in the play area PA up to that point can be ascertained simply by turning the power OFF and ON. Furthermore, by configuring the system so that a calculation trigger occurs each time the total number of game balls entering the game area reaches or exceeds the trigger reference number of 500, it becomes possible to precisely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S3501: YES), the goal scoring history is read from the counter that stores the goal scoring history among the first through fifteenth buffer counters 152a through 152o in the history memory 117 (step S3502). Specifically, the numerical information of the first through seventh buffer counters 152a through 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 is able to recognize the buffer counter 152a through 152o from which the goal scoring history is to be read, based on the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various calculation processes are performed (step S3503). In these calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read in step S3502 and the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to that ball entry history. Using the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64, the main CPU 63 can determine which of the outlet 24a, general prize entry port 31, special electric prize entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 each ball entry history read in step S3502 corresponds to, and can also determine the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S3502.

Specifically, the various parameters calculated in step S3503 are as follows:
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") The ratio of "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" to "total number of game balls paid out" is calculated as follows: eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34").

Then, it is determined whether the calculated parameters are within the first range (step S3504). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the calculated parameters are within the first range and a positive determination is made in step S3504. If a positive determination is made in step S3504, a first alarm state setting process is executed (step S3505). In this setting process, the light emission of the alarm light-emitting unit 151 is controlled to enter the first alarm state. In this case, the alarm light-emitting unit 151 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S3504, it is determined whether the calculated parameters are within the second range (step S3506). If either the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is met, the calculated parameters are deemed to be within the second range and a positive determination is made in step S3506. If a positive determination is made in step S3506, a second alarm state setting process is executed (step S3507). In this setting process, the light emission of the alarm light-emitting unit 151 is controlled to enter the second alarm state. In this case, the alarm light-emitting unit 151 emits yellow light.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3506, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, processing to set the third notification state is executed (step S3508). In this setting processing, the light emission of the notification light-emitting unit 151 is controlled to set the third notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting unit 151 emits red light.

The light-emitting state set in step S3505, step S3507, or step S3508 will continue until a new notification state is set for the notification light-emitting unit 151 or until the supply of operating power to the notification light-emitting unit 151 is stopped. Furthermore, since the notification state of the notification light-emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light-emitting unit 151 is temporarily turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light-emitting state of the notification light-emitting unit 151 will be controlled so that it will be in a light-emitting state corresponding to the type of notification state information stored in the main RAM 65.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The ball entry history for the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is instead stored as information on the number of times a ball has been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

An indicator light 151 is provided to indicate the content corresponding to the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112. This allows the pachinko machine 10 itself to indicate the content corresponding to the various parameters, allowing the manager of the amusement hall or the like to understand the state of balls entering the game area PA without having to read the information stored in the history memory 117.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with an MPU 62 and a notification light-emitting unit 151. This makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light-emitting unit 151.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light-emitting unit 151 are performed by the main CPU 63, not the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the notification content from the notification light-emitting unit 151.

The first notification state is entered when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the first range, the second notification state is entered when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the second range, and the third notification state is entered when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to neither the first nor the second range. In other words, rather than the various parameters being reported as they are, content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters fall is reported. This makes it possible to prevent too many notification patterns from appearing on the notification light-emitting unit 151, and reduces the load on controlling the notification light-emitting unit 151.

In addition, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of power to the notification light-emitting unit 151 may continue, thereby maintaining the light-emitting state that was in effect immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped. In this case, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to determine the state of entry of the game ball into the game area PA by checking the notification light-emitting unit 151.

Instead of this configuration, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be configured to be turned off when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, but to be controlled to emit light that corresponds to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, instead. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light-emitting unit 151 before opening at an amusement hall, it would be possible to ascertain the ball entry patterns on the previous business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to a configuration in which the notification light-emitting unit 151 is used, but may also be a display device with a display surface, such as a symbol display device 41, or a speaker unit 54. Furthermore, a signal corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may also be output externally to the hall computer HC of the gaming hall via the external terminal board 97.

The special symbol display unit 37a of the special symbol unit 37 or the ordinary symbol display unit 38a of the ordinary symbol unit 38 may also function as the notification light-emitting unit 151. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 begins, and depending on whether the calculation result falls within the first range, the second range, or somewhere else as in the above embodiment, the special symbol display unit 37a or the ordinary symbol display unit 38a may issue a notification corresponding to the calculation result immediately after the supply of operating power begins. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition for the display of the changing pattern on the special symbol display unit 37a or the start condition for the display of the changing pattern on the ordinary symbol display unit 38a is met, or may be temporarily suspended when the start condition for the display of the changing pattern is met and resumed when the display of the changing pattern is finished. This configuration allows the special symbol display unit 37a or the ordinary symbol display unit 38a to double as a notification means for notifying the state of a game ball entering the game area PA.

The notification light-emitting unit 151 may be located in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be located behind the window panel 52 on the pachinko machine 10, in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it is possible to check the notification content corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without having to open the gaming machine main body 12 or front door frame 14.

Twelfth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for providing the information on each goal score to the management IC 66 differs from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Figure 70 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a to the main CPU 63 and management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 via the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 via the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 via the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special current detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 via the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 via the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 via the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 via the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed by branching off from the first signal path SL11 at a midpoint, and this first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A second branch path SL22 is formed by branching off from the second signal path SL12 at a midpoint, and this second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A third branch path SL23 is formed by branching off from the third signal path SL13 at a midpoint, and this third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching off from the fourth signal path SL14 at a midpoint, and this fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching off from the fifth signal path SL15 at a midpoint, and this fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the sixth signal path SL16, and this sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the seventh signal path SL17, and this seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a are input to the management IC 66 without processing by the main CPU 63. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing to have the management CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of each of the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, thereby reducing the processing load on the main CPU 63.

In addition, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are located within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access these branch points and the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, preventing fraudulent activity such as inputting abnormal ball-scoring results only to the management IC 66.

Thirteenth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution mode of the open/close execution mode differs between the case where a low probability jackpot result is obtained and the case where a high probability jackpot result is obtained. Below, the execution mode of the open/close execution mode in this embodiment will be explained. Note that the explanation of the same configuration as in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 71 is a time chart for explaining the execution mode of the open/close execution mode in this embodiment. Figures 71(a1) and 71(a2) show the execution period of the open/close execution mode, Figures 71(b1) and 71(b2) show the execution period of round play, and Figures 71(c1) and 71(c2) show the period during which the special power winning device 32 is in the open state. Also, Figures 71(a1), 71(b1), and 71(c1) show the execution mode of the open/close execution mode in the cases of a 2R low-probability result, a 4R low-probability result, a 6R low-probability result, a 10R low-probability result, and a 16R low-probability result, and Figures 71(a2), 71(b2), and 71(c2) show the execution mode of the open/close execution mode in the cases of a 2R high-probability result, a 4R high-probability result, a 6R high-probability result, a 10R high-probability result, and a 16R high-probability result.

Whether it is the open/close execution mode for a low-probability result or the open/close execution mode for a high-probability result, the open/close execution mode begins at timing t1 as shown in Figures 71(a1) and 71(a2), and the first round of play is executed from timing t2 to timing t3 as shown in Figures 71(b1) and 71(b2). Whether it is the open/close execution mode for a low-probability result or the open/close execution mode for a high-probability result, the execution mode for each round of play is the same except for the final round of play. Specifically, as shown in Figures 71(c1) and 71(c2), the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play, and the duration for which the special electric winning device 32 remains open in each round of play is set to 29 seconds, which is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning balls in the round of play (10).

After that, in the opening and closing execution mode when the result is low probability, the final round of play is executed from timing t4 to timing t5, as shown in Figure 71 (b1). The execution mode of this round of play is the same as the execution mode of the previous rounds. In other words, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play, and the duration for which the special electric winning device 32 remains open in each round of play is set to 29 seconds, which is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning balls in the round of play (10). Then, an ending period occurs from timing t5 to timing t6, and the opening and closing execution mode for this round ends.

In the opening and closing execution mode when a high probability result is obtained, the final round of play is executed from timing t4 to timing t5, as shown in Figure 71 (b2), and during this round of play, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed multiple times with a predetermined interval between them. Specifically, as shown in Figure 71 (c2), the special electric winning device 32 is opened from timing t4 to timing t11, from timing t12 to timing t13, from timing t14 to timing t15, from timing t16 to timing t17, from timing t18 to timing t19, and from timing t20 to timing t5. Then, an ending period occurs from timing t5 to timing t6, and the current opening and closing execution mode ends.

In this case, from timing t4 to timing t11, timing t12 to timing t13, timing t14 to timing t15, timing t16 to timing t17, and timing t18 to timing t19, the open duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set to a period longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds) and shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning balls in a round of play (10 balls), specifically set to 1 second. During this relatively short open duration, the number of winning balls in the special electric prize winning device 32 is about 1, and it is possible that no winning ball will occur in the special electric prize winning device 32. Furthermore, because the special electric winning device 32 opens five times during this relatively short opening duration, which is fewer than the maximum number of winning balls, at time t19, when the last opening during the relatively short opening duration ends, it is unlikely that the maximum number of winning balls will have been won in the special electric winning device 32 in the last executed round of play. Therefore, there is a high probability that the special electric winning device 32 will open after time t20.

The relatively short open duration is set to a period during which, when the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 is in the open position, a gaming ball supplied from the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 to the right end of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can reach the predetermined range X of the guide plate portion 214. When the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position, a gaming ball that has reached this predetermined range X can fall below the opening/closing member 202 and enter the through gate 35. This creates an opportunity for a gaming ball to enter the through gate 35 each time the special electric winning device 32 is opened with a relatively short open duration.

The open duration of the special electric winning device 32 from timing t20 to timing t5 is set to a period longer than the relatively short open duration. This relatively long open duration is set to a period equal to or greater than the product of the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning balls in a round of play (10 balls), specifically set to 6 seconds. During this relatively long open duration, it can be expected that the maximum number of winning balls will enter the special electric winning device 32. Furthermore, if a winning ball enters the special electric winning device 32 during an open run of the special electric winning device 32 with the relatively short open duration, there is a high possibility that the number of winning balls in the special electric winning device 32 during the final round of play will reach the maximum number of winning balls during an open run of the special electric winning device 32 with the relatively long open duration.

In the final round of play in the open/close execution mode in the event of a high probability result, as described above, the special electric winning device 32 will open five times with relatively short opening durations, followed by one opening with a relatively long opening duration, but there are interval periods between these openings during which the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. In other words, as shown in Figure 71 (c2), the special electric winning device 32 will remain in a closed state from timing t11 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t14, timing t15 to timing t16, timing t17 to timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20. These interval periods are all the same, specifically set to 1 second.

As described above, by opening and closing the special electric winning device 32 multiple times during the final round of play, there are more opportunities for the opening and closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 to move from the open position to the closed position when a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202. This makes it possible to provide more opportunities for a winning ball to enter the through gate 35 in the opening and closing execution mode when a high probability result is obtained. It also makes it possible to increase the advantage of a high probability result compared to a low probability result.

In addition, by opening and closing the special electric winning device 32 multiple times during the final round of play with a relatively short open duration, it is possible to prevent the duration of the final round of play from becoming extremely long. It is also possible to prevent the number of winning game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 during the final round of play from reaching the upper limit of winning balls before all of the openings of the special electric winning device 32 with relatively short open durations are completed.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration of the master CPU 63 that enables the above-described execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the special call start processing in this embodiment. The special call start processing is executed in step S1209 of the special call control processing (FIG. 38). Steps S3601 to S3603 execute the same processing as steps S1601 to S1603 of the special call start processing (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment. If the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3604: YES), a round count setting process is executed (step S3605). In the round count setting process, the number of rounds for the current opening/closing execution mode is set in a round counter provided in the master RAM 65. The round counter is a counter that allows the master CPU 63 to determine the remaining number of rounds for the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the result is a 2R low probability result or a 2R high probability result, the round counter is set to "2", if the result is a 4R low probability result or a 4R high probability result, the round counter is set to "4", if the result is a 6R low probability result or a 6R high probability result, the round counter is set to "6", if the result is a 10R low probability result or a 10R high probability result, the round counter is set to "10", and if the result is a 16R low probability result or a 16R high probability result, the round counter is set to "16". Also, if the result is any of the small wins, the value of the round counter is cleared to "0".

Then, the process for setting the number of openings and closings is executed (step S3606). In the process for setting the number of openings and closings in the special power start process, if either of the jackpot results is obtained, the opening and closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" to represent the number of openings and closings of the special power winning device 32 in the first executed round of play. If the current game result is the first small jackpot result, the opening and closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "1." If the current game result is the second small jackpot result, the opening and closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "5." If the current game result is the third small jackpot result, the opening and closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10." Then, in steps S3607 to S3610, the same processes as steps S1606 to S1609 of the special power start process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the special call open processing in this embodiment. Note that the special call open processing is executed in step S1210 of the special call control processing (Figure 38).

If a prize has been won in the special line prize-winning device 32 (step S3701: YES), the value of the prize-winning counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3702). If the value of the prize-winning counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3703: YES), if a big win has been achieved, the current round of play must be ended, and if a small win has been achieved, the current opening/closing execution mode must be ended. Therefore, the value of the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3704).

Then, on the condition that the current opening/closing execution mode results in one of the jackpot results (step S3705: YES), the value of the round counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3706). Then, the process for setting the number of opening/closing times is executed (step S3707). In this setting process, if the current round counter value is "0," no value is set to the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65. Also, in this setting process, if the current round counter value is "1," the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" if the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a low-probability result, while the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "6" if the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a high-probability result. Also, in this setting process, if the current round counter value is 2 or greater, the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "1." Then, the process for setting the maximum number of winnings is executed (step S3708). In this setting process, if the current round counter value is "0", no value is set in the prize counter in the main RAM 65; if the current round counter value is 1 or greater, the prize counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10" as the upper limit number of prizes for a new round of play. Then, in steps S3709 to S3711, the processes of steps S1703 to S1705 of the special call open processing (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3701 or step S3703, it is determined whether the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter is "0" to determine whether the opening duration of the current opening of the special electricity winning device 32 has elapsed (step S3712). If a positive judgment is made in step S3712, the value of the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3713). Then, if the value of the opening/closing count counter after the decrement is "0" (step S3714: YES) and the trigger for executing the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot result (step S3715: YES), the value of the round counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3716). In addition, a process for setting the number of opening/closing times is executed (step S3717). In this setting process, if the current round counter value is "0", no value is set to the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65. Furthermore, in this setting process, if the current round counter value is "1," the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" if the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode is a low-probability result, whereas the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "6" if the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode is a high-probability result. Also, in this setting process, if the current round counter value is 2 or greater, the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "1." Also, a process for setting the maximum number of winnings is executed (step S3718). In this setting process, if the current round counter value is "0," no value is set in the winning counter in the main RAM 65; if the current round counter value is 1 or greater, the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10" as the maximum number of winnings for a new round of play. Then, steps S3709 to S3711 are executed.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the special line closed processing in this embodiment. Note that the special line closed processing is executed in step S1211 of the special line control processing (Figure 38).

Steps S3801 to S3804 execute the same processing as steps S1801 to S1804 of the special line closed processing (Figure 44) in the first embodiment described above. If a negative judgment is made in step S3801, or if the processing of step S3804 is executed, it is determined whether both the round counter in the main RAM 65 and the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 are "0" (step S3805). If a negative judgment is made in step S3805, it is determined whether the value of the special line timer counter is "0" to determine whether the interval period has elapsed (step S3806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S3806: YES), the processing to set the open duration period is executed (step S3807). In this setting process, if the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode is the second small win result, the opening duration information for the second small win result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special chart special power timer counter, and if the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode is the third small win result, the opening duration information for the third small win result (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special chart special power timer counter. Also, in this setting process, if the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode is any low-probability result, the longest opening duration information (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special chart special power timer counter. Also, in this setting process, if the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode is any high-probability result and the value of the round counter is 2 or more, the longest opening duration information (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special chart special power timer counter. Furthermore, in this setting process, if the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode is one of the high probability results and the round counter value is "1", then if the value of the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is between "6" and "2", information about a relatively short opening duration (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special chart special power timer counter, and if the value of the opening/closing count counter in the main RAM 65 is "1", information about a relatively long opening duration (specifically, 6 seconds) is set in the special chart special power timer counter.

Then, in steps S3808 to S3809, the same processing as steps S1810 to S1811 of the special line closed processing (Figure 44) in the first embodiment described above is executed. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S3805, in steps S3810 to S3812, the same processing as steps S1812 to S1814 of the special line closed processing (Figure 44) in the first embodiment described above is executed.

According to the embodiment described above in detail, the special electric winning device 32 opens and closes multiple times during the final round of play, which often results in the opening and closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 moving from the open position to the closed position when a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202. This increases the chances of winning through the through gate 35 in the opening and closing execution mode when a high probability result is obtained. It also increases the advantage of a high probability result compared to a low probability result.

In addition, by using a relatively short open duration for the first half of the final round of play, it is possible to prevent the duration of the final round of play from becoming extremely long. It is also possible to prevent the number of winning game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the final round of play from reaching the upper limit of winning balls before all of the openings of the special electric winning device 32 with relatively short open durations are completed.

In the final round of play in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a high probability result, the opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 in the final opening is set to a period longer than the relatively short opening duration. This relatively long opening duration is set to a period equal to or greater than the product of the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning balls in a round of play (10 balls), and is specifically set to 6 seconds. During this relatively long opening duration, it can be expected that the maximum number of winning balls will enter the special electric winning device 32. Furthermore, if a winning ball enters the special electric winning device 32 in the opening of the special electric winning device 32 with the relatively short opening duration, there is a high possibility that the number of winning balls in the special electric winning device 32 in the final round of play will reach the maximum number of winning balls during the opening of the special electric winning device 32 with the relatively long opening duration.

<Alternative to the thirteenth embodiment>
The round game in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened multiple times is not limited to the last round game, but may be the first round game or an intermediate round game. Also, the special electric winning device 32 may be opened multiple times in multiple round games.

- A single round of play is not limited to a configuration in which an opening with a relatively short duration occurs followed by an opening with a relatively long duration, and may simply involve multiple openings with relatively short durations.

- The relatively short open duration may be configured to allow the game ball to reach a position on the guide plate portion 214 that allows it to enter the through gate 35, but to make it impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the entrance portion 45b of the special electric winning device 32. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which it is possible for the ball to enter the through gate 35 even in a situation in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the entrance portion 45b of the special electric winning device 32. Note that this configuration may also be applied to a configuration in which only one opening occurs in one round of play, rather than a configuration in which multiple openings occur in one round of play.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, a through gate 35 is provided below the special winning device 32, and when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while a gaming ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214, the gaming ball can enter the through gate 35. However, in this embodiment, the gaming ball can enter a ball entry portion other than the through gate 35. The different configuration will be explained below. Note that the explanation of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 75 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. As in the first embodiment, the special electric winning device 32 includes a passageway forming body 201, an opening/closing member 202, and a guide member 203. When the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, game balls cannot enter the fourth discharge passageway 45, and the game balls flow downward below the special electric winning device 32 by passing through the opening 213 (see Figure 30) formed in the opening/closing member 202. When the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, game balls can land on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, and game balls on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the fourth discharge passageway 45. Furthermore, in the right area PA3, a group of guide nails 241 is provided upstream of the special electric winning device 32, as in the first embodiment. As a result, game balls flowing down the right area PA3 are guided by the guide nail group 241 to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. The game balls guided to the receiving portion 231 then reach the right end of the opening/closing member 202.

In the right-side area PA3, no through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32. In this embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left-side area PA2 of the game area PA. When compared with the same firing operation in which the game ball flows down the left-side area PA2, the frequency with which game balls enter the through gate 35 is constant regardless of the game state. Furthermore, when a firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left-side area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operating port 34 is provided. Therefore, when a firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left-side area PA2, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the through gate 35. Furthermore, if the second operating port 34 is opened as a result of the game ball entering the through gate 35, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second operating port 34.

In this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as support modes for controlling the state of the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34. In the low-frequency support mode, the normal power device 34a does not enter the open state or the frequency with which the normal power device 34a enters the open state is relatively low, while in the high-frequency support mode, the frequency with which the normal power device 34a enters the open state is relatively high. If a low-probability result is obtained, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low-frequency support mode, and if a high-probability result is obtained, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high-frequency support mode.

In the right-side area PA3, a first special ball entrance 251 and a second special ball entrance 252 are provided below the special electric winning device 32. The first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 have openings that face vertically upward, and no components are provided to directly open and close these entrances. Furthermore, a ball that enters the first special ball entrance 251 is discharged from the play area PA by being guided to the back side of the play board 24, while a ball that enters the second special ball entrance 252 is discharged from the play area PA by being guided to the back side of the play board 24. Furthermore, the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 are arranged side by side horizontally, with the first special ball entrance 251 on the left side and the second special ball entrance 252 on the right side.

The first special entrance 251 is provided with a first special detection sensor 251a for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the first special entrance 251, and the second special entrance 252 is provided with a second special detection sensor 252a for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second special entrance 252. These first special detection sensor 251a and second special detection sensor 252a are electrically connected to the main CPU 63.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12).

If one game ball is detected by the first special detection sensor 251a (step S3901: YES), the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3902). The 10 prize ball counter is a counter that the main CPU 63 uses to determine the number of times 10 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or greater, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 10 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

If one game ball is detected by the second special detection sensor 252a (step S3903: YES), the value of the five prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3904). The five prize ball counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the number of times five game balls should be paid out. If the value of the five prize ball counter is one or greater, a five prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), and the value of the five prize ball counter is decremented by one when the five prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the five prize ball command, it controls the payout device 76 so that five game balls are paid out.

Note that other processing is also performed during the goal detection process (step S3905). These other processing steps are identical to steps S301 to S325 of the goal detection process (Figure 14) in the first embodiment described above.

Returning to the explanation of the game board 24 (Figure 75), the first special ball entrance 251 is located downstream of the special electric winning device 32, closer to the passage forming body 201 of the special electric winning device 32. In addition, a first guide nail group 253 is provided by a plurality of nails 24b between the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 and the first special ball entrance 251. The first guide nail group 253 allows game balls located to the left of the first guide nail group 253 to enter the first special ball entrance 251, but prevents game balls located to the right of the first guide nail group 253 from entering the first special ball entrance 251. As a result, when a gaming ball is present in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 near the passage forming body 201 and the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position, the gaming ball will be able to enter the first special ball entrance 251, but other gaming balls will not be able to enter the first special ball entrance 251.

The distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the first range X1 is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, specifically, twice the diameter of the gaming ball. However, this is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the first range X1 may be configured to be less than the diameter of the gaming ball, or may be configured to be larger than twice the diameter of the gaming ball.

The second special ball entrance 252 is located downstream of the special electric winning device 32, to the right of the first special ball entrance 251, but spaced to the left of the right end of the opening/closing member 202. A second guide nail group 254 consisting of a plurality of nails 24b is provided between the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 and the second special ball entrance 252. The second guide nail group 254 allows game balls located to the left of the second guide nail group 254 to enter the second special ball entrance 252, but prevents game balls located to the right of the second guide nail group 254 from entering the second special ball entrance 252. As a result, when a gaming ball is present in the second range X2 near the center on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 and the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position, the gaming ball can enter the second special ball entrance 252, but other gaming balls cannot enter the second special ball entrance 252. In this case, even if the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position and a gaming ball is present in a position to the right of the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, the gaming ball will not enter the second special ball entrance 252. Furthermore, when the opening/closing member 202 is positioned in the closed position, the gaming ball will pass through the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 at a position to the right of the second range X2, and therefore will not enter the second special ball entrance 252.

The distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the second range X2 is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, specifically 2.5 times the diameter of the gaming ball. However, this is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the second range X2 may be configured to be less than the diameter of the gaming ball, or may be configured to be larger than 2.5 times the diameter of the gaming ball.

Next, the manner in which a gaming ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 or the second special ball entrance 252 in the open/close execution mode will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 77. Figure 77(a) shows the period when the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 is positioned in the open position, Figure 77(b) shows the period when a gaming ball is present in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, Figure 77(c) shows the period when a gaming ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, Figure 77(d) shows the timing when a gaming ball enters the first special ball entrance 251, and Figure 77(e) shows the timing when a gaming ball enters the second special ball entrance 252.

First, we will explain what happens when a gaming ball enters the first special ball entrance 251. At time t1, the opening/closing member 202 is positioned in the open position as shown in FIG. 77(a). Thereafter, from time t2 to time t3, the gaming ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate section 214 as shown in FIG. 77(c). As the gaming ball continues to flow down the guide plate section 214, it is present in the first range X1 on the guide plate section 214 as shown in FIG. 77(b) from time t3 to time t4. Then, at time t4, when the gaming ball is present in the first range X1 on the guide plate section 214, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in FIG. 77(a). As a result, the gaming ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 at time t5 as shown in FIG. 77(d). When a gaming ball enters the first special ball entrance 251, 10 gaming balls are paid out.

Next, we will explain what happens when a gaming ball enters the second special ball entrance 252. At timing t6, the opening/closing member 202 is positioned in the open position as shown in Figure 77(a). Thereafter, from timing t7 to timing t8, the gaming ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate section 214 as shown in Figure 77(c). Then, at timing t8, when the gaming ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate section 214, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in Figure 77(a). As a result, the gaming ball enters the second special ball entrance 252 at timing t9 as shown in Figure 77(e). Then, when the gaming ball enters the second special ball entrance 252, five gaming balls are paid out.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

By switching to the open/close execution mode, not only can game balls enter the special electric winning device 32, but game balls can also enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252. Game balls are then paid out not only when game balls enter the special electric winning device 32, but also when game balls enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252. This makes it possible to increase the number of game balls paid out in the open/close execution mode, making it more advantageous to use the open/close execution mode.

The special ball entrances 251, 252 are located downstream of the special electric winning device 32, in a position that allows game balls to flow in when the special electric winning device 32 switches from one of the open and closed states to the other. This allows game balls that miss the target entry point for the special electric winning device 32 to enter the special ball entrances 251, 252, and when the game balls enter the special ball entrances 251, 252, the game balls are paid out. This makes it possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage due to game balls that miss the target entry point for the special electric winning device 32.

When the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 moves from one of the open and closed positions to the other, a game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can enter the special ball entrances 251, 252. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player not only pays attention to whether a game ball will enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but also to whether the opening/closing member 202 moves from one of the open and closed positions to the other while a game ball is resting on the guide plate portion 214, making the game more enjoyable during the opening/closing execution mode.

When the special electric winning device 32 switches from an open state to a closed state, an opportunity arises for a game ball to enter the special ball entrances 251, 252. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, but also when it switches to the closed state.

The guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is configured so that a gaming ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 flows down to the left along the guide plate portion 214. The special ball entrances 251, 252 are positioned so that if a gaming ball is placed within the ranges X1 and X2 of the guide plate portion 214 and the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position, the gaming ball will fall downward and enter the special ball entrances 251, 252. In this case, for a gaming ball to enter the special ball entrances 251, 252, not only must a gaming ball be placed on the guide plate portion 214 when the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, but the opening/closing member 202 must also move from the open position to the closed position at the perfect timing when the gaming ball is within the ranges X1 and X2. This draws the player's attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball on the guide plate portion 214 and the timing of the change in the state of the opening/closing member 202, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

A group of guide nails 241 is provided upstream of the special electric winning device 32, guiding game balls that have flowed into the right-side area PA3 to the right end of the opening/closing member 202. The ranges X1 and X2 on the guide plate 214 that allow game balls to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252 are biased toward the left end of the opening/closing member 202. As a result, in order for game balls to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252, the opening/closing member 202 must move from the open position to the closed position at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down the guide plate 214. This draws the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the guide plate 214, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the special electric winning device 32, the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is located to the left of the ranges X1 and X2 on the guide plate 214 that allow game balls to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252. This allows game balls that are on the guide plate 214 but do not reach the entrance 45b to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252. Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage due to the game ball on the guide plate 214 not winning the special electric winning device 32 can be transformed into a sense of advantage due to the game ball winning at the special ball entrances 251 and 252.

A first special ball entrance 251 and a second special ball entrance 252 are provided as special ball entrances 251, 252 through which balls can enter when the open/close execution mode is activated. The number of game balls that are eligible for payout differs between when a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 and when a game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252. When a first condition is met in the open/close execution mode, a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251, and when a second condition is met in the open/close execution mode, a game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252. This allows players to not only hope that game balls will enter the special ball entrances 251, 252 in the open/close execution mode, but also that the game ball will enter the first special ball entrance 251, which has a higher payout number. This increases the enjoyment of the game during the open/close execution mode.

The first special ball entrance 251 is located at a position where a gaming ball can enter when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the gaming ball is resting in the first range X1 of the guide plate section 214. The second special ball entrance 252 is located at a position where a gaming ball can enter when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the gaming ball is resting in the second range X2 of the guide plate section 214. This not only allows players to expect the opening/closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position while the gaming ball is resting in either the first range X1 or the second range X2, but also allows players to expect the opening/closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position while the gaming ball is resting in the first range X1, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In a configuration in which the guide nail group 241 is provided to guide game balls that enter the right area PA3 to the right end of the opening/closing member 202, the second range X2 is set toward the horizontal center of the opening/closing member 202, and the first range X1 is set in a position biased toward the left end of the opening/closing member 202. Furthermore, the entrance 45b of the special electric winning device 32 is located to the left of the opening/closing member 202. This makes it easier for game balls that are located closer to the entrance 45b of the special electric winning device 32 on the guide plate portion 214 to enter the first special ball entrance 251, which has a higher payout number. In this case, the greater the disadvantage of a game ball unfortunately not entering the entrance 45b of the special electric winning device 32, the greater the benefit to the player.

<Alternative to the fourteenth embodiment>
A configuration may be adopted in which only one of the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 is provided. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a third special ball entrance is provided in addition to the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252, and when a game ball is placed in the third range of the guide plate portion 214 and the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position, the game ball enters the third special ball entrance.

- The configuration is not limited to only executing the payout of game balls regardless of whether the game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 or the second special ball entrance 252. For example, when a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251, first reserved information or second reserved information that triggers the win/loss determination process may be acquired, and when the game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252, the game ball may be paid out. In this case, different benefits will be awarded when a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 and when a game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252.

Also, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which, when a gaming ball enters the first special entrance 251, one of the first reserved information and the second reserved information is acquired, and when a gaming ball enters the second special entrance 252, the other of the first reserved information and the second reserved information is acquired. As a result, regardless of which special entrance 251, 252 a gaming ball enters, reserved information that triggers the win/loss determination process is acquired, but the type of reserved information acquired differs between when a gaming ball enters the first special entrance 251 and when a gaming ball enters the second special entrance 252.

Furthermore, for example, even if a game ball enters either the first special ball entrance 251 or the second special ball entrance 252, the reserved information on the normal ball side is acquired, but the probability that the second operating port 34 will be in the normal power open state may differ depending on the reserved information on the normal ball side acquired.

- The first range X1 is not limited to being narrower than the second range X2; the width of the first range X1 and the width of the second range X2 may be the same or approximately the same, or the first range X1 may be wider than the second range X2.

- Gaming balls that enter the special ball entrances 251, 252 are not limited to being guided to the back side of the gaming board 24. By configuring the special ball entrances 251, 252 in a gate-like manner, gaming balls that enter the special ball entrances 251, 252 may continue to flow down the gaming area PA. This makes it easier for gaming balls to reach the lower area PA4.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, instead of the special electric prize winning device 32, a first special electric prize winning device 261 and a second special electric prize winning device 262 are provided. The different configurations will be explained below. Note that the explanation of the same configurations as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 78 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In the right area PA3 of the play area PA, a first special electric winning device 261 and a second special electric winning device 262 are provided in place of the special electric winning device 32. The first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 are arranged vertically side by side, with the first special electric winning device 261 on the top and the second special electric winning device 262 on the bottom. In addition, while a through gate 35 was provided as a ball entry section that triggers the opening of the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment, a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as ball entry sections that trigger the opening of the normal electric device 34a in the second operating port 34. The first through gate 263 is provided to the left of the first special electric winning device 261, and the second through gate 264 is provided to the left of the second special electric winning device 262.

The configuration of the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the configuration of the first through gate 263 will be explained with reference to Figures 79(a) and 79(b). Figures 79(a) and 79(b) are cross-sectional views taken along line A-A in Figure 78.

A first large prize opening 265 is formed in the game board 24, penetrating the game board 24 in the front-to-rear direction. The first large prize opening 265 is formed in a position in the right-side area PA3, closer to the variable display unit 36, but to the right of the first through gate 263. A first special electric prize opening device 261 is provided to prevent or allow game balls to enter the first large prize opening 265. The first special electric prize opening device 261 has a first guide plate 271 provided below the first large prize opening 265, penetrating the game board 24 in the front-to-rear direction. The first guide plate 271 is movable back and forth by being driven by a drive means (not shown), and moves between a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the surface of the game board 24 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is minimal, and a guide position where it slides further forward than the blocking position and where the amount of protrusion from the surface of the game board 24 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is greatest.

A first ball receiving section 272 is provided above the right end of the first guide plate 271 on the game board 24. Furthermore, a first guide nail group 267 is provided above the first special electric winning device 261 in the right-side area PA3 to guide all game balls that flow from the upper area PA1 to the right-side area PA3 to the first ball receiving section 272 (see Figure 78). The first guide nail group 267 is formed by arranging multiple nails 24b so that they slope downward to the right. All game balls that flow into the right-side area PA3 are guided by the first guide nail group 267 to the first ball receiving section 272. The distance between the front end of the first ball receiving section 272 and the window panel 52 is set to be greater than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, the top surface of the first ball receiving section 272 slopes downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, game balls that reach the top surface of the first ball receiving section 272 will flow downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 due to their own weight.

When the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the blocking position, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is greater than the diameter of the game ball. In this blocking position, the front end of the first guide plate 271 is located further rearward of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272. Therefore, when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the blocking position, a game ball that reaches the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 will generally fall below the first ball receiving portion 272 through the space between the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52. It is also possible that a game ball guided by the first guide nail group 267 will bounce off the first ball receiving portion 272 and land on the upper surface of a region of the first guide plate 271 positioned in the blocking position that protrudes further forward than the surface of the game board 24 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the blocking position, the upper surface of the area that protrudes further toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the game board 24 slopes downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if a game ball lands on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 positioned in the blocking position, the game ball will fall below the first guide plate 271 from between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 without winning in the first special prize opening 265 or the first through gate 263. With the above configuration, when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the blocking position, winning in the first special prize opening 265 and winning in the first through gate 263 are prevented.

When the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the guide position, as shown in Figure 79 (b), the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the gaming ball. In this guide position, the front end of the first guide plate 271 is located further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272. Therefore, when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the guide position, a gaming ball that reaches the top surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 will land on the top surface of the first guide plate 271 in an area that protrudes further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the gaming board 24.

A boundary portion 274 for varying the inclination direction of the upper surface is formed on the upper surface of the protruding region 273, which protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24 when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the guide position. Using the boundary portion 274 as a boundary, the upper surface of the protruding region 273 is divided into a first guide region 275 located in front of the first ball receiving portion 272, a second guide region 276 located to the left of the first guide region 275 and continuing to the first large prize opening 265, and a third guide region 277 located to the left of the first guide region 275 and in front of the second guide region 276 and continuing to the first through gate 263. The upper surface of the first guide region 275 slopes downward toward the left. Furthermore, the left edge of the first guide region 275 abuts both the right edge of the second guide region 276 and the right edge of the third guide region 277. As a result, gaming balls guided from the first ball receiving section 272 to the first guidance area 275 flow down by gravity into the second guidance area 276 or the third guidance area 277. In this case, the area where the left end of the first guidance area 275 touches the right end of the second guidance area 276 is wider than the area where the left end of the first guidance area 275 touches the right end of the third guidance area 277. Therefore, gaming balls guided by the first guidance area 275 are more likely to flow into the second guidance area 276 than into the third guidance area 277. However, gaming balls guided by the first guidance area 275 flow into the third guidance area 277 with a certain frequency (specifically, one in four).

The upper surface of the second guidance area 276 slopes downward toward the rear left so as to guide a gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the second guidance area 276 toward the first large prize opening 265. This makes it easier for a gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the second guidance area 276 to enter the first large prize opening 265. A gaming ball that enters the first large prize opening 265 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first large prize opening 265. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a prize has been entered into the first large prize opening 265 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a round game or a small win result in which the first large prize opening 265 is to be opened, if it is determined that one gaming ball has entered the first large prize opening 265, the value of the prize counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. When the value of the winning counter reaches "0," it is determined that the maximum number of winnings has been reached, as in the first embodiment, and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the round play or small win result is ended.

The third guidance area 277 slopes downward toward the left. When the first guidance plate 271 is positioned in the guidance position, it extends horizontally from the right end of the right-side area PA3 to the right end of the first through gate 263. As already explained, the distance between the front end of the first guidance plate 271 positioned in the guidance position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless a game ball on the upper surface of the third guidance area 277 moves to the second guidance area 276 for some reason, it will flow downward by its own weight toward the first through gate 263 and enter the first through gate 263. A game ball that enters the first through gate 263 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) associated with the first through gate 263. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first through gate 263 based on the detection results of the detection sensor. Then, when it is determined that one game ball has entered the first through gate 263, the numerical information of the normal random number counter C4 is stored in the normal map holding area 65c as normal map side holding information, provided that the upper limit number of normal map side holding information is not stored in the normal map holding area 65c.

With the above configuration, in a round game in which the first special electric winning device 261 is the control target, or in an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small win result in which the first special electric winning device 261 is the control target, if the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the guide position, game balls that flow into the right area PA3 are guided to either the first large winning opening 265 or the first through gate 263, ensuring that a win occurs in either the first large winning opening 265 or the first through gate 263. If a win occurs in the first large winning opening 265, the remaining number of balls up to the maximum number of winning balls is reduced by one, as in the first embodiment above, and a specific number of 15 game balls is paid out. If a win occurs in the first through gate 263, an opportunity to obtain hold information from the regular side occurs. As a result, when the first special electric winning device 261 becomes the target of control, the player will be able to expect both a win at the first large winning slot 265 and a win at the first through gate 263, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Next, the configuration of the second special electric prize winning device 262 and the second through gate 264 will be explained with reference to Figure 80(a). Figure 80(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 78.

A second large prize opening 266 is formed in the game board 24, penetrating the game board 24 in the front-to-rear direction. The position where the second large prize opening 266 is formed is lower than the first special electric prize opening device 261 and the first through gate 263, and vertically below the first large prize opening 265. Furthermore, the position where this second large prize opening 266 is formed is closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right-side area PA3, but to the right of the second through gate 264.

A second special electric winning device 262 is provided to block or allow game balls to enter the second large winning opening 266. The second special electric winning device 262 has a second guide plate 281 that is provided below the second large winning opening 266 and penetrates the game board 24 in the front-to-rear direction. The second guide plate 281 is movable in the front-to-rear direction by being driven by a drive means (not shown), and moves between a blocking position where the amount of protrusion of the game board 24 from the surface toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is minimal, and a guide position where it slides further forward than the blocking position and where the amount of protrusion of the game board 24 from the surface toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is maximized.

A second ball receiving section 282 is provided above the right end of the second guide plate 281 on the gaming board 24. Furthermore, a second guide nail group 268 is provided above the second special electric winning device 262 in the right-side area PA3 to guide all gaming balls that flow below the first special electric winning device 261 without winning through the first large winning opening 265 or the first through gate 263 to the second ball receiving section 282 (see Figure 78). The second guide nail group 268 is formed by arranging multiple nails 24b so that they slope downward to the right. All gaming balls that flow below the first special electric winning device 261 in the right-side area PA3 are guided to the second ball receiving section 282 by the second guide nail group 268. The distance between the front end of the second ball receiving section 282 and the window panel 52 is set to be greater than the diameter of the gaming ball. Additionally, the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 slopes downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, game balls that reach the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 will flow downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 due to their own weight.

When the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the blocking position, similar to the first guide plate 271, the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is greater than the diameter of a game ball. In this blocking position, the front end of the second guide plate 281 is located further rearward of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282. Therefore, when the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the blocking position, a game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 will generally fall below the second ball receiving portion 282 through the space between the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52. It is also possible that a game ball guided by the second guide nail group 268 will bounce off the second ball receiving portion 282 and land on the upper surface of a region of the second guide plate 281 positioned in the blocking position that protrudes further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the game board 24. In contrast, when the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the blocking position, the upper surface of the area that protrudes further toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the game board 24 slopes downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if a game ball lands on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 positioned in the blocking position, the game ball will fall below the second guide plate 281 from between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 without winning in the second large prize opening 266 or the second through gate 264. With the above configuration, when the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the blocking position, winning in the second large prize opening 266 and winning in the second through gate 264 are prevented.

When the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the guide position, as shown in Figure 80 (a), the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the gaming ball. In this guide position, the front end of the second guide plate 281 is located further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282. Therefore, when the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the guide position, a gaming ball that reaches the top surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 will land on the top surface of the second guide plate 281 in an area that protrudes further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the gaming board 24.

A boundary portion 284 for varying the inclination direction of the upper surface is formed on the upper surface of the protruding region 283, which protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24 when the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the guide position. Using the boundary portion 284 as a boundary, the upper surface of the protruding region 283 is divided into a first guide region 285 located in front of the second ball receiving portion 282, a second guide region 286 located to the left of the first guide region 285 and continuing to the second large winning opening 266, and a third guide region 287 located to the left of the first guide region 285 and in front of the second guide region 286 and continuing to the second through gate 264. The upper surface of the first guide region 285 slopes downward toward the left. Furthermore, the left edge of the first guide region 285 abuts both the right edge of the second guide region 286 and the right edge of the third guide region 287. As a result, gaming balls guided from the second ball receiving section 282 to the first guidance area 285 flow down by gravity into the second guidance area 286 or the third guidance area 287. In this case, the area where the left end of the first guidance area 285 touches the right end of the second guidance area 286 is wider than the area where the left end of the first guidance area 285 touches the right end of the third guidance area 287. Therefore, gaming balls guided by the first guidance area 285 are more likely to flow into the second guidance area 286 than into the third guidance area 287. However, gaming balls guided by the first guidance area 285 flow into the third guidance area 287 with a certain frequency (for example, 1 in 7).

The upper surface of the second guidance area 286 slopes downward toward the rear left so as to guide a gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the second guidance area 286 toward the second large prize opening 266. This makes it easier for a gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the second guidance area 286 to enter the second large prize opening 266. A gaming ball that enters the second large prize opening 266 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second large prize opening 266. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a prize has been entered into the second large prize opening 266 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a round game or a small win result in which the second large prize opening 266 is to be opened, if it is determined that one gaming ball has entered the second large prize opening 266, the value of the prize counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. When the value of the winning counter reaches "0," it is determined that the maximum number of winnings has been reached, as in the first embodiment, and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the round play or small win result is ended.

The third guidance area 287 slopes downward toward the left. When the second guidance plate 281 is positioned in the guidance position, it extends horizontally from the right end of the right-side area PA3 to the right end of the second through gate 264. As already explained, the distance between the front end of the second guidance plate 281 positioned in the guidance position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless a game ball on the upper surface of the third guidance area 287 moves to the second guidance area 286 for some reason, it will flow downward by its own weight toward the second through gate 264 and enter the second through gate 264. A game ball that enters the second through gate 264 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second through gate 264. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second through gate 264 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is determined that one game ball has entered the second through gate 264, the numerical information of the normal random number counter C4 is stored in the normal map holding area 65c as normal map side holding information, provided that the normal map holding area 65c does not store the upper limit number of normal map side holding information.

With the above configuration, in a round game in which the second special electric winning device 262 is the control target, or in an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small win result in which the second special electric winning device 262 is the control target, if the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the guide position, game balls that flow into the right area PA3 are guided to either the second large winning opening 266 or the second through gate 264, ensuring that a win occurs in either the second large winning opening 266 or the second through gate 264. If a win occurs in the second large winning opening 266, the remaining number of balls up to the maximum number of winning balls is reduced by one, as in the first embodiment above, and a specific number of 15 game balls is paid out. If a win occurs in the second through gate 264, an opportunity to obtain reserved information from the regular side occurs. As a result, when the second special electric winning device 262 becomes the target of control, the player will be able to expect both a win at the second large winning slot 266 and a win at the second through gate 264, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Here, we will compare the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 262 with reference to Figures 80(a) and 80(b). As already explained, Figure 80(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 78, showing the second special electric prize winning device 262 when the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the guide position, and Figure 80(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 78, showing the first special electric prize winning device 261 when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the guide position.

80(a) and 80(b), the dimensions of the left end of the first guide area 275 on the first guide plate 271 are the same or approximately the same as the dimensions of the left end of the first guide area 275 on the second guide plate 281. In this case, the proportion of the area where the right end of the third guide area 277 touches the entire left end of the first guide area 275 on the first guide plate 271 is greater than the proportion of the area where the right end of the third guide area 287 touches the entire left end of the first guide area 285 on the second guide plate 281. Furthermore, in relation to this configuration, when the first special electric winning device 261 is in an open state (i.e., when the first guide plate 271 is positioned at the guide position), the probability that a game ball placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 will be guided to the first through gate 263 is higher than the probability that a game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 will be guided to the second through gate 264 when the second special electric winning device 262 is in an open state (i.e., when the second guide plate 281 is positioned at the guide position). Conversely, when the first special electric winning device 261 is in the open state (i.e., when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the guide position), the probability that a gaming ball placed on the top surface of the first guide plate 271 will be guided to the first large winning opening 265 is lower than the probability that a gaming ball placed on the top surface of the second guide plate 281 will be guided to the second large winning opening 266 when the second special electric winning device 262 is in the open state (i.e., when the second guide plate 281 is positioned in the guide position). This makes it possible to vary the likelihood of winning at the large winning openings 265, 266 and the likelihood of winning at the through gates 263, 264 depending on the type of special electric winning device that is the target of control, either the first special electric winning device 261 or the second special electric winning device 262.

As already explained, a first group of guide nails 267 is provided above the first special electric winning device 261, and the first group of guide nails 267 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to just in front of the first ball receiving section 272 (see Figure 78). In contrast, the first through gate 263 is provided in the right area PA3, below the first group of guide nails 267 and to the left of the first special electric winning device 261. Therefore, a gaming ball that flows into the right area PA3 will not enter the first through gate 263 without passing through the area where the first special electric winning device 261 is provided.

On the other hand, the second guide nail group 268 provided between the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 is designed to guide game balls that flow below the first special electric winning device 261 to the second ball receiving section 282, but the second guide nail group 268 does not extend further toward the first through gate 263 than the left end of the first special electric winning device 261 (see Figure 78). The second through gate 264 is provided vertically below the first through gate 263, and the first through gate 263 is configured so that game balls pass through a gate hole that penetrates it vertically. Therefore, a game ball that enters the first through gate 263 can also enter the second through gate 264, and not only that, a game ball that enters the first through gate 263 is more likely to enter the second through gate 264. If one game ball enters both the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264, two pieces of regular ball reserve information will be acquired, provided that the maximum number of regular ball reserve information has not been acquired in the regular ball reserve area 65c. Therefore, from this perspective, regular ball reserve information is more likely to be acquired when the first special electric winning device 261 is the control target than when the second special electric winning device 262 is the control target.

Next, the contents of the win/loss table in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram in Figure 81. Figure 81(a) shows a low-probability win/loss table for the first special design, Figure 81(b) shows a high-probability win/loss table for the first special design, Figure 81(c) shows a low-probability win/loss table for the second special design, and Figure 81(d) shows a high-probability win/loss table for the second special design.

Similar to the first embodiment described above, the win/loss tables for the first special symbol are a low-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol and a high-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol, as shown in Figures 81(a) and 81(b). These low-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol and high-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol only have jackpot results and loss results set as game results, and the high-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol is set to have a higher probability of selecting a jackpot result than the low-probability win/loss table for the first special symbol.

Similar to the first embodiment described above, the win/loss tables for the second special symbol are provided with a low-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol and a high-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol, as shown in Figures 81(c) and 81(d). The low-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol and the high-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol have a jackpot result, a first small win result, and a second small win result set as game results. The probability of a jackpot result being selected is set higher in the high-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol than in the low-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol. On the other hand, the probability of either the first small win result or the second small win result being selected is set higher in the low-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol than in the high-probability win/loss table for the second special symbol.

Next, we will explain how the opening and closing execution mode is executed. Figures 82(a) and 82(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the opening and closing execution mode is executed.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the jackpot results include a 2R low probability result, a 2R high probability result, a 4R low probability result, a 4R high probability result, a 6R low probability result, a 6R high probability result, a 10R low probability result, a 10R high probability result, a 16R low probability result, and a 16R high probability result, as shown in Figure 82(a). The number of rounds in the open/close execution mode, the maximum number of winning rounds, the open duration and interval period for each round are the same as in the first embodiment. Meanwhile, the type of special line winning device 261, 262 controlled in the open/close execution mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result. Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by any of a 2R high probability result, a 4R high probability result, a 6R high probability result, a 10R high probability result, and a 16R high probability result, the first special electric winning device 261 becomes the control target for each round of play, whereas in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by any of a 2R low probability result, a 4R low probability result, a 6R low probability result, a 10R low probability result, and a 16R low probability result, the second special electric winning device 262 becomes the control target for each round of play. As a result, it is easier to obtain reserved information on the normal side in the opening and closing execution mode when a high probability result occurs than when a low probability result occurs. On the other hand, it is less likely that a prize will be won in the large winning slots 265 and 266 when a high probability result occurs than when a low probability result occurs.

Here, the open duration of each round of play is set to 29 seconds, and the maximum number of winning balls for each round of play is set to 10. In this case, since the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, approximately 48 game balls can be supplied to the position of the first special electric winning device 261 before the open duration of each round of play has elapsed. In contrast, as already explained, of the four game balls guided to the first guidance area 275 of the first guidance plate 271 in the first special electric winning device 261, three game balls will enter the first large winning opening 265 and one game ball will enter the first through gate 263. Therefore, 3/4 of the 48 balls, or 36 balls, will be guided to the first large winning opening 265, which is more than the maximum number of winning balls. Therefore, even if the first special electric winning device 261 becomes the target of control, the maximum number of game balls that can win in each round of play can still win in the first large winning slot 265. Incidentally, the period during which the guide plates 271, 281 of the special electric winning devices 261, 262 are held in the guide position in each round of play is set to a period longer than the shortest period required for a game ball that has reached the ball receiving section 272, 282 to begin falling from the left end of the guide plate 271, 281 toward the corresponding through gate 263, 264 when the game ball is guided to the corresponding through gate 263, 264.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the first and second small win results are set as small win results, as shown in Figure 82 (b). The maximum number of winning balls, the duration of opening, the number of openings, and the interval period in the opening/closing execution mode for these small win results are all the same. Meanwhile, the type of special electric winning device 261, 262 controlled in the opening/closing execution mode differs depending on the type of small win result. Specifically, the first special electric winning device 261 is controlled in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first small win result, whereas the second special electric winning device 262 is controlled in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second small win result. This makes it easier to obtain reserved information on the normal side in the opening/closing execution mode when the first small win result occurs than when the second small win result occurs. Meanwhile, the first small win result makes it less likely that a prize will be won in the large winning slots 265, 266 in the opening/closing execution mode when the first small win result occurs than when the second small win result occurs. Incidentally, the period during which the guide plates 271, 281 of the special electric winning devices 261, 262 are held in the guide position during each opening of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small win result is set to a period longer than the shortest period required for a game ball that has reached the ball receiving section 272, 282 to begin falling from the left end of the guide plate 271, 281 towards the corresponding through gate 263, 264 when the game ball is guided to the corresponding through gate 263, 264.

Figure 83 is a flowchart showing the special line open setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The open setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special line start process (Figure 42) and in step S1810 of the special line closed process (Figure 44).

First, it is determined whether the current control target is the first special electric winning device 261 (step S4001). If the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by either a high probability result or the first small win result, the first special electric winning device 261 is the control target, and if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by either a low probability result or the second small win result, the control target is the second special electric winning device 262.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4001, an open setting process for the first special electric winning device 261 is executed (step S4002). Specifically, a drive signal is sent to the drive means of the first special electric winning device 261 so that the first guide plate 271 of the first special electric winning device 261 is positioned in the guide position. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4001, an open setting process for the second special electric winning device 262 is executed (step S4003). Specifically, a drive signal is sent to the drive means of the second special electric winning device 262 so that the second guide plate 281 of the second special electric winning device 262 is positioned in the guide position. As a result, the special electric winning devices 261, 262 corresponding to the big win result or small win result that triggered the open/close execution mode are placed in the open state.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the special electric winning devices 261, 262 are in the open state, game balls can enter the through gates 263, 264. Therefore, when the special electric winning devices 261, 262 are in the open state, players can expect to win both the special electric winning devices 261, 262 and the through gates 263, 264. This makes it possible to increase the excitement of the game when the special electric winning devices 261, 262 are in the open state.

Through gates 263, 264 are located at positions that allow game balls that have landed on guide boards 271, 272 positioned at the guide positions and that have flowed down the guide boards 271, 272 to a side other than the large prize openings 265, 266 to enter the gates. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game balls on the guide boards 271, 272, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Game balls that flow into the right area PA3 are guided to the right end of the guide plates 271, 272 by the guide nail groups 267, 268. In this case, the big prize openings 265, 266 and through gates 263, 264 are located on the left side of the guide plates 271, 272. This allows the player to focus their attention on the game balls flowing down the guide plates 271, 272.

The area of the guide plates 271, 272 that allows game balls to enter the through gates 263, 264 is located to the left of the large prize openings 265, 266, i.e., at the front of the guide plates 271, 272 in the direction of the game ball's downward flow. This makes it possible to turn the player's sense of disadvantage caused by a game ball landing on the guide plates 271, 272 not entering the large prize openings 265, 266 into a sense of advantage caused by the ball entering the through gates 263, 264.

The first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 are provided as the special electric winning devices 261, 262, and the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 are provided as the through gates 263, 264. A ball can enter the first through gate 263 by being guided by the first guide plate 271 of the first special electric winning device 261, and can enter the second through gate 264 by being guided by the second guide plate 272 of the second special electric winning device 262. In this case, by varying the type of special electric winning device 261, 262 that is the target of opening and closing control in the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to vary the proportion of game balls that enter the special electric winning devices 261, 262 and the through gates 263, 264.

The probability that a gaming ball placed on the first guide plate 271 will enter the first through gate 263 is different from the probability that a gaming ball placed on the second guide plate 272 will enter the second through gate 264. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the special electric winning devices 261, 262, which are the targets of opening and closing control.

For example, the types of special line winning devices 261, 262 that are the targets for executing opening and closing control in the opening and closing execution mode differ between a 2R low probability result and a 2R high probability result. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the type of game result that triggers the execution of the opening and closing execution mode.

The second through gate 264 is located downstream of the first through gate 263 in the direction in which the gaming ball flows. As a result, when the first special electric winning device 261 becomes the target of opening and closing control, not only can the gaming ball enter the first through gate 263, but the gaming ball can also enter the second through gate 264. Therefore, players who hope to obtain hold information from the regular side will expect the first special electric winning device 261 to become the target of opening and closing control.

When a gaming ball enters the first through gate 263 or when a gaming ball enters the second through gate 264, the same privilege of obtaining the reserved information on the regular side is granted. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage felt by the player regardless of whether the opening and closing control is executed on the first special electric winning device 261 or the second special electric winning device 262.

<Alternative to the fifteenth embodiment>
The type of the special winning device 261, 262 that is the target of the opening and closing control may be changed during one opening and closing execution mode. This makes it possible to change the ratio of the ball entry expectation rate between the large winning opening 265, 266 and the through gate 263, 264 during the opening and closing execution mode.

- The configuration is not limited to one in which a gaming ball that enters the first through gate 263 can enter the second through gate 264, but may be one in which a gaming ball that enters the first through gate 263 cannot enter the second through gate 264, and a gaming ball that enters the second through gate 264 cannot enter the first through gate 263.

- Although the configuration does not include any components that directly open or close the large prize openings 265, 266, a configuration in which components that directly open or close the large prize openings 265, 266 are provided may also be used. For example, the first guide plate 271 may be provided with a section that faces the first large prize opening 265 in close proximity to it so as to block it from the front when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the blocking position, and that is positioned so as not to obstruct the flow of game balls on the first guide plate 271 toward the first large prize opening 265 or the first through gate 263 when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the guide position. In this case, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the first large prize opening 265 when the first guide plate 271 is positioned in the blocking position.

<16th embodiment>
In the first embodiment, a through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32, and when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while a gaming ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214, the gaming ball can enter the through gate 35. However, in this embodiment, instead of a through gate 35 being provided below the special electric winning device 32, two special electric winning devices 32 are arranged side by side, one above the other. The following explains the different configuration. Note that explanations of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 84 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate 35 is located in the left area PA2 of the game area PA, and when comparing the left area PA2 with the same firing operation in which the game ball flows down, the frequency with which game balls enter the through gate 35 is constant regardless of the game state. Furthermore, when a firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second actuation port 34 is located. Therefore, when a firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, and further, if the second actuation port 34 is opened as a result of the game ball entering the through gate 35, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second actuation port 34.

In this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as support modes for controlling the state of the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34. In the low-frequency support mode, the normal power device 34a does not enter the open state or the frequency with which the normal power device 34a enters the open state is relatively low, while in the high-frequency support mode, the frequency with which the normal power device 34a enters the open state is relatively high. If a low-probability result is obtained, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low-frequency support mode, and if a high-probability result is obtained, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high-frequency support mode.

Two special electric winning devices 32 are arranged side by side, one above the other, in the right-side area PA3. Similar to the first embodiment, these special electric winning devices 32 are equipped with a passageway forming body 201, an opening/closing member 202, and a guide member 203. When the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, game balls cannot enter the fourth discharge passageway 45. Instead, game balls flow downward below the special electric winning device 32 by passing through an opening 213 (see Figure 30) formed in the opening/closing member 202. When the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, game balls can land on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, and game balls on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the fourth discharge passageway 45. In the following description, the upper special electric winning device 32 will be referred to as the first special electric winning device 291, and the lower special electric winning device 32 will be referred to as the second special electric winning device 292.

The first special electric winning device 291 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA above the second special electric winning device 292. In the right area PA3, a group of guide nails 241 is provided upstream of the first special electric winning device 291, as in the first embodiment above. As a result, game balls flowing down the right area PA3 are guided by the group of guide nails 241 to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the first special electric winning device 291. The game balls guided to the receiving portion 231 then reach the right end of the opening/closing member 202. In this case, when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is positioned in the open position and the first special electric winning device 291 is in an open state, game balls that have flowed into the right-hand area PA3 are essentially prevented from flowing downward below the first special electric winning device 291, and when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is positioned in the closed position and the first special electric winning device 291 is in a closed state, game balls that have flowed into the right-hand area PA3 are allowed to flow downward below the first special electric winning device 291.

The second special electric winning device 292 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA. A lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 in the right-side area PA3. The lower guide nail group 293 is formed by arranging multiple nails 24b downward to the right from the passage forming body 201 side of the first special electric winning device 291 to the right end side of the second special electric winning device 292 so as to guide game balls that flow below the first special electric winning device 291 to the right end side of the second special electric winning device 292. As a result, game balls that flow below the first special electric winning device 291 are guided by the lower guide nail group 293 to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the second special electric winning device 292. The game balls guided to the receiving portion 231 then reach the right end of the opening/closing member 202. In this case, when the opening/closing member 202 of the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open position and the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state, game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 are essentially prevented from flowing downward below the second special electric winning device 292, but when the opening/closing member 202 of the second special electric winning device 292 is in the closed position and the second special electric winning device 292 is in the closed state, game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 are allowed to flow downward below the second special electric winning device 292.

Figure 85 (a) is a flowchart showing the special line open setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The special line open setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special line start process (Figure 42) and in step S1810 of the special line closed process (Figure 44).

In the special line opening setting process, first, the opening setting process for the first special line winning device 291 is executed (step S4101). In this opening setting process, data is set so that the first special line winning device 291 is in an open state. Next, the opening setting process for the second special line winning device 292 is executed (step S4102). In this opening setting process, data is set so that the second special line winning device 292 is in an open state. As a result, the first special line winning device 291 and the second special line winning device 292 are in an open state simultaneously or approximately simultaneously. In other words, in this embodiment, both the first special line winning device 291 and the second special line winning device 292 are in an open state at the start of each round of play in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result, or at the start of each opening of the special line winning devices 291, 292 in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small jackpot result.

Figure 85 (b) is a flowchart showing the special line closure setting process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the special line closure setting process is executed in step S1704 of the special line open processing (Figure 43).

The special line closing setting process first executes the closing setting process for the first special line winning device 291 (step S4201). In this closing setting process, data is set so that the first special line winning device 291 is in a closed state. Next, the closing setting process for the second special line winning device 292 is executed (step S4202). In this closing setting process, data is set so that the second special line winning device 292 is in a closed state. As a result, the first special line winning device 291 and the second special line winning device 292 are closed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously. In other words, in this embodiment, both the first special line winning device 291 and the second special line winning device 292 are closed at the end of each round of play in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result, or at the end of each opening of the special line winning devices 291, 292 in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small jackpot result.

Incidentally, although an illustrated explanation will be omitted, in the special line open processing (Figure 43), if a gaming ball has won either the first special line winning device 291 or the second special line winning device 292, a positive judgment is made in step S1706. In this case, if a win occurs simultaneously in both the first special line winning device 291 and the second special line winning device 292, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 2 in step S1707, and if a win occurs in either one of them, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 in step S1707. Also, in the special line closed processing (Figure 44), if a small win result is obtained and a gaming ball has won either the first special line winning device 291 or the second special line winning device 292, a positive judgment is made in step S1801. In this case, if a win occurs simultaneously in both the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292, the value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 2 in step S1802; if a win occurs in either one of them, the value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802.

Next, we will explain how the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are opened and closed, with reference to the time chart in Figure 86. Figure 86(a) shows the period during which a round of play is being played, Figure 86(b) shows the period during which the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open state, Figure 86(c) shows the period during which the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state, and Figure 86(d) shows the estimated shortest period required for a game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric winning device 292.

As shown in Figure 86(a), rounds of play are played from timing t1 to timing t2, timing t3 to timing t5, and timing t6 to timing t8. In this case, as shown in Figures 86(b) and 86(c), both the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are simultaneously in the open state at timing t1, timing t3, and timing t6, respectively, and both the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are simultaneously in the closed state at timing t2, timing t5, and timing t8, respectively.

In this configuration, it is assumed that a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 at times t2 and t5 when the first special electric winning device 291 is closed. This game ball will fall downward without winning the first special electric winning device 291. In this case, the distance between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 is set so that the shortest period assumed to be required for a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric winning device 292 is longer than the interval period between the first and second openings of each special electric winning device 291, 292. As already explained, a lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292, and a gaming ball that flows below the first special electric winning device 291 reaches the position of the second special electric winning device 292 by descending the slope on the lower guide nail group 293 under its own weight. As a result, the time required for a gaming ball resting on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric winning device 292 is longer than if the gaming ball were to fall vertically.

With the above configuration, a gaming ball that falls from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 toward the second special electric winning device 292 at timing t2 will reach the second special electric winning device 292 at timing t4, which is later than timing t3 when the second special electric winning device 292 opens again, as shown in Figures 86(c) and 86(d). Furthermore, a gaming ball that falls from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 toward the second special electric winning device 292 at timing t5 will reach the second special electric winning device 292 at timing t7, which is later than timing t6 when the second special electric winning device 292 opens again, as shown in Figures 86(c) and 86(d).

When the first special electric winning device 291 is closed during each round of play, the maximum number of game balls on the guide plate section 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 is approximately two, which is less than the maximum number of winning balls. Therefore, the second special electric winning device 292 will not be closed before a game ball that has fallen from the first special electric winning device 291 wins in the second special electric winning device 292.

With the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are arranged vertically side by side in the right area PA3, there is a period during each opening in the opening and closing execution mode in which both the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are in an open state. As a result, a game ball that fails to enter the first special electric winning device 291, which is in an open state, can enter the second special electric winning device 292, which is also in an open state. Therefore, it is less likely that balls will miss entering the special electric winning devices 291 and 292 in the opening and closing execution mode.

The first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are provided so that a gaming ball that has reached the position of the first special electric winning device 291 but is unable to enter the first special electric winning device 291 at the end of each opening round can enter the second special electric winning device 292 in the next opening round. This means that a gaming ball that fails to enter the first special electric winning device 291 in a given opening round can enter the second special electric winning device 292 in the next opening round, making it less likely that a ball will fail to enter the special electric winning devices 291, 292 in the opening/closing execution mode.

In one opening/closing execution mode, the period from the end of a predetermined opening round to the start of the next opening round is set to a period shorter than the period required for a game ball to reach the position of the first special electric winning device 291 to the position of the second special electric winning device 292. This means that a game ball that fails to enter the first special electric winning device 291 during a predetermined opening round can enter the second special electric winning device 292 during the next opening round. Furthermore, a configuration that makes it less likely for such balls to fail to enter the game ball can be realized by adjusting the relative positions of the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292.

In the above configuration, when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open position, the inflow of game balls downstream of the opening/closing member 202 is blocked, and when the opening/closing member 202 of the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open position, the inflow of game balls downstream of the opening/closing member 202 is blocked. When each opening round begins, the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 simultaneously enter the open state, and when each opening round ends, the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 simultaneously enter the closed state. This makes it possible to reduce the number of game balls that are discharged to the outlet 24a without winning in the special electric winning devices 291 and 292 in the opening/closing execution mode.

The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are configured to open and close simultaneously. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while suppressing the increase in processing load required to control the opening and closing of these special electric prize winning devices 291, 292.

<Alternative to the 16th embodiment>
The first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are not limited to a configuration in which they simultaneously enter the open state at the start of each opening round, and may be configured so that the timing at which they enter the open state is slightly different but is substantially the same to the extent that it is difficult to distinguish them visually, or may be configured so that the timing at which they enter the open state is different to the extent that it is possible to distinguish them visually. In this configuration, in order to allow a game ball that has missed the first special electric winning device 291 to enter the second special electric winning device 292, it is preferable that the timing at which the second special electric winning device 292 enters the open state precedes the timing at which the first special electric winning device 291 enters the open state.

- The first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are not limited to a configuration in which they simultaneously close at the end of each opening round; they may be configured so that the timing at which they close is slightly different but is nearly identical to the extent that it is difficult to distinguish visually, or so that the timing at which they close is different enough to be distinguishable visually.

- When the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open state, the configuration may be such that game balls flowing down the right-hand area PA3 are reliably prevented from flowing downstream of the first special electric winning device 291. For example, the opening/closing member 202 may be a plate-shaped member without an opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, and when positioned in the closed position, the opening/closing member 202 is recessed behind the surface of the game board 24, and when positioned in the open position, the opening/closing member 202 is present between the surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. As a result, when the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open state, game balls flowing down the right-hand area PA3 will reliably win in the first special electric winning device 291, except for game balls that are on the opening/closing member 202 at the time the first special electric winning device 291 switches from the open state to the closed state.

In addition to or instead of this configuration, a configuration may be used in which, when the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state, game balls flowing down the right-side area PA3 are reliably prevented from flowing downstream of the second special electric winning device 292. For example, the opening/closing member 202 may be a plate-shaped member without an opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, and when positioned in the closed position, the opening/closing member 202 is recessed behind the surface of the game board 24, and when positioned in the open position, the opening/closing member 202 extends from the surface of the game board 24 to the window panel 52. As a result, when the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state, game balls flowing down the right-side area PA3 will reliably win in the second special electric winning device 292, except for game balls that are on the opening/closing member 202 when the second special electric winning device 292 switches from the open state to the closed state.

- The configuration is not limited to one in which a lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292, and the lower guide nail group 293 may not be provided. Even in this case, by setting the distance between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 so that the shortest period required for a gaming ball to reach the position of the second special electric winning device 292 from the position of the first special electric winning device 291 is longer than the interval period between each opening of the special electric winning devices 291 and 292, it is possible for a gaming ball that has missed the first special electric winning device 291 to enter the second special electric winning device 292.

Seventeenth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for ensuring that all game balls flowing down the right area PA3 in the open/close execution mode win the special winning device is different from the sixteenth embodiment. The following explains the different configuration. Note that the description of the same configuration as the sixteenth embodiment will be omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, there is no small win result.

Figure 87 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game board 24 to explain the configuration of the special line winning devices 301, 302 in this embodiment.

A first special electric winning device 301 and a second special electric winning device 302 are arranged side by side, one above the other, in the right-hand area PA3 of the game board 24. Each special electric winning device 301, 302 is equipped with a large winning opening 301a, 302a through which game balls can enter, as well as an opening/closing door 301b, 302b that opens and closes the large winning opening 301a, 302a. The opening/closing doors 301b, 302b can be switched between an open position and a closed position by being driven by special electric drive units 301c, 302c. When the opening/closing doors 301b, 302b are in the closed position, game balls cannot enter the large winning openings 301a, 302a. When the opening/closing doors 301b, 302b are in the open position, game balls can enter the large winning openings 301a, 302a. Game balls that enter the large prize openings 301a and 302a are detected by detection sensors 301d and 302d. In this embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment, at the start of a round of play, both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously in the open state, and at the end of the round of play, both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously in the closed state.

In this embodiment, although not shown, an area upstream of the first special electric winning device 301 is set in the right-hand area PA3 so that when the first special electric winning device 301 is in an open state, a gaming ball flowing into the right-hand area PA3 will reliably win in the first special electric winning device 301. Furthermore, when the second special electric winning device 302 is in an open state at that time, an area between the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 is set in the right-hand area PA3 so that a gaming ball flowing below the first special electric winning device 301 will reliably win in the second special electric winning device 302.

A flow-down prevention member 303 is provided between the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 in the right-side area PA3. The flow-down prevention member 303 is driven by a prevention drive unit 304 and is movable between a retracted position where it does not protrude forward from the surface of the game board 24 and a blocking position where it protrudes forward from the surface of the game board 24. When the flow-down prevention member 303 is positioned in the retracted position, game balls that have flowed below the first special electric winning device 301 will flow down toward the second special electric winning device 302 without being obstructed by the flow-down prevention member 303. On the other hand, when the flow-down prevention member 303 is positioned in the blocking position, all game balls that have flowed below the first special electric winning device 301 will rest on the top surface of the flow-down prevention member 303 and will be prevented from flowing down toward the second special electric winning device 302.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the flow-down prevention control process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the flow-down prevention control process is repeatedly executed in the opening/closing execution mode.

If the current round of play is a different round of play from the final round of play (step S4301: YES) and the blocking start period (specifically, 2 seconds) has passed since the start of the current round of play (step S4302: YES), a drive control process for blocking start is executed (step S4303). This moves the flow-down blocking member 303 from the retracted position to the blocking position. Note that the blocking start period is set to a period shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning balls for each round of play (specifically, 10 balls), so the round of play will not end before the blocking start period has passed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4301, if a negative judgment is made in step S4302, or if the processing of step S4303 is executed, it is determined whether the blocking end period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the start timing of the round of play (step S4304). If a positive judgment is made in step S4304, a drive control process for blocking end is executed (step S4305). As a result, the flow-down blocking member 303 is moved from the blocking position to the retracted position. Note that the blocking end period is set to a period shorter than the blocking start period.

Next, we will explain the relationship between the open/closed state of each special electric winning device 301, 302 and the operating position of the flow-down prevention member 303. Figure 89 is a time chart to explain this relationship. Figure 89(a) shows the period during which a round of play is performed, Figure 89(b) shows the period during which the first special electric winning device 301 is in the open state, Figure 89(c) shows the period during which the second special electric winning device 302 is in the open state, and Figure 89(d) shows the period during which the flow-down prevention member 303 is positioned in the blocking position. Figures 90(a) to 90(c) are explanatory diagrams to explain the relationship between the open/closed state of each special electric winning device 301, 302 and the operating position of the flow-down prevention member 303. Note that we will explain the case of the open/close execution mode in which three rounds of play occur.

As shown in Figure 89(a), the first round of play is played at timing t1. At timing t1, as shown in Figures 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric prize-winning device 301 and the second special electric prize-winning device 302 simultaneously enter the open state. In this case, as shown in Figure 90(c), both the first special electric prize-winning device 301 and the second special electric prize-winning device 302 are in the open state, and the downflow prevention member 303 is positioned in the retracted position.

At time t2, which is the time when the blocking start period has elapsed since time t1, when the first round of play began, the flow-down blocking member 303 is moved from the retracted position to the blocking position, as shown in Figure 89 (d). In this case, as shown in Figure 90 (a), both the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow-down blocking member 303 is positioned in the blocking position.

Then, at timing t3, the first round of play ends as shown in Figure 89(a). At timing t3, as shown in Figures 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 simultaneously enter a closed state. However, even in this situation, the flow-down prevention member 303 remains in the blocking position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 90(b), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in a closed state, and the flow-down prevention member 303 is in the blocking position. As a result, game balls that passed in front of the first special electric prize winning device 301 at the timing when the first special electric prize winning device 301 enters a closed state, or game balls that passed in front of the first special electric prize winning device 301 during the interval period, rest on the top surface of the flow-down prevention member 303 and are prevented from flowing further down.

Then, at timing t4, the next round of play begins as shown in Figure 89(a), and at timing t4, the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 simultaneously enter the open state as shown in Figures 89(b) and 89(c). In this case, as shown in Figure 90(a), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow-down prevention member 303 is positioned in the blocking position.

After that, as the blocking end period elapses after the start of the round play at timing t5, the flow blocking member 303 is moved from the blocking position to the retracted position as shown in Figure 89 (d). In this case, as shown in Figure 90 (c), both the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow blocking member 303 is positioned in the retracted position. As a result, the game balls on the top surface of the flow blocking member 303 begin to flow downward, and all of these game balls win the second special electric winning device 302.

After that, the same operations as those from t2 to t5 are repeated from time t6 to time t9. Then, at time t10, the final round of play ends as shown in Figure 89(a). In this case, as shown in Figures 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. Also, as shown in Figure 89(d), the flow-down prevention member 303 is placed in the retracted position.

According to the embodiment described above in detail, even if a ball leaks into the first special electric winning device 301, the leaked game ball will be prevented from flowing downstream by the flow-down prevention member 303. Then, when the second special electric winning device 302 is in an open state, the blockage by the flow-down prevention member 303 is released, and the game ball that was prevented from flowing downstream by the flow-down prevention member 303 will enter the second special electric winning device 302. Therefore, it is possible to prevent balls from leaking into the special electric winning devices 301, 302 in the open/close execution mode.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the location where the combination of the special winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is located is different from the first embodiment. Also, the entry point that serves as the opportunity to acquire reserved information on the regular side is located outside the through gate 35. Below, we will explain the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the explanation of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 91 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 was provided in the right area PA3 of the play area PA. In this embodiment, the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided in the left area PA2 of the play area PA. The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the same as in the first embodiment, except that the left-right positional relationship is reversed. In other words, the special electric prize winning device 32 extends from the left end of the left area PA2 to the left end of the center frame 36a at a midpoint in the vertical direction of the left area PA2. The passage forming body 201 in which the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed is provided in the left frame portion 36d of the center frame 36a, and the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 is located at the left end of the left area PA2. The upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 slopes downward toward the right. Game balls flowing down the left area PA2 will reach the area where the special electric winning device 32 is installed, except for game balls that enter the warp passage entrance 36e.

In the left-side area PA2, a group of guide nails 241 is formed by arranging multiple nails 24b above the special electric winning device 32. The group of guide nails 241 guides game balls that flow into the left-side area PA2 and do not enter the warp passage entrance 36e to the receiving section 231. As a result, game balls that flow down the left-side area PA2 and reach the special electric winning device 32 are first guided to the receiving section 231 and then reach the left end of the opening/closing member 202. When the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, the game ball can enter the fourth discharge passage section 45 by descending to the right along the upper surface of the guide plate section 214 of the opening/closing member 202. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, the game ball flows down below the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 (see Figure 30). Furthermore, if the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position while a gaming ball is resting on the guide plate portion 214, the gaming ball will flow down from its resting position below the opening/closing member 202.

In the left-side area PA2, a through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32 and near the center frame 36a. Furthermore, a group of restricting nails 242 is provided between the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 to guide game balls that are present in a predetermined range to the right on the guide plate section 214 to the through gate 35. As a result, if the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position while a game ball is present in a predetermined range to the right on the guide plate section 214, the game ball will enter the through gate 35. When a game ball enters the through gate 35, regular game ball pending information is acquired, provided that the maximum number of regular game ball pending information is not stored in the regular game ball pending area 65c, as in the first embodiment described above.

In this embodiment, in addition to the through gate 35, a surprise gate 311 is also provided as an entry point that serves as an opportunity to obtain regular ball reserve information. The surprise gate 311 is located above the guide nail group 241 in the left area PA2. When a winning ball enters the surprise gate 311, the regular ball reserve information is obtained, provided that the maximum number of regular ball reserve information items is not stored in the regular ball reserve area 65c, just as in the case of a winning ball entering the through gate 35. Note that the surprise gate 311, like the through gate 35, has a through gate that runs vertically through it, allowing winning balls to continue flowing down the play area PA. However, this is not limited to this, and winning balls that enter the surprise gate 311 may also be discharged to the back side of the game board 24.

Here, a limiting pin 312 is provided upstream of the emergency gate 311 to make it more difficult for a ball to enter the emergency gate 311. By providing the limiting pin 312, the probability that a gaming ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will enter the emergency gate 311 is lower than the probability that a gaming ball supplied to the lower area PA4 will enter the first operating port 33. Furthermore, the probability that a gaming ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will enter the emergency gate 311 is lower than the probability that a gaming ball flowing down below the special electric winning device 32 in the left side area PA2 will enter the general winning port 31. Furthermore, the probability that a gaming ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will enter the emergency gate 311 is lower than the probability that a gaming ball will enter the special electric winning device 32 when the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state, and is also lower than the probability that a gaming ball will enter the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, the probability that a gaming ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will enter the emergency gate 311 is lower than the probability that a gaming ball will enter the second operating port 34 when the second operating port 34 is in an open state. For example, when 1,000 gaming balls flow into the left side area PA2, the probability that one gaming ball will enter the emergency gate 311 is .

Incidentally, in this embodiment, when regular side hold information is acquired, the regular side hold information triggers a regular power open state. In other words, when a win occurs at the through gate 35 or the emergency gate 311 and regular side hold information is acquired, the second operating port 34 is reliably opened afterwards. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of acquiring regular side hold information.

Even in a configuration in which the special electric winning device 32, through gate 35, and sudden gate 311 are provided in the left area PA2 as described above, game balls flowing down the left area PA2 will flow into the lower area PA4 provided they do not win the special electric winning device 32. Game balls that flow into the lower area PA4 can reach a position where they can win the first operating port 33, and can also reach a position where they can win the second operating port 34 if the second operating port 34 is open. They can also reach a position where they can win the general winning port 31. This makes it possible to aim for a win at all of the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, through gate 35, and sudden gate 311 by continuing to launch game balls so that they flow down the left area PA2.

On the other hand, the right-side area PA3 has nails 24b but no ball entry area. Furthermore, game balls that flow down the right-side area PA3 flow into the lower area PA4, and can reach a position where they can enter the first actuation port 33. If the second actuation port 34 is open, they can also reach a position where they can enter the second actuation port 34. In this case, since there is no ball entry area in the right-side area PA3 as described above, a game ball is more likely to enter the open second actuation port 34 when a game ball is fired down the right-side area PA3 than when a game ball is fired down the left-side area PA2. Therefore, for example, if a game ball enters the emergency gate 311 and the second actuation port 34 suddenly opens, firing the game ball down the right-side area PA3 can make it easier for the game ball to enter the second actuation port 34.

Figure 92 is a flowchart showing the process for acquiring reserved information on the normal side, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the process for acquiring reserved information on the normal side is executed in step S1101 of the normal side normal power control process (Figure 37).

If a win has occurred in the through gate 35 (step S4401: YES) and the number of reserved information on the regular map side stored in the regular map reserve area 65c is less than the upper limit of storage capacity (step S4402: YES), the value of the regular map reserve counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 to allow the main CPU 63 to grasp the number of unprocessed reserved information on the regular map side stored in the regular map reserve area 65c (step S4403). Incidentally, the display content of the regular map reserve display section 38b in the regular map unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the regular map reserve counter. As a result, the display content of the regular map reserve display section 38b corresponds to the number of reserved information on the regular map side stored in the regular map reserve area 65c. The value of the regular random number counter C4 is then stored in the first storage area of the regular map reserve area 65c, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the reserved information count incremented by 1 in step S4403 (step S4404).

Then, a regular map hold command is sent to the audio and light control device 81 (step S4405). When the audio and light control device 81 receives the regular map hold command, it sends a corresponding command to the display control device 82. The pattern display device 41 displays an image to notify the number of reserved information items on the regular map side stored in the regular map hold area 65c, and when the display control device 82 receives a command corresponding to the regular map hold command, it updates the content of the image display to correspond to the number of reserved information items on the regular map side having increased by one. Note that when the display of a changing pattern in the regular map display unit 38a is started in response to the reserved information on the regular map side, the content of the image display is updated to correspond to the number of reserved information items on the regular map side having decreased by one.

The display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram in Figure 93(a). The display surface of the pattern display device 41 has a first pending display area 313 for indicating the number of first pending information stored in the first special symbol holding area 85, and a second pending display area 314 for indicating the number of second pending information stored in the second special symbol holding area 86, set at its lower edge. The first pending display area 313 has horizontally arranged unit display areas equal in number to the number of first pending information that can be stored in the first special symbol holding area 85, and as the number of first pending information increases, pending images 315 are displayed in order from the left unit display area, and as the number of first pending information decreases, pending images 315 are erased in order from the right unit display area. In addition, the second pending display area 314 has unit display areas arranged horizontally in the same number as the number of second pending information that can be stored in the second special chart pending area 86, and as the number of second pending information increases, pending images 315 are displayed in order from the unit display area on the left, and as the number of second pending information decreases, pending images 315 are erased in order from the unit display area on the right. By setting the first pending display area 313, the number of first pending information can be clearly grasped through the display content of the pattern display device 41, and by setting the second pending display area 314, the number of second pending information can be clearly grasped through the display content of the pattern display device 41.

A general map pending display area 316 is set in the upper left corner of the display surface of the pattern display device 41 to notify the number of pending general map information stored in the general map pending area 65c. The general map pending display area 316 has the same number of unit display areas arranged horizontally as the number of pending general map information that can be stored in the general map pending area 65c, and as the number of pending general map information increases, pending images 315 are displayed in order from the unit display area on the left, and as the number of pending general map information decreases, pending images 315 are erased in order from the unit display area on the right. By setting the general map pending display area 316, the number of pending general map information can be clearly grasped from the display content of the pattern display device 41.

When the display control device 82 receives a command corresponding to the regular map hold command, it increases the number of hold images 315 displayed in the regular map hold display area 316 by one. Furthermore, when the display control device 82 receives a command sent from the audio and light control device 81 based on a command sent from the main CPU 63 to the audio and light control device 81 indicating that the display of changing images in the regular map display unit 38a has begun, it decreases the number of hold images 315 displayed in the regular map hold display area 316 by one.

Returning to the explanation of the process for obtaining reserved information on the regular map side (Figure 92), if a negative judgment is made in step S4401, if a negative judgment is made in step S4402, or if the process of step S4405 is executed, a win has occurred at the emergency gate 311 (step S4406: YES), and further provided that the number of reserved information on the regular map side stored in the regular map reserve area 65c is less than the upper limit memory number (step S4407: YES), the value of the regular map reserve counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S4408). As already explained, the display content of the regular map reserve display section 38b in the regular map unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the regular map reserve counter. Thereafter, the value of the regular random number counter C4 is stored in the first memory area in the regular map reserve area 65c, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step S4408 (step S4409).

After that, if the current mode is the opening/closing execution mode (step S4410: YES), or if the value of the normal map hold counter in the main RAM 65 is 2 or greater even though the mode is not the opening/closing execution mode, i.e., if two or more pieces of normal map hold information are stored in the normal map hold area 65c (step S4410 and step S4411: NO), a normal map hold command is sent to the audio and light control device 81 (step S4412). In this case, the processing content of the audio and light control device 81 and display control device 82 is the same as when the normal map hold command was sent in step S4405.

On the other hand, if the current mode is not the open/close execution mode (step S4410: NO), and the value of the normal map hold counter in the main RAM 65 is "1," i.e., if only one normal map hold information is stored in the normal map hold area 65c (step S4411: YES), a sudden hold command is sent to the audio and light control device 81 (step S4413). When the audio and light control device 81 receives a sudden hold command, it sends a corresponding command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives this command, it updates the display content of the normal map hold display area 316, just as when it receives a command corresponding to the normal map hold command. Furthermore, when the display control device 82 receives a command corresponding to a sudden command, it displays a special notification image 317 on the display surface of the pattern display device 41 as a special notification, encouraging the user to perform a firing operation aimed at winning a prize in the second operating port 34, as shown in the explanatory diagram of Figure 93(b). When the special notification image 317 is displayed, the player will perform a firing operation aimed at winning the second actuation port 34, which can trigger the acquisition of second pending information.

When the time comes to display the special notification image 317 while the symbol display device 41 is displaying a game-round effect, the display control device 82 sets a reduced display area 318 in the upper right corner of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and continues to display the game-round effect in a reduced size in the reduced display area 318. This makes it possible to display the special notification image 317 at a specified size, even if a sudden hold command is sent from the main CPU 63 while a game-round effect is being displayed, making it easier for the player to recognize the special notification image 317.

Next, we will explain how the reserved information on the regular side is acquired, with reference to the time chart in Figure 94. Figure 94(a) shows the execution period of the open/close execution mode, Figure 94(b) shows the period during which the special line winning device 32 is in the open state, Figure 94(c) shows the timing of when a prize is won at the through gate 35, Figure 94(d) shows the timing of when a prize is won at the emergency gate 311, and Figure 94(e) shows the timing when the reserved information on the regular side is acquired.

At timing t1, when the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, a winning entry into the emergency gate 311 occurs, as shown in Figure 94(d). As a result, at timing t1, reserved information on the normal gate side is acquired, as shown in Figure 94(e). This reserved information on the normal gate side triggers the second operating port 34 to open, and the second reserved information acquired based on a winning entry into this open second operating port 34 becomes the start of a game round, and when that game round ends, the opening/closing execution mode is executed from timing t2 to timing t9, as shown in Figure 94(a), triggered by the second small win result. Here, in this embodiment, if a second small win result is achieved, the number of times the special power winning device 32 is opened is set to two.

In this opening/closing execution mode, the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state from timing t3 to timing t4 and timing t6 to timing t7, as shown in Figure 94(b). In this case, at timings t4 and t7, with a game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 94(c), a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs at timings t5 and t8, and at timings t5 and t8, hold information on the normal ball side is acquired as shown in Figure 94(e). This again triggers the second operating port 34 to be in an open state, and a winning entry into the open second operating port 34 occurs, acquiring second hold information, and again triggering the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second small win result from timings t10 to t16, as shown in Figure 94(a).

In this opening/closing execution mode, the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state from timing t11 to timing t12 and timing t13 to timing t14, as shown in Figure 94(b). At timing t14, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with a game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214. Therefore, at timing t15, as shown in Figure 94(c), a winning entry occurs in the through gate 35, and at timing t15, hold information on the regular ball side is acquired, as shown in Figure 94(e). This triggers the second operating port 34 to open again, and a winning entry occurs in the open second operating port 34, resulting in the acquisition of second hold information, thereby triggering the opening/closing execution mode.

The present embodiment described above provides the following advantages in addition to the advantages of the first embodiment.

Even when not in the open/close execution mode, if a game ball enters the emergency gate 311, the normal side's reserved information is acquired and the second operating port 34 can be opened. Then, when a game ball enters the second operating port 34 that is now open, the system transitions to the open/close execution mode. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the open/close execution mode is triggered not only in the open/close execution mode but also in the open/close execution mode when a game ball enters the second operating port 34.

A limit pin 312 is provided upstream of the sudden gate 311 so that the probability of a game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of a game ball entering the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode. This makes it possible to reduce the probability that the open/close execution mode will occur due to a game ball entering the sudden gate 311 when the game is not in the open/close execution mode. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction when a transition to the open/close execution mode occurs due to a game ball entering the sudden gate 311 when the game is not in the open/close execution mode.

In addition, a limit pin 312 is provided so that the probability of a game ball entering the emergency gate 311 is lower than the probability of a game ball entering the first operating port 33. This also makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction when a transition to the open/close execution mode occurs based on a game ball entering the emergency gate 311 when the mode is not currently in the open/close execution mode.

When a game ball enters the emergency gate 311 and the reserved information on the regular side is acquired, causing the second operating port 34 to open, a corresponding special notification image 317 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This makes it less likely that even if a game ball enters the emergency gate 311 and the second operating port 34 opens, the player will not notice this and lose the opportunity to have the game ball enter the second operating port 34.

In the open/close execution mode, game balls can enter the through gate 35, so the player is likely to be aware of the second operating port 34 being open. However, when the open/close execution mode is not active, game balls do not enter the through gate 35, so the player may be less aware of the second operating port 34 being open. In this case, when the open/close execution mode is not active and a game ball enters the emergency gate 311 and reserved information on the normal side is obtained, the special notification image 317 is displayed, thereby drawing the player's attention to the second operating port 34 being open in this situation. Furthermore, by not displaying the special notification image 317 in the open/close execution mode, when the player is likely to be aware of the second operating port 34 being open, the display of the special notification image 317 can be prevented from becoming a nuisance to the player.

When regular side hold information has not been acquired, and regular side hold information is acquired based on a game ball entering the emergency gate 311, the special notification image 317 is displayed. This makes it possible to display the special notification image 317 in situations where the player is not very aware that the second operating port 34 will be in an open state.

The special electric winning device 32, through gate 35, and sudden gate 311 are located in the area where game balls flowing down the left area PA2 or game balls that have flowed down can enter. This makes it possible to aim for a win in the special electric winning device 32, through gate 35, and sudden gate 311 by using the same firing operation.

Game balls flowing down the right area PA3 are more likely to reach the position of the second actuation port 34 than game balls flowing down the left area PA2. As a result, when the second actuation port 34 is open and the opening/closing execution mode is not active, the game ball can be launched so that it flows down the right area PA3, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second actuation port 34.

<Alternative to the 18th embodiment>
The combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 and the sudden gate 311 may be configured so that if one prize is won, the other prize cannot be won. For example, the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 may be provided in the left area PA2 and the sudden gate 311 may be provided in the right area PA3, or the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 may be provided in the right area PA3 and the sudden gate 311 may be provided in the left area PA2.

- A normal power release lottery process may be executed on the reserved information on the normal power side in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and if the normal power release state is selected, the normal power release state is entered and the second operating port 34 is opened. In this case, a situation may arise in which the second operating port 34 does not enter the open state even if a gaming ball enters the emergency gate 311. In this configuration, the reserved information on the normal power side acquired based on a gaming ball entering the through gate 35 and the reserved information on the normal power side acquired based on a gaming ball entering the emergency gate 311 may be treated separately, and the former reserved information on the normal power side and the latter reserved information on the normal power side may be configured to have different probabilities of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery process.

For example, the normal power release lottery process may be configured so that the reserved information on the normal power side acquired based on a gaming ball entering the emergency gate 311 is more likely to result in a normal power release state win than the reserved information on the normal power side acquired based on a gaming ball entering the through gate 35. This can increase the player's sense of satisfaction when a gaming ball enters the emergency gate 311.

On the other hand, the normal power release lottery process may be configured so that the reserved information on the normal power side acquired based on a gaming ball entering the emergency gate 311 is less likely to result in a normal power release state than the reserved information on the normal power side acquired based on a gaming ball entering the through gate 35. In this case, since the probability of a normal power release state occurring when a gaming ball enters the emergency gate 311 is lower, there is no need to lower the probability of a gaming ball entering the emergency gate 311.

- The normal side reserved information acquired based on a gaming ball entering the through gate 35 and the normal side reserved information acquired based on a gaming ball entering the emergency gate 311 may be treated separately, and one of these reserved information may cause the second operating port 34 to enter the normal power open state without the normal power release lottery process being executed, while the other may cause the second operating port 34 to enter the normal power open state by winning the normal power release lottery process. For example, the normal side reserved information acquired based on a gaming ball entering the emergency gate 311 may cause the second operating port 34 to enter the normal power open state without the normal power release lottery process being executed, and the normal side reserved information acquired based on a gaming ball entering the through gate 35 may cause the second operating port 34 to enter the normal power open state by winning the normal power release lottery process. This may increase the player's satisfaction at a gaming ball entering the emergency gate 311.

- The probability of a ball scoring through the emergency gate 311 is not limited to being lower than the probability of a ball scoring through the general winning opening 31, the probability of a ball scoring through the special electric winning device 32 in the open state, the probability of a ball scoring through the first operating opening 33, the probability of a ball scoring through the second operating opening 34, and the probability of a ball scoring through the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode. For example, the emergency gate 311 may be configured to have a higher probability of a ball scoring than the general winning opening 31. The emergency gate 311 may also be configured to have a higher probability of a ball scoring than the first operating opening 33.

- A second emergency operation port may be provided instead of the emergency gate 311. In this case, by not providing the second emergency operation port with an opening/closing member that blocks or allows a game ball to enter the second emergency operation port, the probability of a game ball entering the second emergency operation port does not change depending on the game status, and when a game ball enters the second emergency operation port, second pending information is acquired in the same way as when a game ball enters the second operation port 34. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode suddenly occurs when a game ball enters the second emergency operation port.

Furthermore, in this configuration, the average display period of fluctuations in the number of game plays triggered by the second hold information acquired based on a game ball entering the second actuation port for sudden action may be shorter than the average display period of fluctuations in the number of game plays triggered by the second hold information acquired based on a game ball entering the second actuation port 34. This makes it possible to shorten the time required from when a game ball enters the second actuation port for sudden action until the opening/closing execution mode is initiated.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, a special electric prize winning device 321 is provided instead of the special electric prize winning device 32. The following describes the different configuration. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 95 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In place of the special electric winning device 32, a special electric winning device 321 is provided in the right-hand area PA3 of the gaming area PA. The special electric winning device 321 is provided midway along the vertical direction of the right-hand area PA3, spanning the entire horizontal direction. Therefore, gaming balls flowing down the right-hand area PA3 will reliably pass through the area where the special electric winning device 321 is provided. In addition, a through gate 35 is provided in the right-hand area PA3 below the special electric winning device 321 and near the variable display unit 36.

The configuration of the special telephone winning device 321 will be explained with reference to Figures 96(a) and 96(b). Figures 96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views taken along line A-A in Figure 95.

A special prize opening 322 is formed in the game board 24, penetrating the game board 24 in the front-to-rear direction. The special prize opening 322 is located in the right area PA3, closer to the variable display unit 36. A special prize opening device 321 is provided to block or allow game balls to enter the special prize opening 322. The special prize opening device 321 includes a guide plate 323 that is provided below the special prize opening 322 and penetrates the game board 24 in the front-to-rear direction. The guide plate 323 is driven by a drive means (not shown) and is movable in the front-to-rear direction, moving between a blocking position where the amount of protrusion of the game board 24 from the surface toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is minimal, and a guide position where it slides further forward than the blocking position and where the amount of protrusion of the game board 24 from the surface toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is maximized.

A ball receiving section 324 is provided above the right end of the guide plate 323 on the game board 24. Furthermore, in the right-side area PA3, a group of guide nails 241 is provided above the special electric winning device 321 to guide all game balls that flow from the upper area PA1 to the right-side area PA3 to the ball receiving section 324 (see Figure 95). The group of guide nails 241 is formed by arranging multiple nails 24b at a downward slope to the right. All game balls that flow into the right-side area PA3 are guided to the ball receiving section 324 by the group of guide nails 241. The distance between the front end of the ball receiving section 324 and the window panel 52 is set to a dimension greater than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, the top surface of the ball receiving section 324 slopes downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, game balls that reach the top surface of the ball receiving section 324 will flow downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 due to their own weight.

When the guide plate 323 is positioned in the blocking position, as shown in Figure 96 (a), the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is greater than the diameter of the game ball. In this blocking position, the front end of the guide plate 323 is located further rearward of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the ball receiving portion 324. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the blocking position, a game ball that reaches the top surface of the ball receiving portion 324 will generally fall below the ball receiving portion 324 through the space between the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52. Furthermore, when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the blocking position, the forward protrusion of the guide plate 323 from the surface of the game board 24 is less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, even if a game ball guided by the guide nail group 241 bounces off the ball receiving portion 324 and heads toward the guide plate 323 positioned in the blocking position, it will fall below the guide plate 323 through the space between the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 without landing on the guide plate 323. With the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the blocking position, a win at the large prize opening 322 is blocked. Furthermore, as described above, the through gate 35 is located closer to the variable display unit 36, and is positioned to the left of the ball receiving section 324 so that game balls that bounce off the ball receiving section 324 have difficulty reaching it. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the blocking position, a win at the through gate 35 is also blocked.

When the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position, as shown in Figure 96 (b), the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the gaming ball. In this guide position, the front end of the guide plate 323 is located further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the ball receiving section 324. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position, a gaming ball that reaches the top surface of the ball receiving section 324 will land on the top surface of the guide plate 323 in an area that protrudes further forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the surface of the gaming board 24.

Two partition walls 326, 327 are provided laterally midway on the upper surface of the protruding region 325 of the guide plate 323, which protrudes further forward than the surface of the game board 24 when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position. Of these partition walls 326, 327, the first partition wall 326 located on the right side extends from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position, the rear end of the first partition wall 326 is spaced apart from the surface of the game board 24 by a distance greater than the diameter of a game ball. Furthermore, the second partition wall 327 located on the left side extends from the surface of the game board 24 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position. However, the front end of the second partition wall 327 is located further rearward than the front end of the guide plate 323 by a distance greater than the diameter of a game ball. In this configuration in which the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 are formed, the upper surface of the protruding area 325 slopes downward toward the left overall. Furthermore, the upper surface of the protruding area 325 slopes downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 from the left of the ball receiving portion 324 to the position of the first partition wall 326, slopes downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 from the position of the first partition wall 326 to the position of the second partition wall 327, and slopes downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 from the position of the second partition wall 327 to the position of the big winning opening 322. In other words, the upper surface of the protruding area 325 is sloped so that when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position, a game ball placed on the upper surface of the protruding area 325 flows downward toward the left, meandering in the front-to-back direction, passing through the space between the first partition wall 326 and the surface of the game board 24 and the space between the second partition wall 327 and the front end of the guide plate 323.

When the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position, the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball, so the window panel 52 prevents a game ball resting on the upper surface of the protruding area 325 from falling downward from the front end of the guide plate 323 when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position. Furthermore, the left end of the guide plate 323 faces the center frame 36a of the variable display unit 36 in a position close to the guide plate 323, and the distance between the left end of the guide plate 323 and the center frame 36a is less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position, the center frame 36a prevents a game ball resting on the upper surface of the protruding area 325 from falling downward from the left end of the guide plate 323.

With the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the guide position, the gaming ball flows down the protruding area 325 by its own weight along the serpentine path above the protruding area 325, resulting in the gaming ball entering the large prize opening 322. A gaming ball that enters the large prize opening 322 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) that is provided corresponding to the large prize opening 322. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a prize has been entered into the large prize opening 322 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a round game or a small win result in which the large prize opening 322 is to be opened, if it is determined that one gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 322, the value of the prize counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. When the value of the winning counter reaches "0," it is determined that the maximum number of winnings has been reached, as in the first embodiment, and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the round play or small win result is ended.

When a gaming ball is placed on the guide plate 323 positioned in the guide position and the maximum number of gaming balls enters the large prize slot 322, the guide plate 323 moves from the guide position to the blocking position with the gaming ball still on it. In this case, the gaming ball on the guide plate 323 moves toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in response to the movement of the guide plate 323 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and then abuts against the surface of the gaming board 24 from the front, preventing further backward movement, and finally the guide plate 323 no longer catches the gaming ball from below, causing it to fall downward.

As already explained, a through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 321, and its horizontal position is the same as the area between the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323. Furthermore, between the special electric winning device 321 and the through gate 35, a group of restricting nails 242 is provided to guide a falling game ball toward the through gate 35 so that if a game ball resting in the inter-compartment area Y between the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 falls as the guide plate 323 moves from the allowable position to the blocking position, the game ball will enter the through gate 35 (see Figure 95). As a result, if the guide plate 323 moves from the allowable position to the blocking position while a game ball is resting in the inter-compartment area Y, the game ball will enter the through gate 35. Incidentally, the inter-compartment area Y is spaced to the left of the ball receiving portion 324 by a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball, more specifically, by a dimension larger than three times the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is positioned in the blocking position, a gaming ball that reaches the ball receiving section 324 is prevented from entering the through gate 35.

A gaming ball that enters a through gate 35 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) that is provided corresponding to that through gate 35. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a gaming ball has entered the through gate 35 based on the detection result of that detection sensor. Then, when it is determined that one gaming ball has entered the through gate 35, the numerical information of the normal random number counter C4 is stored in the normal map holding area 65c as normal map holding information, provided that the upper limit number of normal map holding information is not stored in the normal map holding area 65c.

Here, when game balls are launched at the shortest launch cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) using the same launch mode that causes the game balls to flow down the right-side area PA3, the position of the inter-compartment area Y is set so that there is a high probability that the next game ball to be launched after the game ball that entered the large prize opening 322 is present in the inter-compartment area Y when the guide board 323 is positioned in the guide position. As a result, when a game ball is placed on the guide board 323 positioned in the guide position and the maximum number of game balls enters the large prize opening 322, the game ball that was on the guide board 323 is more likely to enter the through gate 35.

In addition, a serpentine passageway is formed in the protruding area 325 of the guide plate 323, which not only extends horizontally but also snakes back and forth, and an inter-compartment area Y is set in this serpentine passageway at a position upstream of the large prize opening 322. This makes it possible to set an inter-compartment area Y that makes it easier for a prize to be won through the through gate 35, while preventing the lateral dimension of the guide plate 323 from increasing.

<Alternative to the 19th embodiment>
The combination of the special line winning device 32 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment and the combination of the special line winning device 321 and the through gate 35 in the nineteenth embodiment may both be provided, and the type of the special line winning device 32, 321 that is the target of the opening and closing control may be changed depending on the type of game result that triggers the execution of the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, if the special line winning device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment is the target of the opening and closing control, it is more likely that a win will occur at the through gate 35 than if the special line winning device 32 in the first embodiment is the target of the opening and closing control, so the player will expect the special line winning device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment to be the target of the opening and closing control.

<Other Embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The following alternative configurations may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the above embodiments, the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 are all configured to store history information (or ball entry history), but this is not limited to this. Only some of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 may be configured to store history information. For example, only the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, and second operating opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. Even in this case, it is possible to understand the ball entry patterns of game balls over a specified period for the ball entry sections for which history information is stored.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, signal paths 118a-118c are set up to transmit information corresponding to the game ball's entry results, corresponding to the first entry port detection sensor 42a, the second entry port detection sensor 43a, and the third entry port detection sensor 44a, respectively. However, this is not limited to this, and information corresponding to the entry results for the same type of entry port may be transmitted as a single type of information, even in a configuration in which there are multiple entry ports of the same type and multiple entry port detection sensors corresponding to them. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(3) In the first embodiment and other embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, this is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be pre-stored in the management IC 66. In this case, there is no need to execute processing to cause the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, which reduces the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(4) In the first embodiment and other embodiments, the transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a-122o to the management IC 66 is performed from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be capable of two-way communication, and the main CPU 63 may transmit the correspondence information to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting the transmission of the correspondence information is received from the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and configured to be used for both reading and writing. The correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped is stored and retained in the correspondence memory 116 even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This reduces the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) In the first embodiment and other embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a-122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using signal paths 118a-118g for transmitting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. However, this is not limited to this, and a dedicated signal path may be provided for transmitting the correspondence information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This allows the management IC 66 to determine what type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 based on the type of buffer 122a-122o that receives that information.

(6) In the first embodiment and other embodiments, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, this is not limited to this, and information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on historical information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly control the notification means, as in the eleventh embodiment, so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the various received parameters are issued. Alternatively, the main CPU 63 may be configured to transmit commands corresponding to the contents of the various received parameters to the audio and light-emitting control device 81, thereby enabling notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters to be issued using the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display device 41.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 may calculate various parameters based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the contents of the calculated various parameters may be notified using the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display device 41, etc. In this case, when the amusement hall opens for business, it becomes possible to check whether the ball entry behavior in the game area PA on the previous business day was normal.

(8) If various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 result in an abnormal result, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to prevent play from starting until a prohibition cancellation operation is performed. Examples of configurations that prevent play from starting include prohibiting the release of game balls, disabling each ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a, or not executing the win/loss determination process even if a win occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The prohibition cancellation operation may also be performed by restarting the power to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch turned ON, or by operating an operating means that becomes operable when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11. This makes it possible to prevent play from continuing in a situation where the game ball's entry pattern in the play area PA is abnormal.

(9) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using that history information may not be performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the calculation of various parameters may be performed by the operator performing the reading operation using the read history information, or the calculation of various parameters may be performed by the reading device using the read history information. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the functions for storing history information and calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments may be provided by the main CPU 63, the dispensing CPU 92, or the audio and light control device 81. If the dispensing CPU 92 or the audio and light control device 81 has these functions, the information on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a will be sent from the main CPU 63 to the control entity that has those functions.

(11) The management IC 66 may be provided with a separate power supply from the main CPU 63, and may be configured to allow the management IC 66 to calculate various parameters using historical information and output historical information or various parameters even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This makes it possible to read historical information and various parameters using a reading device even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(12) Although the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is configured to also serve as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters using a reading device, this is not limited to this, and the terminal used to read history information or various parameters using a reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position on the main control board 61 separate from the MPU 62.

(13) In the above embodiments, the correspondence memory 116, history memory 117, and calculation result memory 131 are not limited to configurations in which they are provided as non-volatile storage means such as flash memory. For example, any of these memories 116, 117, and 131 may be provided as volatile storage means that require a power supply to store and retain information, and backup power may be supplied to that memory so that information is stored and retained even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for that memory, or backup power may be supplied to that memory from the power supply and launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65.

(14) The configuration is not limited to one in which various parameters are calculated using history information; instead of storing and retaining history information, various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new game ball is detected by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters increases, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at any time.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which it includes a management CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU and performs storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113. A configuration in which a hardware circuit designed to perform these functions is formed in the management IC 66 may also be employed. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment described above, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a gaming ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a-48a, it stores correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and also stores the information of the RTC 115 at that time in the history memory 117. Furthermore, for example, in the ninth embodiment described above, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a gaming ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a-48a, it increments the value of a counter corresponding to the buffer that received the signal by one. Furthermore, when a calculation trigger occurs, such as in the first embodiment, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using the history information at that time. Furthermore, when a trigger occurs to output to the read terminal 102, the hardware circuit outputs the various parameters that are the calculation results, as well as the history information.

(16) In addition to or instead of storing the information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a as history information, the occurrence of a transition to the opening and closing execution mode may be stored as history information, the timing of the transition to the opening and closing execution mode and the timing of the end may be stored as history information, the occurrence of a transition to the high-frequency support mode may be stored as history information, or the occurrence of a specified abnormality may be stored as history information. Furthermore, the probability of transition to the opening and closing execution mode may be calculated using the above-mentioned history information, the probability of transition to the high-frequency support mode may be calculated, or the frequency of occurrence of a specified abnormality may be calculated. Furthermore, the history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be configured as separate chips, as separate boards, or as separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the outlet 24a is counted, while history information including RTC information may be stored for game balls entering bonus-triggering entry sections, such as the general entry section 31, the special electric entry device 32, the first actuation section 33, and the second actuation section 34, which trigger the payout of prize balls and the win/loss determination process. This makes it possible to extract the history of game balls entering bonus-triggering entry sections, and to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each bonus-triggering entry section relative to the total number of game balls dispensed.

(19) The configuration may include items other than those described in the above embodiments that are recorded as history information. For example, the configuration may be such that at least one of the following events is stored as history information: the lower tray 56a becoming full, the timing at which the full state began, and the timing at which the full state was released; the configuration may be such that at least one of the following events is stored as history information: the tank 75 becoming ball-free, the timing at which the ball-free state began, and the timing at which the ball-free state was released; and the configuration may be such that at least one of the following events is stored as history information: the dispensing device 76 becoming abnormal, the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 began, and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the first embodiment and other embodiments described above, the correspondence between the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 and the output instruction signal is preset during the design stage of the management IC 66. However, this is not limited to this, and the correspondence between the 16th buffer 122p and the output instruction signal may be recognized by the management IC 66 when a type identification command is sent from the main CPU 63. In this case, it is not necessary to preset in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each buffer 122a to 122p and the type of signal input to those buffers 122a to 122p.

(21) The number of game balls that enter a designated entry point when the front door frame 14 is open may be stored as history information, and the number of game balls determined using this history information may be output to a reading device. This makes it possible to determine the number of game balls that enter a designated entry point when the front door frame 14 is open, and to determine whether or not there is any cheating. Furthermore, the number of game balls that enter a designated entry point when the front door frame 14 is open may be calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and an abnormality alert may be issued if the calculated number of game balls is abnormal. This makes it possible to deal with cheating by illegally opening the front door frame 14 and allowing game balls to enter a designated entry point.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment and the like, the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reversed from that of the first embodiment and the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process to change the output state of each signal will match the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for each buffer 122a to 122o.

(24) When using the reading terminal 102 to output information stored in the main ROM 64 to the outside, the configuration may be such that either the program or the data can be selectively output to the outside, or such that only a specified program can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. Note that a possible configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside is one in which the main CPU 63 selects information to be output to the outside from the selected information received from the reading device via the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside.

(25) The other information to be output externally through the read terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information and various parameters. For example, if an abnormality occurs, history information about the abnormality occurrence may be stored, and the stored history information may be output externally through the read terminal 102.

(26) Individual detection sensors 42a-48a are provided for each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is determined by adding up the numbers of game balls detected by these detection sensors 42a-48a. However, this is not limited to this configuration. For example, a passage area may be provided through which all game balls discharged from the game area PA pass one by one, and a discharge detection sensor may be provided to detect game balls passing through the passage area. In this case, the detection results of the discharge detection sensor may be used to determine the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. Furthermore, in this configuration, as in the above embodiments, by providing detection sensors 42a-47a for detecting the number of game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry section to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) In the first embodiment, instead of providing a through gate 35 downstream of the special power winning device 32, an operating port may be provided that triggers the acquisition of reserved information on the special power winning device. For example, the normal power device 34a may be defective, and an operating port that triggers the acquisition of the second reserved information may be provided, without a component that directly prevents or allows the game ball to enter. In this case, the opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode triggers the acquisition of the second reserved information. Furthermore, by configuring the opening and closing execution mode to be reliably triggered when the second reserved information is the subject of a win/loss determination in this configuration, the opening and closing execution mode will be reliably triggered when a game ball enters the operating port in the opening and closing execution mode. This increases the importance of the game ball entering the operating port in the opening and closing execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(28) In the first embodiment described above, a through gate 35 is provided downstream of the special electric winning device 32, allowing game balls to enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 is opened or closed. However, the configuration for providing a ball entry section that allows game balls to enter in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to this. For example, the special electric opening/closing member of the special electric winning device 32 may be configured like the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34, and when this special electric opening/closing member is moved from the closed position to the open position, a portion of the special electric opening/closing member presses the ball entry opening/closing member of a predetermined ball entry section. When the ball entry opening/closing member moves from the closed position to the open position, game balls can enter the predetermined ball entry section. In this case, when the special electric opening/closing member returns from the open position to the closed position, the pressure on the ball entry opening/closing member by the special electric opening/closing member is released, and the ball entry opening/closing member returns from the open position to the closed position. Even with this configuration, game balls can enter the predetermined ball entry section in the opening/closing execution mode.

(29) A through gate 35 may be provided in a position where a gaming ball can reach even when the special electric winning device 32 is not open or closed, and where the gaming ball can reach when a firing operation is performed aimed at the special electric winning device 32, and an electrically operated opening and closing member may be provided to prevent or allow the gaming ball to enter the through gate 35. When the opening and closing execution mode is initiated, the electrically operated opening and closing member may be configured to move periodically between a blocking position that prevents the gaming ball from entering the through gate 35 and a permitting position that allows the gaming ball to enter the through gate 35. Even with this configuration, gaming balls can enter the through gate 35 in the opening and closing execution mode. This configuration may also be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(30) In the first embodiment described above, when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35 and reservation information on the normal side is acquired, the second operating port 34 may be reliably opened to normal power. Note that this configuration may also be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(31) In the first embodiment described above, when the special electric winning device 32 switches from an open state to a closed state, a gaming ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35. However, this is not limited to this, and a gaming ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can also enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 switches from a closed state to an open state. In other words, in this configuration, even when the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state, a gaming ball can land on the guide plate portion 214, although it cannot enter the special electric winning device 32. If the special electric winning device 32 switches from a closed state to an open state while a gaming ball is on the guide plate portion 214, the gaming ball can fall toward the through gate 35. In this case, when the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state, the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will land on the guide plate portion 214, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special electric winning device 32 even when the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(32) The configuration may be such that when the special electric winning device 32 switches from a closed state to an open state, a gaming ball placed on the guide plate section 214 can enter the through gate 35, and when the special electric winning device 32 switches from an open state to a closed state, a gaming ball placed on the guide plate section 214 can enter the through gate 35. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the start and end timing of each opening of the special electric winning device 32. It also makes it possible to create more opportunities for gaming balls to enter the through gate 35. This configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(33) In the first embodiment, when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, a configuration may be adopted in which game balls flowing down the right-side area PA3 are reliably prevented from flowing downstream of the special electric winning device 32. For example, the opening/closing member 202 may be a plate-shaped member without an opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment. When the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position, it is recessed behind the surface of the game board 24. When the opening/closing member 202 is in the open position, it extends from the surface of the game board 24 to the window panel 52. This ensures that when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, game balls flowing down the right-side area PA3 will reliably win in the special electric winning device 32, except for game balls that are on the opening/closing member 202 when the special electric winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(34) In the first embodiment described above, when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35 and the gate is in a normally open state, the second operating port 34 is electrically opened. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35, the second operating port 34 is mechanically linked to open using the pressing force of the entering gaming ball, and when one or two gaming balls enter the second operating port 34, the second operating port 34 is mechanically linked to return to the closed state using the pressing force of the gaming balls. This configuration may also be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(35) In the first embodiment described above, the gaming ball that entered the through gate 35 continued to flow down the gaming area PA, but this is not limited to this. The gaming ball that entered the through gate 35 may be discharged from the gaming area PA by being guided to the back side of the gaming board 24. This configuration may also be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(36) The configuration of the special electric winning device 32 of the first embodiment or the configuration of the special electric winning devices 261, 262 of the fifteenth embodiment may be applied to the second operating port 34, and a predetermined ball entry section may be provided at a position where a ball can enter only when the second operating port 34 is opened or closed. In this case, the predetermined ball entry section may be a ball entry section where a game ball is paid out when the game ball enters, or a ball entry section where reserved information on the special game side or reserved information on the regular game side is obtained when the game ball enters.

(37) In the opening and closing execution mode, the reserved information on the normal side may not be consumed. This means that the second operating port 34 will transition to a normal open state in response to the acquisition of reserved information on the normal side in the opening and closing execution mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, making it possible for the player to aim for the game ball to enter the second operating port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode has ended. This configuration may also be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(38) Even in the opening and closing execution mode, pending information on the normal map side is consumed, but the display of the changing image on the normal map display unit 38a that started in the opening and closing execution mode may be configured to continue until the opening and closing execution mode ends. Even in this case, it is possible for the player to aim for the game ball to enter the second operating port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(39) When the second pending information is subject to the hit/miss determination process, it may be configured to result in not only a big hit result or a small hit result, but also a miss result. Furthermore, even when the first pending information is subject to the hit/miss determination process, it may be configured to result in a small hit result.

(40) A configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of support modes are set so that the support provided by the normal power device 34a differs from one another. In detail, the support modes are set to a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode so that the frequency with which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously being released in the same manner into the game area PA.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery using the normal power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 in both), but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power device 34a will be in the open state when the normal power release state is won is set to be more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer. In this case, if the normal power release state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the normal power device 34a is in the open state multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time ensured between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery (i.e., the duration of one display on the normal power display unit 38a) is set to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 33 is higher than in the second actuation port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the first actuation port 33. Furthermore, when a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of normal power release state per unit time in the high-frequency support mode compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery, for example. Furthermore, in a configuration in which multiple types of reserved time are available between one normal power release lottery and the next (for example, the time of the variable display executed by the normal power display unit 38a based on winning through gate 35), the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of the following conditions: increasing the number of releases, lengthening the open time, shortening the reserved time between one normal power release lottery and the next, shortening the average reserved time, and increasing the probability of winning.

(41) The configuration is not limited to one in which game balls can enter the special electric winning device 32 when the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state and game balls cannot enter the special electric winning device 32 when the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. It may also be configured such that game balls can enter the special electric winning device 32 even when the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state, but that game balls are less likely to enter the special electric winning device 32 than when the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state. This configuration may also be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(42) The configuration is not limited to one in which game balls can enter the second actuation port 34 when the second actuation port 34 is in an open state and game balls cannot enter the second actuation port 34 when the second actuation port 34 is in a closed state. It may also be one in which game balls can enter the second actuation port 34 even when the second actuation port 34 is in a closed state, but game balls are less likely to enter the second actuation port 34 than when the second actuation port 34 is in an open state. This configuration may also be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment described above.

(43) The configurations of the above embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which players cannot replenish game balls in the pachinko machine 10, game balls circulate within the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of game balls available to the player is stored, and game balls can be fired within the range of the stored information on the number of game balls available.

(44) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio and light emitting control device 81 based on commands sent from the main control device 60, a configuration in which the display control device 82 controls the audio and light emitting control device 81 based on commands sent from the main control device 60 may be adopted. Also, instead of a configuration in which the audio and light emitting control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, both control devices may be provided as a single control device, or the functions of one of these control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of these control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio and light emitting control device 81 and the configuration of the commands sent from the audio and light emitting control device 81 to the display control device 82 may be arbitrary.

(45) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

When applying the present invention to slot machines or gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines, for example, the results of the lottery process for winning roles executed when a game is started by operating the start lever may be stored as historical information, and the historical information may be used to calculate the actual probability of winning for each role. Alternatively, when a transition to a special control state such as a bonus game occurs, this may be stored as historical information and the historical information may be used to calculate the actual probability of transition to the special control state. Alternatively, the ratio of the number of games played in the special control state to the total number of games played may be calculated. Furthermore, this historical information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, and notifications corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be issued by the gaming machine itself.

(46) The characteristic features of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be applied to one another in any combination. For example, the characteristic features of the first embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the twelfth embodiment may be combined; the characteristic features of the second embodiment, the fourth embodiment, and the eighth embodiment may be combined; the characteristic features of the first embodiment, the thirteenth embodiment, and the fourteenth embodiment may be combined; or the characteristic features of the first embodiment, the fifteenth embodiment, and the nineteenth embodiment may be combined. Furthermore, the characteristic features of the other embodiments may be applied in any combination to a configuration in which the characteristic features of the first to nineteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are indicated in parentheses, etc. as appropriate, but the invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning entry 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
A specific storage execution means (a function for executing ball entry detection processing in the main CPU 63) for storing corresponding information in a specific storage means (main RAM 65) when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the processing of step S217 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing the processing of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for executing a process to award a bonus to a player based on the information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means being stored in the specific storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a predetermined storage execution means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function of executing the processes of steps S3202, S3205, S3208, S3212, S3216, S3220, and S3223 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) that stores predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of gaming balls that enter the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of the gaming balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to be identified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine.

According to Feature A1, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, corresponding information is stored in a specific storage means, and a bonus is awarded to the player if that information is stored in the specific storage means. This allows the player to play in the hope of a gaming ball entering the predetermined entry means. In this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the predetermined entry means, corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and predetermined information that allows the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means to be determined by the gaming machine's control means or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the specific storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, because the predetermined information is stored and retained in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. A gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of a process for awarding a bonus to the player.

According to feature A2, the specified information does not trigger the execution of a process to grant a bonus to a player, making it possible to store and retain the specified information in an information format intended to appropriately manage the manner in which game balls enter the specified ball entry means.

Feature A3. The game area is provided with specific ball entry means (outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
The gaming machine described in feature A1 or A2 is characterized in that the predetermined storage execution means stores information corresponding to a gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means when the gaming ball has entered the specific ball entry means, and stores specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means, which enables the number of gaming balls that have entered the specific ball entry means to be identified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine.

According to Feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined scoring means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific scoring means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the scoring patterns of game balls into the predetermined scoring means but also the scoring patterns of game balls into the specific scoring means. Furthermore, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the scoring frequency ratio between the predetermined scoring means and the specific scoring means.

Feature A4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that all ball entry means for discharging game balls that have entered the game area, including the predetermined ball entry means, are ball entry means for storing information corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering the game area in the predetermined storage means.

According to Feature A4, all ball entry means that eject game balls from the game area are subject to management using information stored in a specified storage means, making it possible to manage the frequency of balls entering any ball entry means using the information stored in the specified storage means. Also, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls that enter a specified ball entry means to the number of game balls that are ejected from the game area using the information stored in the specified storage means.

Feature A5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A5, the specified information includes information corresponding to the timing at which a gaming ball entered the specified ball entry means, and by using the specified information, it is possible to obtain a detailed understanding of the history of gaming balls entering the specified ball entry means.

Feature A6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is count information of the number of gaming balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A6, the specified information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the specified ball entry means, making it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter the specified ball entry means while minimizing the information volume of the specified information.

Feature A7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A6, characterized in that the predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information in the predetermined storage means that enables identification of whether a gaming ball entered the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined circumstance (a function for executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the processing of step S3004 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S3103 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment).

Feature A7 makes it possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and manage the manner in which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature A8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A7, characterized in that it is equipped with external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs information stored in the specified storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature A8 makes it possible to read information stored in a specified storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to analyze the manner in which gaming balls enter the specified ball entry means.

Feature A9: Equipped with a program output means (a function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102),
The gaming machine described in Feature A8, wherein the external output means uses the information output unit to output the information stored in the specified storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature A9 makes it possible to externally output information stored in a specified storage means using an information output unit for externally outputting a control program. This makes it possible to externally output information stored in a specified storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming too complicated.

Feature A10. A gaming machine as described in Feature A9, characterized in that it includes means (a function for executing the processing of step S902 in the main CPU 63) for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and for outputting information corresponding to the identification result.

According to Feature A10, in a configuration in which information stored in a specified storage means is output externally using an information output unit for outputting a control program externally, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output externally is the control program or information stored in the specified storage means, and then outputs the identified information externally. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature A11. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to Feature A11, the second control means, which is provided separately from the first control means having the specific memory execution means, has a predetermined memory execution means, making it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing an extreme increase in the processing load on the first control means.

Feature A12. The gaming machine described in Feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature A12, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means.

Feature A13. The game area is provided with specific ball entry means (outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
The predetermined storage execution means stores, in the predetermined storage means, information corresponding to a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means, so that specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means or the frequency of the game balls entering the specific ball entry means to be identified by a control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means
A first transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
A second transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, characterized by comprising:

According to Feature A13, not only predetermined information corresponding to predetermined scoring means but also specific information corresponding to specific scoring means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the scoring patterns of game balls into predetermined scoring means, but also the scoring patterns of game balls into specific scoring means. Furthermore, by using both predetermined information and specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of scoring frequencies between predetermined scoring means and specific scoring means.

In addition, when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, first information is sent to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means, second information is sent to the second control means using the second signal path. This ensures that the type of information sent corresponds to the signal path, simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between types of information in the second control means.

Feature A14. The gaming machine described in Feature A13 is characterized in that the first control means is equipped with third transmission means (a function to output one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function to output one of the open/close execution mode signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means via a third path, enabling the second control means to identify whether a predetermined situation exists.

Feature A14 makes it possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and manage the manner in which game balls enter predetermined entry means and specific entry means. Furthermore, because the identification information that enables identification of whether a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means via the third path, it is possible to simplify the configuration for the second control means to distinguish the identification information from other information, such as the first information and the second information.

Feature A15. A gaming machine as described in Feature A13 or A14, wherein the first control means is equipped with identification information transmission means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature A15, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined goal-goaling method and the second information corresponds to a specific goal-goaling method is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, eliminating the need for the second control means to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine described in Feature A15, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means begins.

According to feature A16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is initiated, identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, in a situation where a game ball may enter a predetermined ball entry means or a specific ball entry means, the second control means can identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature A17. The gaming machine described in Feature A15 or A16, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature A17, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, which simplifies the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature A18. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A15 to A17, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, is equipped with a means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the goal-scoring means is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify the goal-scoring means corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the second control means each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is equipped with third transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function of outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits third information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means using a third path,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A15 to A18, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation exists, even without receiving the identification information.

Feature A19 makes it possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and manage the manner in which game balls enter predetermined entry means and specific entry means. Furthermore, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A13 to A19, wherein the second control means is provided with a greater number of receiving units (buffers 122a-122p) capable of receiving information from the first control means than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means.

According to Feature A20, the second control means is provided with a greater number of receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. This makes it possible to accommodate changes in the number of types of information depending on the model of gaming machine without changing the configuration of the receiving units. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. A first external output means (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that enables recognition of the correspondence to the predetermined ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine;
A second external output means (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) for outputting to a device outside the gaming machine a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that enables recognition that the specific information corresponds to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, characterized in that it comprises:

According to Feature A21, it is possible to read information stored in a predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to identify the manner in which a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means and the manner in which a gaming ball enters a specific entry means. Furthermore, when this external output is performed, a combination of the predetermined information and information that enables recognition that the information corresponds to the predetermined entry means is output to the outside, and a combination of specific information and information that enables recognition that the information corresponds to the specific entry means is output to the outside. This makes it possible to identify each entry mode using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A21, characterized in that it comprises information calculation means that uses the predetermined information to calculate status information corresponding to the status of game balls entering the game area during a predetermined period (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, a function to execute the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S2502 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S2702 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S2905 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S3503 in the main CPU 63).

According to Feature A22, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using predetermined information stored in a predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the predetermined information.

Feature A23: The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that can identify whether or not a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined circumstance (a function for executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the processing of step S3004 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S3103 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in Feature A22 is characterized in that the information calculation means is equipped with a means for calculating the status information by extracting or excluding the specified information corresponding to the entry of a gaming ball into the specified ball entry means in the specified situation (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2308, S2313 and S2317 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2502 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2702 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2905 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3503 in the main CPU 63).

Feature A23 makes it possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and calculate status information corresponding to the game ball's entry status.

Feature A24. A gaming machine as described in Feature A22 or A23, characterized in that it includes a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the processing of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processing of step S2505 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, making it less likely that the specified information will exceed the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature A25. A gaming machine as described in Feature A22 or A23, wherein even when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to Feature A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the specified information used to calculate the mode information is stored and held in a specified storage means. Therefore, when reading out the mode information and analyzing the ball's entry mode, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that was the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature A26. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A22 to A25, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage and execution means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage and execution means is started.

According to feature A26, the status information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, making it possible to manage the status information on a business day basis.

Feature A27. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A22 to A26, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means having the specific storage and execution means.

According to feature A27, the status information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means, making it possible to manage the status information in detail within one business day.

Feature A28: The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main-side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A22 to A27, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when no game is being played, and when game play is started while the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to Feature A28, because the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of mode information calculation simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when no game is being played, and is resumed from the state before the stop when game play begins. This makes it possible to exclude situations where no game is being played from the calculation of mode information, and to appropriately derive mode information when game play is being played.

Feature A29. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A22 to A28, characterized in that it is equipped with external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature A29, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state of the game ball entering the game.

Feature A30. The gaming machine described in Feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature A30, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read the mode information and analyze the ball's entry mode, and to refer not only to the mode information but also to the specified information that served as the basis for calculating that mode information.

Feature A31. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature A29 or A30, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to Feature A31, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, it becomes possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on instructions from the first control means.

Feature A32: The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A22 to A31, characterized in that it is equipped with a result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S2310, S2314 and S2318 in the management CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the management CPU 112) that sequentially stores the status information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131).

Feature A32 allows the gaming machine to accumulate status information. This makes it possible to read out multiple status information at once when managing the status of game balls entering the machine.

Feature A33. The result storage and execution means
a means for determining whether the aspect information is information to be stored (a function for executing the process of step S2503 in the management-side CPU 112);
a means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is the storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S2504 in the management-side CPU 112);
The gaming machine described in feature A32 is characterized by comprising:

According to feature A33, when the behavior information of the calculated result corresponds to the information to be stored, that behavior information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavior information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, thereby reducing the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. A gaming machine according to Feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in the calculation result storage means, along with the mode information.

According to feature A34, the behavior information is accompanied by information that identifies the time when the behavior information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing when the information was calculated.

Feature A35. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features A22 to A34, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

According to Feature A35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an information calculation means separately from the first control means, it is possible to have the second control means calculate the mode information based on instructions from the first control means.

Feature A36. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A22 to A35, characterized in that it is equipped with notification control means (a function that executes the processing of steps S3505, S3507, and S3508 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) to notify content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature A36, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the details corresponding to the mode information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or other personnel to understand the management results of the game ball's entry mode without having to read the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine described in feature A36 is characterized in that the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature A37 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature A38. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means is equipped with the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to Feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, it is possible to consolidate the function of calculating status information and the function of issuing a notification corresponding to the calculation results into the first control means.

Feature A39. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A36 to A38, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the status information is within a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the status information is within a second range.

According to feature A39, rather than reporting the status information as is, content corresponding to the range in which the status information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the reporting means from having too many reporting patterns, and reduces the load on controlling the reporting means.

Feature A40. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A39, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S218 in the main CPU 63) for externally outputting corresponding information when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to Feature A40, in a configuration in which corresponding information is output externally when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, the predetermined information is stored in a predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to easily determine the number and frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means by using the corresponding information, while accurately determining the number and frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature A41. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage and execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature A41 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that the configurations of Features A1 to A41 may also be combined with one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C4, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E7, Features F1 to F45, Features G1 to G18, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I11, Features J1 to J9, and Features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Features Group B>
Feature B1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S3202, S3205, S3208, S3212, S3216, S3220, and S3223 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
an information calculation means for calculating status information corresponding to game results during a predetermined period using the predetermined information (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2308, S2313 and S2317 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2905 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence pattern of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game results over a predetermined period of time using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game results over a predetermined period of time itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculations using the specified information.

Feature B2: The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that enables identification of whether the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S3004 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3103 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in Feature B1 is characterized in that the information calculation means is equipped with a means for calculating the status information by extracting or excluding the specified information corresponding to the occurrence of the specified event in the specified situation (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2502 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2702 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2905 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3503 in the main CPU 63).

Feature B2 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results over a specific period of time.

Feature B3. A gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the processing of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processing of step S2505 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature B3, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, making it less likely that the specified information will exceed the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature B4. A gaming machine as described in Feature B1 or B2, characterized in that even when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used to calculate the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to Feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used to calculate the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, when reading out the mode information and analyzing the results of games over a predetermined period, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the predetermined information that was the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature B5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B4, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature B5, the status information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, making it possible to manage the status information on a business day basis.

Feature B6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B5, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means (MPU 62).

According to feature B6, the status information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means, making it possible to manage the status information in detail within one business day.

Feature B7: The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when no game is being played, and when game play is started while the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to Feature B7, because the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of mode information calculation simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when no game is being played, and is resumed when game play begins from the state before the measurement of the predetermined period of time was stopped. This makes it possible to exclude situations where no game is being played from the calculation of mode information, and to appropriately derive mode information when game play is being played.

Feature B8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B7, characterized in that it is equipped with external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature B8, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state of the game ball entering the game.

Feature B9. The gaming machine described in Feature B8, wherein the external output means, when outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine, outputs the predetermined information to the device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature B9, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read the mode information and analyze the ball's entry mode, and to refer not only to the mode information but also to the specified information that served as the basis for calculating that mode information.

Feature B10. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature B8 or B9, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to Feature B10, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, it becomes possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on instructions from the first control means.

Feature B11: The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that it is equipped with a result storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2310, S2314 and S2318 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S2504 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) that sequentially stores the status information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131).

Feature B11 allows the gaming machine to accumulate behavior information. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature B12. A gaming machine according to Feature B11, wherein the result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means if the mode information is information to be stored (a function for executing the processing of step S2504 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature B12, when the behavior information of the calculation result corresponds to the information to be stored, that behavior information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavior information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, thereby reducing the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. A gaming machine as described in Feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in the calculation result storage means, along with the mode information.

According to feature B13, the behavior information is accompanied by information that identifies the time when the behavior information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing when the information was calculated.

Feature B14: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B13, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

Feature B14 enables the second control means to calculate the mode information based on instructions from the first control means in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an information calculation means separate from the first control means.

Feature B15. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B14, characterized in that it is equipped with notification control means (a function that executes the processing of steps S3505, S3507, and S3508 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) to notify content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature B15, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the content corresponding to the behavior information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or other person in charge to understand the results of gaming management over a specified period of time without having to read the behavior information from the gaming machine.

Feature B16: The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to Feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature B16 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature B17: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, characterized in that it is provided with:

Feature B17 enables the first control means to have a function for calculating status information and a function for issuing a notification corresponding to the calculation results to be consolidated in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having a predetermined storage means separate from the first control means.

Feature B18. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B15 to B17, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the status information is within a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the status information is within a second range.

According to feature B18, the status information is not reported as is, but rather content corresponding to the range in which the status information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and reduces the load on controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. A predetermined ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
a predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing processing in steps S3202, S3205, S3208, S3212, S3216, S3220, and S3223 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing corresponding information in a predetermined storage means (a history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a main RAM 65 in the tenth embodiment) when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, thereby storing the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means;
an information calculation means for calculating, using the predetermined information, state information corresponding to the state of game balls entering the game area during a predetermined period (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2308, S2313 and S2317 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2905 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature B19, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, a storage process for the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, because the predetermined information is stored and retained in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

Feature B20. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage and execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature B20 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that the configurations of Features B1 to B20 may also be combined with one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C4, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E7, Features F1 to F45, Features G1 to G18, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I11, Features J1 to J9, and Features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1. A program output means (a function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102);
an information output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management CPU 112) for outputting special information using the information output unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature C1 makes it possible to output special information externally using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to output special information externally without complicating the configuration.

Feature C2. A gaming machine as described in Feature C1, characterized in that it is equipped with selection means (a function for executing the processing of step S902 in the main CPU 63) that identifies whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, and causes the information corresponding to the identification result to be output.

According to Feature C2, in a configuration in which special information is output externally using an information output unit for outputting a control program externally, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output externally is the control program or the special information, and then outputs the identified information externally. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature C3. The gaming machine described in Feature C2, wherein the selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit.

According to feature C3, the information to be output from the information output unit is identified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration for selecting the information to be output.

Feature C4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C3, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) that pre-stores the control program includes the information output unit and the information output means.

Feature C4 makes it possible to centralize the signal paths to the information output unit within the chip. This makes it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal paths to the information output unit, while still achieving the excellent effects already described.

Note that the configurations of Features C1 to C4 may also be combined with one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C4, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E7, Features F1 to F45, Features G1 to G18, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I11, Features J1 to J9, and Features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1. Equipped with a first control means (main CPU 63) and a second control means (management CPU 112),
The first control means
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for awarding a bonus to a player when a predetermined event occurs;
an information transmitting means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs;
Equipped with
The second control means, when receiving the predetermined event information, causes the storage of corresponding information to be executed in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main RAM 65 in the tenth embodiment), thereby causing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of occurrences or frequency of the predetermined event to be identified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine to be stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function of executing the processes of steps S3202, S3205, S3208, S3212, S3216, S3220, and S3223 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment).

According to feature D1, a bonus is awarded to a player when a predetermined event occurs. This allows players to play in the hope that the predetermined event will occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means, and predetermined information that allows the number of times or frequency of the predetermined event to be determined by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. This allows information for managing the number of times or frequency of the predetermined event to be stored and maintained in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence pattern of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing and maintaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Furthermore, by having a second control means provided separately from the first control means having the bonus granting means and a predetermined memory execution means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without excessively increasing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature D2. A gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature D2, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means.

Feature D3. The predetermined storage execution means, when a specific event occurs, executes a storage process of information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage means, so that specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine to identify the number of times or frequency of the specific event to be generated is stored in the predetermined storage means;
The first control means
a first transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when the predetermined event occurs;
A second transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when the specific event occurs;
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature D3, not only predetermined information corresponding to predetermined events but also specific information corresponding to specific events is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the occurrence patterns of predetermined events but also the occurrence patterns of specific events. Furthermore, by using both predetermined information and specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of occurrence frequencies between predetermined events and specific events.

Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, first information is sent to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, second information is sent to the second control means using the second signal path. This ensures that the type of information sent corresponds to the signal path, simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between types of information in the second control means.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in Feature D3 is characterized in that the first control means is equipped with third transmission means (a function to output one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function to output one of the open/close execution mode signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means via a third path, enabling the second control means to identify whether a predetermined situation exists.

Feature D4 makes it possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and to manage the occurrence of a predetermined event and the occurrence of a specific event. Furthermore, because the identification information that enables identification of whether a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means via the third route, it is possible to simplify the configuration for the second control means to distinguish the identification information from other information, such as the first information and the second information.

Feature D5. A gaming machine described in Feature D3 or D4, wherein the first control means is equipped with identification information transmission means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to the specific event.

According to feature D5, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, eliminating the need for the second control means to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature D6. The gaming machine described in Feature D5, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means begins.

According to feature D6, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is initiated, the first control means transmits identification information to the second control means. Therefore, in situations where a predetermined event or a specific event may occur, the second control means can identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature D7. The gaming machine described in Feature D5 or D6, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature D7, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, which simplifies the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature D8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features D5 to D7, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, includes means for storing correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event (a function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112).

According to feature D8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the second control means each time the first control means transmits first information or second information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and second information.

Feature D9. The first control means is provided with third transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function of outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits third information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means using a third path,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D5 to D8, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation exists, even without receiving the identification information.

Feature D9 makes it possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and to manage the occurrence of a predetermined event and the occurrence of a specific event. Furthermore, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature D10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature D10 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that the configurations of features D1 to D10 may also be combined with one or more of features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group A, feature group B, feature group C, and feature group D can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out to the tray storage section from, for example, a payout device. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be managed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1. First control means (main CPU 63),
a second control means (control CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means
a first transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) for transmitting first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a first event occurs;
a second transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) for transmitting second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a second event occurs;
an identification information transmitting means (a function of executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and that the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, when a first event occurs, first information is transmitted to the second control means via the first signal path, and when a second event occurs, second information is transmitted to the second control means via the second signal path. This ensures that the type of information transmitted corresponds to the signal path, simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between types of information in the second control means.

In addition, because identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, there is no need for the second control means to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means begins.

According to feature E2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is initiated, identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, in a situation where a game ball may enter a predetermined ball entry means or a specific ball entry means, the second control means can identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature E3. A gaming machine described in Feature E1 or E2, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature E3, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, which simplifies the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature E4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E3, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, includes means for storing correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event (a function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112).

According to feature E4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the second control means each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and the second information.

Feature E5: The first control means is equipped with third transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function of outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits third information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means using a third path,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation exists, even without receiving the identification information.

Feature E5 makes it possible to manage the occurrence of the first event and the occurrence of the second event by distinguishing whether or not a predetermined situation exists. Furthermore, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature E6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E5, characterized in that the number of signal paths capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means is greater than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means.

According to feature E6, by providing a greater number of signal paths than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to accommodate changes in the number of types of information depending on the model of gaming machine without changing the configuration of the signal paths. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature E7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature E7 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features E1 to E7: Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C4, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E7, Features F1 to F45, Features G1 to G18, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I11, Features J1 to J9, and Features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to Feature Group E above can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out to the tray storage section from, for example, a payout device. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to have an optimal communication configuration, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32 in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 in the fifteenth embodiment) that is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down and is switchable between a first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter;
A special control means (a function of executing an open setting process for special electric power and a close setting process for special electric power in the main side CPU 63) that executes special control to change the variable ball entry means to the second state after the first state;
A transition means (a function for executing a special chart determination process in the main CPU 63) for transitioning the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
a special ball entry means (through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first special ball entry port 251 and second special ball entry port 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, and first through gate 263 and second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment) that restricts the entry of game balls in a predetermined game state other than the special control state, and allows game balls to enter in the special control state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature F1, when the game state transitions to the special control state, not only does it become possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, but it also makes it possible for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This increases the benefits of transitioning the game state to the special control state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F2. A gaming machine as described in Feature F1, characterized in that it is configured so that a gaming ball can enter the special ball entry means when a predetermined condition is met in the special control state.

According to feature F2, even if the game state transitions to the special control state, the game ball will not enter the special ball entry means unless a predetermined condition is met. This allows the player to hope that the predetermined condition will be met in addition to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the special control state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game in the special control state.

Feature F3. A gaming machine described in Feature F1 or F2, wherein at least one condition necessary to generate the special control state is met based on a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means.

According to feature F3, when a special control state occurs, it becomes possible for a gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means, and when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means, the special control state can occur again. This makes it possible to create a situation in which special control states occur consecutively, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F4. A gaming machine according to Feature F3, characterized in that the transition means includes a means for generating the special control state regardless of a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means (a function for transitioning to the open/close execution mode as a result of executing the win/lose determination process of step S1405 on the first pending information in the main CPU 63).

According to feature F4, a special control state can occur even if a gaming ball does not enter the special entry means. Furthermore, with the configuration of feature F3 above, the occurrence of a special control state allows a gaming ball to enter the special entry means, and the special control state can occur again when a gaming ball enters the special entry means. In this case, when a special control state is not in effect, the player will expect the special control state to be initiated, and when a special control state is in effect, the player will expect the special control state to be executed continuously.

Feature F5. The machine is provided with a predetermined ball entry means (first actuation port 33) that allows a game ball to enter the machine at least in the predetermined game state,
A gaming machine described in feature F3 or F4, characterized in that at least one condition necessary to generate the special control state is met based on a gaming ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, even if the gaming ball does not enter the special ball entry means.

According to feature F5, in a specified game state that is not a special control state, a special control state can occur based on a game ball entering a specified entry means. Furthermore, with the configuration of feature F3 above, the occurrence of a special control state allows a game ball to enter a special entry means, and the special control state can occur again when a game ball enters the special entry means. In this case, in a specified game state that is not a special control state, the player will expect the game ball to enter the specified entry means, and in a special control state, the player will expect the game ball to enter not only the variable entry means but also the special entry means.

Feature F6. A gaming machine as described in Feature F5, wherein the probability of the special control state occurring based on a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means is higher than the probability of the special control state occurring based on a gaming ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature F6, the probability that a gaming ball will enter the special ball entry means in a special control state, resulting in a series of special control states, is higher than the probability that a gaming ball will enter the specified ball entry means in a specified game state that is not a special control state, resulting in a special control state. This makes it possible to increase the player's anticipation of a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means in a special control state.

Feature F7: A means for acquiring special opportunity information when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means (a function for executing the processing of step S1101 in the main CPU 63 in the first to fifteenth embodiments, and a function for executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment),
When the special trigger information is acquired, at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is established,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F3 to F6, characterized in that the expected value of the special control state occurring after the special trigger information is acquired does not vary depending on the gaming state.

According to feature F7, the expected value of a special control state occurring after special trigger information is acquired does not change depending on the game state. This simplifies the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the expected value changes depending on the game state, and makes it easier to manage the expected value. However, with a configuration in which the expected value does not change depending on the game state, it becomes difficult to add variety to the game. In contrast, because the configuration of feature F1 is included and a game ball can enter the special ball entry means in a special control state, it is possible to add variety to the opportunities for special trigger information to be acquired, which ultimately makes it possible to add variety to the game.

Feature F8: A trigger ball entry means (second actuation port 34) is provided that enables a game ball to enter the game based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means,
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that a trigger for transitioning to the special control state occurs when a gaming ball enters the trigger ball entry means.

According to feature F8, when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means, it becomes possible for the gaming ball to enter the trigger ball entry means, and when a gaming ball enters the trigger ball entry means, a transition to a special control state is triggered. As a result, in order to continuously generate special control states, it becomes necessary to cause a gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, and then cause a gaming ball to enter the trigger ball entry means. This increases the uncertainty regarding the continuous generation of special control states, which ultimately makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F9. A gaming machine as described in Feature F8, characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the trigger ball entry means are provided in an area where gaming balls flow down when a launch operation is performed in a predetermined manner.

According to feature F9, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined manner, it is possible to aim for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the trigger ball entry means.

Feature F10: A means for controlling the trigger ball entry means to enter a ball entry-enabled state in which a game ball can be entered, with at least one condition being that a game ball has entered the special ball entry means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1108 to S1110 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine described in feature F8 or F9, characterized in that the frequency with which the trigger ball entry means enters the ball entry possible state in response to a game ball entering the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state.

According to feature F10, the frequency with which the trigger ball entry means enters a state where a game ball can be entered when the game ball enters the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state. This means that the expected value of a special control state occurring after a game ball has entered the special ball entry means does not fluctuate depending on the game state. This simplifies the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the expected value fluctuates depending on the game state, and makes it easier to manage the expected value. However, with a configuration in which the expected value does not fluctuate depending on the game state, it becomes difficult to add variety to the game. In contrast, because the configuration of feature F1 is included and a configuration in which a game ball can enter the special ball entry means in the special control state is included, it is possible to add variety to the opportunities for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means, which ultimately makes it possible to add variety to the game.

Feature F11. The special control state includes a first special control state (e.g., a 2R highly probable result) and a second special control state (e.g., a 16R highly probable result),
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F10, characterized in that the ease with which a gaming ball will enter the special ball entry means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state.

According to feature F11, the ease with which a game ball will enter the special ball entry means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state, so that a player hoping for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means will be hoping for a special control state to occur in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F12: When the variable ball entry means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, a game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means,
A gaming machine described in feature F11, characterized in that the number of times the special control is executed differs between the first special control state and the second special control state.

Feature F12 allows a game ball to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first and second states to the other, thereby increasing the player's attention to the timing of this state switch. This makes it possible to diversify the objects that players should pay attention to in the special control state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

In this case, the number of times the variable ball entry means switches between the above states differs between the first special control state and the second special control state. This results in a difference in the ease with which a game ball will enter the special ball entry means between the first special control state and the second special control state, and a player hoping for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means will be hoping for a special control state to occur in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F13: When the variable ball entry means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, a game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means,
The gaming machine is
In the special control state, a means for executing a round game in which the special control is executed a predetermined number of times (a function for executing a special power start process, a special power open process, and a special power close process in the main CPU 63);
When the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in one round of game reaches a predetermined number, a means for ending the round of game (a function for making a positive determination in step S3703 in the main CPU 63);
A multiple execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S3707 when the round counter in the main CPU 63 is 1) for executing the special control multiple times in a predetermined round game;
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, characterized in that it is provided with:

Feature F13 is configured so that a game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, thereby making it possible to increase the player's attention to the timing of this state switch. This makes it possible to diversify the objects that players should pay attention to in the special control state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

In this case, the above-mentioned state switching in the variable ball entry means occurs multiple times during a specified round of play. This makes it possible to generate a specified round of play in which a game ball is more likely to enter the special ball entry means. This means that players will look forward to the occurrence of the specified round of play, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F14. At least a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode are set as execution modes of the special control, in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively high or low,
The gaming machine described in feature F13 is characterized in that the multiple execution means executes the special control resulting in the high expectation mode after the special control resulting in the low expectation mode is executed during the specified round of play.

According to feature F14, in a given round of play, special control that results in a low expectation mode is executed first, followed by special control that results in a high expectation mode. This ensures that the state of the variable ball entry means switches multiple times in the given round of play, making it possible for multiple game balls to enter the variable ball entry means in the given round of play.

Feature F15. The gaming machine described in Feature F14, wherein the high expectation mode is a mode in which the upper limit period during which the variable ball entry means is in the first state is a period equal to or greater than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the predetermined number of game balls.

Feature F15 makes it possible to ensure that the state of the variable ball entry means switches multiple times during a given round of play, while allowing a given number of game balls to enter the variable ball entry means during that given round of play.

Feature F16. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F15, characterized in that the variable ball entry means is configured to allow a gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other.

Feature F16 allows a game ball to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first and second states to the other, thereby increasing the player's attention to the timing of this state switch. This makes it possible to diversify the objects that players should pay attention to in the special control state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

Feature F17. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F16, characterized in that the special ball entry means is located downstream of the variable ball entry means in the flow direction of gaming balls in the gaming area, and is positioned so that gaming balls can enter when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other.

According to feature F17, the special ball entry means is provided in a position that allows game balls to enter when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first and second states to the other. This makes it possible for game balls to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first and second states to the other. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the timing of this state change. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that players should pay attention to in the special control state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the special control state. Furthermore, simply by ensuring the positional relationship of the special ball entry means to the variable ball entry means as described above, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Feature F18. The variable ball entry means has a displacement section (guiding plate section 214) that, when the variable ball entry means is in one of the first state and the second state, becomes a first corresponding state, and a gaming ball flowing down from upstream of the variable ball entry means is placed on the first corresponding state, thereby preventing the gaming ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and when the variable ball entry means is in the other of the first state and the second state, becomes a second corresponding state, thereby allowing the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F17, characterized in that the special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed on the displacement section and the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball flows down in the specified direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

According to feature F18, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball on the displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. As a result, in the special control state, the player will not only focus on whether the gaming ball will enter the variable ball entry means, but also on whether the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the gaming ball is on the displacement section, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

Feature F19. A gaming machine described in Feature F18, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means.

According to feature F19, an opportunity for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also when it switches to the second state.

Feature F20. The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down along the displacement portion in a specific direction,
The gaming machine described in feature F18 or F19 is characterized in that the special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed within a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement section and the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

According to feature F20, for a gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only must the gaming ball be resting on the displacement section that is in the first corresponding state, but the displacement section must switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the gaming ball is within a predetermined range. This draws the player's attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball resting on the displacement section and the timing of the change in the state of the displacement section, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

Feature F21. A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement section is provided upstream of the displacement section in the flow direction of the game ball,
A gaming machine described in feature F20, characterized in that the specified range exists on the side of the specific direction relative to the specific range.

According to feature F21, the predetermined range in the displacement section that allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the specific range that the game ball will first reach in the displacement section. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement section must switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down the displacement section. This draws the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement section, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

Feature F22: The one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in feature F21, characterized in that the ball entry section (entrance section 45b) of the variable ball entry means is located on the side of the specified direction relative to the specified range.

According to feature F22, an opportunity for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also when it switches to the second state.

In this case, the ball entry section of the variable ball entry means is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the predetermined range in the displacement section that allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This means that a game ball that is on the displacement section but does not reach the ball entry section of the variable ball entry means will enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to turn the player's sense of disadvantage from a game ball that is on the displacement section but does not enter the variable ball entry means into a sense of advantage from the game ball entering the special ball entry means.

Feature F23. A gaming machine according to Feature F22, wherein the predetermined range is set to a range in which the next gaming ball in the firing order is present when one gaming ball reaches the ball entry section when gaming balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle.

Feature F23 increases the likelihood that a gaming ball will be present within a specified range of the displacement section when the gaming ball enters the entry section of the variable entry means and the displacement section switches to the second corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a gaming ball will enter the special entry means when the displacement section changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

Feature F24. The special ball entry means includes a first special ball entry means (first special ball entry port 251) and a second special ball entry means (second special ball entry port 252),
The gaming machine includes: a means for awarding a first benefit when a gaming ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
A means for awarding a second benefit when a gaming ball enters the second special ball entry means (a function for executing the processing of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
When a first condition is satisfied in the special control state, a game ball can enter the first special ball entry means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F23, characterized in that when a second condition is met in the special control state, a gaming ball can enter the second special ball entry means.

According to feature F24, the special ball entry means that is the target for the ball entry differs between the first special ball entry means and the second special ball entry means depending on whether the condition that is met in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. The benefits awarded when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means differ from those awarded when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. This allows players to not only hope that either the first or second condition will be met in the special control state, but also to hope that a condition will be met that will allow the game ball to enter the more profitable special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

Feature F25. The variable ball entry means has a displacement section (guiding plate section 214) that, when the variable ball entry means is in one of the first state and the second state, becomes a first corresponding state, and a gaming ball flowing down from upstream of the variable ball entry means is placed on the first corresponding state, thereby preventing the gaming ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and when the variable ball entry means is in the other of the first state and the second state, becomes a second corresponding state, thereby allowing the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction;
The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down along the displacement portion in a specific direction,
The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) that is a part of the displacement section, the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction, thereby allowing the game ball to flow in;
The gaming machine described in feature F24 is characterized in that the second special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2), which is a part of the displacement section, the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

According to feature F25, when a gaming ball is resting on a displacement section that is in the first corresponding state, attention is paid to the position of the gaming ball resting on the displacement section, in the hope that the displacement section will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state when it is within a range that allows the ball to enter the more profitable special ball entry means.

Feature F26: The one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means;
It is more advantageous for the player if the gaming ball lands in the first special ball entry means than if the gaming ball lands in the second special ball entry means,
A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement section is provided upstream of the displacement section in the flow direction of the game ball,
the second predetermined range is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
the first predetermined range is located on the side of the second predetermined range in the specific direction,
A gaming machine described in feature F25, characterized in that the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is located on the side of the specific direction relative to the first predetermined range.

According to feature F26, an opportunity for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also when it switches to the second state.

In this case, the first predetermined range, which is the range in the displacement section that allows the ball to enter the first special ball entry means, is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the second predetermined range, which is the range in the displacement section that allows the ball to enter the second special ball entry means, and the entry section of the variable ball entry means is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the first predetermined range. It is therefore more advantageous for the player if the game ball enters the first special ball entry means than if the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. Therefore, a game ball located closer to the entry section of the variable ball entry means on the displacement section is more likely to enter the first special ball entry means, which is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's benefit in situations where the player feels more disadvantaged by the ball unfortunately not entering the entry section of the variable ball entry means.

Feature F27. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F26, characterized in that the gaming ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is in the first state.

According to feature F27, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the player will expect both the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means and the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game when the variable ball entry means is in the first state.

Feature F28. The variable ball entry means is
Ball entry sections (first large winning hole 265, second large winning hole 266) into which game balls can enter;
Guidance means (first guide plate 271, second guide plate 281) that are switchable between a guidance state in which game balls flowing down from the upstream side can land on and can guide the loaded game balls to the ball entrance section, and a non-guidance state in which game balls flowing down from the upstream side are not guided to the ball entrance section;
Equipped with
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the variable ball entrance means is in the first state, and when the guiding means is in the non-guiding state, the variable ball entrance means is in the second state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F27, characterized in that the special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when the guidance means is in the guidance state, a gaming ball that is on the guidance means and has flowed down to a different area from the ball entry section can enter the machine.

According to feature F28, when the guiding means is in the guiding state and the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball on the guiding means is guided to either the variable ball entry means or the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball on the guiding means, thereby making the game more enjoyable.

Feature F29. A means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail group 268) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guidance start range of the guidance means is provided upstream of the guidance means in the flow direction of the game ball,
The guiding means is formed so that in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means flows down along the guiding means in a predetermined guiding direction,
A gaming machine described in feature F28, characterized in that the ball entry area and the other area are located on the side of the specified guidance direction relative to the guidance start range.

According to feature F29, both the ball entry area and the separate area are located further down the flow direction of the game ball in the guiding means than the guidance start range, which is the area that the game ball first reaches in the guiding means. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the guiding means.

Feature F30. The gaming machine described in Feature F29, wherein the separate area is located closer to the predetermined guide direction than the ball entry area.

According to feature F30, a gaming ball that is placed on the guidance means in a guidance state but passes through without entering the entry area will end up entering the special entry means. This makes it possible to change the player's sense of disadvantage that the gaming ball on the guidance means did not enter the variable entry means into a sense of advantage that the ball will enter the special entry means.

Feature F31. The variable ball entry means includes a first variable ball entry means (first special electric winning device 261) and a second variable ball entry means (second special electric winning device 262),
The special ball entry means includes a first special ball entry means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entry means (second through gate 264),
The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when the first entry means (first entry board 271), which is the entry means of the first variable ball entry means, is in the guiding state, a game ball that has been placed on the first entry means and that has flowed down to a first separate area different from the first ball entry section, which is the front entry ball section of the first variable ball entry means, can enter the game ball;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F28 to F30, characterized in that the second special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when the second guide means (second guide plate 281), which is the guide means of the second variable ball entry means, is in the guide state, a gaming ball that is placed on the second guide means and flows down into a second separate area different from the second ball entry section, which is the front ball entry section of the second variable ball entry means, can enter the game.

According to feature F31, there is a combination of a first variable ball entry means and a first special ball entry means, and a combination of a second variable ball entry means and a second special ball entry means. This makes it possible to vary the proportion of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means and the special ball entry means by varying the type of combination that is the subject of special control in the special control state.

Feature F32. A gaming machine as described in Feature F31, characterized in that the probability that a gaming ball placed on the first guiding means in the guiding state will land in the first special ball entry means is different from the probability that a gaming ball placed on the second guiding means in the guiding state will land in the second special ball entry means.

Feature F32 allows for different types of combinations that are the targets of special control in the special control state, thereby varying the probability of a game ball entering the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the targets of special control execution.

Feature F33. The special control state includes a first special control state (e.g., a 2R low-probability result) and a second special control state (e.g., a 2R high-probability result),
A gaming machine described in feature F32, characterized in that the type of variable ball entry means that is the target of executing the special control, or the selection manner of the variable ball entry means that is the target of executing the special control, differs between the first special control state and the second special control state.

Feature F33 makes it possible to vary the probability of a game ball entering the special ball entry means depending on the type of special control state. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the type of special control state.

Feature F34. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F31 to F33, wherein the second special ball entry means is located downstream of the first special ball entry means in the direction in which the gaming ball flows.

According to feature F34, the second special ball entry means is located downstream of the first special ball entry means in the direction in which the gaming ball flows. Therefore, when the first variable ball entry means becomes the target of special control execution, not only can the gaming ball enter the first special ball entry means, but the gaming ball can also enter the second special ball entry means. Therefore, the player will expect the first variable ball entry means to become the target of special control execution.

Feature F35. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F31 to F34, characterized in that the same benefit is awarded whether a gaming ball enters the first special ball entry means or the second special ball entry means.

According to feature F35, the same benefit is awarded whether the gaming ball enters the first special ball entry means or the second special ball entry means, making it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage felt by the player regardless of whether the special control is executed through the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means.

Feature F36. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F35, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3902 and S3904 in the main CPU 63) for increasing the number of gaming balls available to the player based on a gaming ball entering the variable ball entry means, and for increasing the number of gaming balls available to the player based on a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means.

According to feature F36, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player increases, and when a game ball enters the special ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player also increases. Furthermore, by incorporating the configuration of feature F1 above, not only does it become possible or easier for game balls to enter the variable ball entry means when the game state transitions to the special control state, but it also makes it possible for game balls to enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the increase in the number of game balls available to the player in the special control state, making it possible to increase the degree of advantage in the special control state.

Feature F37. A ball entry means (sudden gate 311) that allows game balls to enter at least in the predetermined game state;
An information acquisition means (a function of executing the acquisition process of the reserved information of the main side shown in FIG. 92 in the main side CPU 63) for acquiring special opportunity information when a game ball enters the special ball entry means and acquiring the special opportunity information when a game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means;
A trigger ball entry means (second operating port 34) that enters a ball entry state in which a game ball can be entered based on the acquisition of the special trigger information;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F36, characterized in that a trigger for transitioning to the special control state occurs based on a gaming ball entering the trigger ball entry means.

According to feature F37, even in a specified game state that is not a special control state, special trigger information is acquired when a game ball enters the acquisition-compatible ball entry means, and a trigger for transition to the special control state occurs when a game ball enters the trigger ball entry means that has become ready to enter due to the acquisition of the special trigger information. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the trigger ball entry means enters a ready to enter state when special trigger information is acquired, not only in special control states but also in specified game states, and a special control state occurs when a game ball enters the trigger ball entry means.

Feature F38. A gaming machine as described in Feature F37, characterized in that it is equipped with a restriction means (limiting pin 312) that makes the probability of a gaming ball entering the acquisition-related ball entry means lower than the probability of a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means in the special control state.

Feature F38 makes it possible to reduce the probability of a transition to a special control state occurring when a gaming ball enters the acquisition-compatible ball entry means in a specified gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction when a transition to a special control state occurs when a gaming ball enters the acquisition-compatible ball entry means in a specified gaming state.

Feature F39. The machine is provided with a predetermined ball entry means (first actuation port 33) that allows a game ball to enter the machine at least in the predetermined game state;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, an opportunity to transition to the special control state occurs without acquiring the special opportunity information,
The gaming machine described in feature F38 is characterized in that the regulating means makes the probability of a gaming ball entering the acquisition-corresponding entry means lower than the probability of a gaming ball entering the predetermined entry means.

According to feature F39, the probability of a game ball entering the game is lower with the acquisition-responsive ball entry means than with the predetermined ball entry means, which allows a game ball to enter the game in a predetermined game state and whose entry triggers a transition to a special control state. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the transition to a special control state occurring based on a game ball entering the acquisition-responsive ball entry means in a predetermined game state.

Feature F40. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F37 to F39, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S4413 in the main CPU 63, a display control device 82) that executes an acquisition-responsive notification when the trigger ball entry means enters the ball entry possible state based on the acquisition of the special trigger information when a gaming ball enters the acquisition-responsive ball entry means.

Feature F40 makes it possible to notify the player through the execution of an acquisition-responsive notification that when a game ball enters the acquisition-responsive ball entry means and special trigger information is acquired, the trigger ball entry means is ready to enter. This makes it less likely that even if a game ball enters the acquisition-responsive ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means is ready to enter, the player will not realize this and lose the opportunity to have the game ball enter the trigger ball entry means.

Feature F41. The gaming machine described in Feature F40, wherein the notification execution means executes the acquisition-responsive notification on the condition that the special trigger information is acquired when a gaming ball enters the acquisition-responsive ball entry means in a situation other than the special control state.

In a special control state, a game ball can enter the special ball entry means, so the player's attention is likely to be focused on the trigger ball entry means entering a ball entry-enabled state. However, in a specified game state that is not a special control state, a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means, so the player may not be aware that the trigger ball entry means is entering a ball entry-enabled state. In this case, according to feature F41, an acquisition-enabled notification is executed when special trigger information is acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition-enabled ball entry means in a situation that is not a special control state, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the trigger ball entry means entering a ball entry-enabled state. Furthermore, by not executing the acquisition-enabled notification in a special control state where the player's attention is likely to be focused on the trigger ball entry means entering a ball entry-enabled state, it is possible to prevent the execution of the acquisition-enabled notification from being a nuisance to the player.

Feature F42. A gaming machine according to Feature F40 or F41, wherein the notification execution means executes the acquisition-responsive notification on the condition that the special opportunity information is acquired when a gaming ball enters the acquisition-responsive ball entry means in a situation where the special opportunity information has not been acquired.

Feature F42 makes it possible to execute an acquisition response notification in situations where the player is not very aware that the opportunity ball entry means is in a state where a ball can be entered.

Feature F43. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F37 to F42, characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the acquisition-compatible ball entry means are provided in an area where gaming balls flow down when a launch operation is performed in a predetermined manner.

According to feature F43, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined manner, it is possible to aim for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the acquisition-compatible ball entry means.

Feature F44. A gaming machine according to Feature F43, wherein the trigger ball entry means is located in a position where the gaming ball is more likely to reach the trigger ball entry means when the firing operation is performed in a specific manner than when the firing operation is performed in the predetermined manner.

According to feature F44, when the trigger ball entry means is in a state where a ball can be entered when not in a special control state, it is possible to make it easier for a game ball to enter the trigger ball entry means by performing a firing operation in a specific manner.

Feature F45. A trigger ball entry means (second actuation port 34) that allows a game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means;
A prize determination means (a function for executing the processing of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) that executes a prize determination based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means;
A means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1904 and S1905 in the main CPU 63) that transitions to the special control state based on the result of the award determination being the first award corresponding result, and that makes the game state after the end of the special control state different from the game state before the start of the special control state;
A means for transitioning to a predetermined gaming state in which the special control is executed by the special control means based on the result of the award determination being a second award corresponding result, and maintaining the gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state as the gaming state before the execution of the predetermined gaming state (a function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F44, characterized in that the probability that the result of the award determination will be the second award corresponding result is higher than the probability that the result will be the first award corresponding result.

According to feature F45, when a gaming ball enters the trigger ball entry means, not only can it result in the first award corresponding result but also the second award corresponding result, and the probability of the second award corresponding result is higher than the probability of the first award corresponding result. As a result, by causing a gaming ball to enter the trigger ball entry means, it is possible to create more opportunities for the variable ball entry means to enter the first state. In this case, by having the configuration of feature F1 above and being configured so that a gaming ball can enter the special ball entry means in a special control state, it is possible to create a situation in which the occurrence of a special control state triggers more opportunities for the variable ball entry means to enter the first state.

Note that any one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features F1 to F45: Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C4, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E7, Features F1 to F45, Features G1 to G18, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I11, Features J1 to J9, and Features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 in the fifteenth embodiment) that is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down and is switchable between a first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter;
A special control means (a function of executing an open setting process for special electric power and a close setting process for special electric power in the main side CPU 63) that executes special control to change the variable ball entry means to the second state after the first state;
A special ball entry means (the through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
A trigger ball entry means (second operating port 34) that sets the state to a ball entry state where a game ball can be entered based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means;
A prize determination means (a function for executing the processing of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) that executes a prize determination based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means;
A means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1904 and S1905 in the main CPU 63) that transitions to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result) in which the special control is executed based on the result of the award determination being the first award corresponding result, and that makes the game state after the end of the special control state different from the game state before the start of the special control state;
A means for transitioning to a predetermined game state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small win result) in which the special control by the special control means is executed based on the result of the award determination being a second award corresponding result, and maintaining the game state after the end of the predetermined game state as the game state before the execution of the predetermined game state (a function for making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
In the grant determination, the probability of the second grant corresponding result being obtained is higher than the probability of the first grant corresponding result being obtained,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that a gaming ball can enter the special ball entry means under predetermined circumstances.

According to feature G1, when a gaming ball enters the trigger ball entry means, not only can it result in the first award corresponding result but also the second award corresponding result, and the probability of the second award corresponding result is higher than the probability of the first award corresponding result. As a result, by causing a gaming ball to enter the trigger ball entry means, it is possible to create an opportunity for the variable ball entry means to enter the first state. In this case, it becomes possible for the ball to enter the special ball entry means, which creates an opportunity for the trigger ball entry means to enter a ball entry possible state, under specified circumstances. As a result, players who hope for a gaming ball to enter the trigger ball entry means will hope for the specified situation to occur. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature G2. A gaming machine as described in Feature G1, characterized in that the frequency with which the trigger ball entry means enters the ball entry enabled state in response to a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the gaming state.

According to feature G2, the frequency with which the trigger ball entry means enters a state where a game ball can be entered when a game ball enters the special ball entry means remains constant regardless of the game state. This means that the expected value of the state in which special control is executed after a game ball has entered the special ball entry means does not fluctuate depending on the game state. This simplifies the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the expected value fluctuates depending on the game state, and makes it easier to manage the expected value. However, with a configuration in which the expected value does not fluctuate depending on the game state, it becomes difficult to add variety to the game. In contrast, because the configuration of feature G1 is included and a configuration in which a game ball can enter the special ball entry means under certain circumstances, it is possible to add variety to the opportunities for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means, which ultimately makes it possible to add variety to the game.

Feature G3: A predetermined ball entry means (first actuation port 33) is provided through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
The award determination means executes the award determination based on a game ball entering the trigger ball entry means, and executes the award determination based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means,
As a state in which the award determination means performs the award determination, a high probability state and a low probability state are set so that the probability of the first award corresponding result being obtained in the award determination is relatively high and low,
The gaming machine includes a game control means (a function for executing a special chart change start process, a special chart change process, and a special chart confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that controls the game cycle execution means so that the game cycle operation is started based on the determination of the award and the game cycle operation is ended when the operation duration period has elapsed;
A period determination means for determining the operation duration period (a function for executing the process of step S1414 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The period determination means is configured so that the average duration of the game repeat action triggered by the award determination executed based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means in the low probability state, when the result of the award determination is not the first award corresponding result, is the same as, approximately the same as, or shorter than the average duration of the game repeat action triggered by the award determination executed based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means in the low probability state, when the result of the award determination is not the first award corresponding result;
A gaming machine described in feature G2, characterized in that the specified situation is a situation different from the situation in which the award determination is made in the low probability state.

According to Feature G3, the average duration of a game replay action triggered by a grant determination executed based on a game ball entering the trigger ball entry means in a low-probability state, when the result of the grant determination does not result in the first grant corresponding result, is the same as, approximately the same as, or shorter than the average duration of a game replay action triggered by a grant determination executed based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means in a low-probability state, when the result of the grant determination does not result in the first grant corresponding result. This prevents the utilization rate of the former game replay action from being significantly lower than the utilization rate of the latter game replay action. However, if this configuration is combined with a configuration such as Feature G2 in which the frequency with which the trigger ball entry means is in a ball-entering state in response to a game ball entering the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state, it is expected that a game will be played in a low-probability state with the aim of having a game ball enter the trigger ball entry means. In contrast, when a prize determination is made in a low probability state, it is not possible for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, in a low probability state, it is possible to play with the aim of having the game ball enter the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature G4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G3, characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the trigger ball entry means are provided in an area where gaming balls flow down when a launch operation is performed in a predetermined manner.

According to feature G4, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined manner, it is possible to aim for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the trigger ball entry means.

Feature G5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G4, wherein the predetermined situation is a state in which the special control is executed.

Feature G5 not only makes it possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means by transitioning to a state in which special control is executed, but also makes it possible for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This increases the benefits of transitioning to a state in which special control is executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature G6. A gaming machine as described in Feature G5, characterized in that it is configured so that a gaming ball can enter the special ball entry means when a predetermined condition is met while the special control is being executed.

According to feature G6, even if the game transitions to a state in which special control is executed, a game ball will not enter the special ball entry means unless a predetermined condition is met. This means that when special control is executed, the player will hope that a predetermined condition will be met in addition to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, making the game more enjoyable when special control is executed.

Feature G7. A gaming machine described in Feature G5 or G6, characterized in that the ease with which a gaming ball will enter the special ball entry means differs between the special control state and the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature G7, the ease with which a game ball will enter the special ball entry means differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state, so that a player hoping for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means will be hoping for a state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature G8. The variable ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
A gaming machine described in feature G7, characterized in that the number of times the special control is executed differs between the special control state and the specified gaming state.

Feature G8 allows a game ball to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first and second states to the other, thereby increasing the player's attention to the timing of this state change. This makes it possible to diversify the objects that players should pay attention to when special control is being executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game when special control is being executed.

In this case, the number of times the variable ball entry means switches between the above states differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state. This results in a difference in the ease with which a game ball will enter the special ball entry means between the special control state and the predetermined game state, and players hoping for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means will be looking forward to the occurrence of a special control execution state that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature G9: A displacement section (guiding plate section 214) that, when in the first corresponding state, places a gaming ball flowing down from the upstream side on the displacement section, thereby preventing the gaming ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and that, when in the second corresponding state, allows the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that the special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed on the displacement section and the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball flows down in the specified direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

According to feature G9, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball on that displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. This allows players to focus on whether the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while a game ball is on the displacement section, making the game more interesting.

Feature G10. The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down along the displacement portion in a specific direction,
The gaming machine described in feature G9 is characterized in that the special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed within a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement section and the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

According to feature G10, for a gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only must the gaming ball be resting on the displacement section that is in the first corresponding state, but the displacement section must switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the gaming ball is within a predetermined range. This draws the player's attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball resting on the displacement section and the timing of the change in the state of the displacement section, making the game more enjoyable.

Feature G11. A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement section is provided upstream of the displacement section in the flow direction of the game ball,
A gaming machine described in feature G10, characterized in that the specified range is located on the side of the specific range in the specific direction.

According to feature G11, the predetermined range in the displacement section that allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the specific range that the game ball will first reach in the displacement section. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement section must switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down the displacement section. This draws the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement section, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature G12. The target ball-entry means, which is either the variable ball-entry means or another ball-entry means,
Ball entry sections (first large winning hole 265, second large winning hole 266) into which game balls can enter;
Guidance means (first guide plate 271, second guide plate 281) that are switchable between a guidance state in which game balls flowing down from the upstream side can land on and can guide the loaded game balls to the ball entrance section, and a non-guidance state in which game balls flowing down from the upstream side are not guided to the ball entrance section;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G11, characterized in that the special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when the guidance means is in the guidance state, a gaming ball that is on the guidance means and has flowed down to a different area from the ball entry section can enter the machine.

According to feature G12, when the guiding means is in the guiding state, a game ball placed on the guiding means is guided to either the ball entry section of the target ball entry means or the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball placed on the guiding means, thereby making the game more enjoyable.

Feature G13. A means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail group 268) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guidance start range of the guidance means is provided upstream of the guidance means in the flow direction of the game ball,
The guiding means is formed so that in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means flows down along the guiding means in a predetermined guiding direction,
A gaming machine described in feature G12, characterized in that the ball entry area and the other area are located on the side of the specified guidance direction relative to the guidance start range.

According to feature G13, both the ball entry area and the separate area that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means are located further down the flow direction of the game ball in the guiding means than the guidance start range that the game ball will first reach in the guiding means. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the guiding means.

Feature G14. The gaming machine described in Feature G13, wherein the separate area is located closer to the predetermined guide direction than the ball entry area.

According to feature G14, a gaming ball that lands on the guidance means in a guidance state but passes through without entering the entry area will end up entering the special entry means. This makes it possible to turn the player's sense of disadvantage caused by the gaming ball that lands on the guidance means not entering the entry area into a sense of advantage caused by the ball entering the special entry means.

Feature G15. The target ball entry means includes a first target ball entry means (first special electric winning device 261) and a second target ball entry means (second special electric winning device 262),
The special ball entry means includes a first special ball entry means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entry means (second through gate 264),
The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when the first entry means (first entry board 271), which is the entry means of the first target ball entry means, is in the guiding state, a game ball that has been placed on the first entry means and that has flowed down to a first separate area different from the first ball entry section, which is the front entry ball section of the first target ball entry means, can enter the game ball;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G12 to G14, characterized in that the second special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when the second entry means (second entry board 281), which is the entry means of the second target ball entry means, is in the entry state, a gaming ball that is placed on the second entry means and flows down into a second separate area different from the second ball entry section, which is the front ball entry section of the second target ball entry means, can enter the game.

According to feature G15, there is a combination of a first target ball scoring means and a first special ball scoring means, and a combination of a second target ball scoring means and a second special ball scoring means. This makes it possible to vary the proportion of game balls scoring into the target ball scoring means and the special ball scoring means by varying the type of combination that is the target of guidance control when guidance control is being executed.

Feature G16. A gaming machine as described in Feature G15, characterized in that the probability that a gaming ball placed on the first guiding means in the guiding state will land in the first special ball entry means is different from the probability that a gaming ball placed on the second guiding means in the guiding state will land in the second special ball entry means.

Feature G16 allows for different types of combinations that are the targets of guidance control when guidance control is being executed, thereby varying the probability of a game ball entering the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the targets of guidance control.

Feature G17. A gaming machine described in Feature G15 or G16, wherein the second special ball entry means is located downstream of the first special ball entry means in the direction in which the gaming ball flows.

According to feature G17, the second special ball entry means is located downstream of the first special ball entry means in the direction in which the gaming ball flows. Therefore, when the first target ball entry means becomes the target of special control execution, not only can the gaming ball enter the first special ball entry means, but the gaming ball can also enter the second special ball entry means. Therefore, the player will expect the first target ball entry means to become the target of guidance control execution.

Feature G18. A gaming machine described in any one of Features G15 to G17, characterized in that the same benefit is awarded whether a gaming ball enters the first special ball entry means or the second special ball entry means.

According to feature G18, the same benefit is awarded whether the gaming ball enters the first special ball entry means or the second special ball entry means, making it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage felt by the player regardless of whether the guidance control is executed through the first target ball entry means or the second target ball entry means.

Note that the configurations of features G1 to G18 may also be combined with one or more of features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A displacement unit (guiding plate portion 214) that, when in a first corresponding state, is placed on a gaming ball flowing down from the upstream side, thereby preventing the gaming ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and that, when in a second corresponding state, allows the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction;
a special ball entry means (through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first special ball entry port 251 and second special ball entry port 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, and first through gate 263 and second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment) provided at a position where, when a game ball is placed on the displacement portion and the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction, thereby enabling the game ball to flow in;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature H1, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball on the displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while a game ball is on the displacement section, making the game more interesting.

Feature H2. The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down along the displacement portion in a specific direction,
The gaming machine described in feature H1 is characterized in that the special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed within a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement section and the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

According to Feature H2, for a gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only must the gaming ball be resting on the displacement section that is in the first corresponding state, but the displacement section must switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the gaming ball is within a predetermined range. This draws the player's attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball resting on the displacement section and the timing of the change in the state of the displacement section, making the game more enjoyable.

Feature H3. A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement section is provided upstream of the displacement section in the flow direction of the game ball,
A gaming machine described in feature H2, characterized in that the specified range is located on the side of the specific range in the specific direction.

According to Feature H3, the predetermined range in the displacement section that allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the specific range that the game ball will first reach in the displacement section. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement section must switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down the displacement section. This draws the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement section, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature H4. A gaming machine described in Feature H3, characterized in that the predetermined ball entry section (entrance section 45b) is located on the side of the specified range in the specific direction.

According to feature H4, the predetermined ball entry area is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the predetermined range in the displacement section that allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This allows a game ball that is on the displacement section but does not reach the predetermined ball entry area to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to turn the player's sense of disadvantage from the game ball that is on the displacement section not entering the predetermined ball entry area into a sense of advantage from the game ball entering the special ball entry means.

Feature H5. A gaming machine as described in Feature H4, characterized in that the predetermined range is set to a range in which the next gaming ball in the firing order is located when one gaming ball reaches the predetermined ball entry section when gaming balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle.

Feature H5 increases the likelihood that a gaming ball will be present within a specified range of a predetermined ball entry section when the displacement section switches to the second corresponding state after the gaming ball enters the specified ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a gaming ball will enter the special ball entry means when the displacement section changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

Feature H6. The special ball entry means includes a first special ball entry means (first special ball entry port 251) and a second special ball entry means (second special ball entry port 252),
The gaming machine includes: a means for awarding a first benefit when a gaming ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
A means for awarding a second benefit when a gaming ball enters the second special ball entry means (a function for executing the processing of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) that is a part of the displacement section, the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction, thereby allowing the game ball to flow in;
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H5, characterized in that the second special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2), which is a part of the displacement section, the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

According to feature H6, when a gaming ball is resting on a displacement section that is in the first corresponding state, attention is paid to the position of the gaming ball resting on the displacement section, in the hope that the displacement section will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state when it is within a range that allows the ball to enter the more profitable special ball entry means.

Feature H7: The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down along the displacement portion in a specific direction,
It is more advantageous for the player if the gaming ball lands in the first special ball entry means than if the gaming ball lands in the second special ball entry means,
A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement section is provided upstream of the displacement section in the flow direction of the game ball,
the second predetermined range is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
the first predetermined range is located on the side of the second predetermined range in the specific direction,
A gaming machine described in feature H6, characterized in that the specified ball entry area is located on the side of the specific direction relative to the first specified range.

According to Feature H7, the first predetermined range, which is the range in the displacement section that allows the ball to enter the first special ball entry means, is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the second predetermined range, which is the range in the displacement section that allows the ball to enter the second special ball entry means, and the predetermined ball entry point is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the first predetermined range. It is therefore more advantageous for the player if the game ball enters the first special ball entry means than if the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. Therefore, a game ball located closer to the predetermined ball entry point on the displacement section is more likely to enter the first special ball entry means, which is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's benefit in situations where the player feels more disadvantaged by the game ball unfortunately not entering the predetermined ball entry point.

Feature H8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H7, characterized in that the displacement section has multiple operating modes.

According to feature H8, multiple types of operating modes of the displacement unit are set, resulting in multiple types of predetermined situations in which the frequency of scoring into the special scoring means differs.

Note that any one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features H1 to H8: Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C4, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E7, Features F1 to F45, Features G1 to G18, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I11, Features J1 to J9, and Features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group I>
Feature I1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32 in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 in the fifteenth embodiment) that is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down and is switchable between a first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter;
A special control means (a function of executing an open setting process for special electric power and a close setting process for special electric power in the main side CPU 63) that executes special control to change the variable ball entry means to the second state after the first state;
A transition means (a function for executing a special chart determination process in the main CPU 63) for transitioning the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
Special ball entry means (a first special ball entry port 251 and a second special ball entry port 252) that restricts entry of game balls in a predetermined game state other than the special control state and allows entry of game balls in the special control state;
A means for increasing the number of game balls available to a player based on a game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and for increasing the number of game balls available to a player based on a game ball entering the special ball entry means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3902 and S3904 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, when the game state transitions to the special control state, not only does it become possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, but it also makes it possible for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This increases the benefits of transitioning the game state to the special control state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player increases, and when a game ball enters the special ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player also increases. By incorporating the above configuration, not only does it become possible or easier for game balls to enter the variable ball entry means when the game state transitions to the special control state, but it also makes it possible for game balls to enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the increase in the number of game balls available to the player in the special control state, making it possible to increase the degree of advantage in the special control state.

Feature I2. A gaming machine as described in Feature I1, characterized in that the special ball entry means is located downstream of the variable ball entry means in the direction in which gaming balls flow in the gaming area, and is positioned so that gaming balls can enter when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other.

According to feature I2, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first and second states to the other, a game ball that does not enter the variable ball entry means can enter the special ball entry means. This allows a game ball that was not selected as a possible entry point for the variable ball entry means to enter the special ball entry means, and as a result of game balls entering the special ball entry means, the number of available game balls increases, making it possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage due to a game ball that was not selected as a possible entry point for the variable ball entry means.

Feature I3. The variable ball entry means has a displacement section (guiding plate section 214) that, when the variable ball entry means is in one of the first state and the second state, becomes a first corresponding state and a gaming ball flowing down from upstream of the variable ball entry means is placed on the first corresponding state, thereby preventing the gaming ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and when the variable ball entry means is in the other of the first state and the second state, becomes a second corresponding state, thereby allowing the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction;
The gaming machine described in feature I1 or I2 is characterized in that the special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed on the displacement section and the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball flows down in the specified direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

According to Feature I3, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball on that displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. As a result, in the special control state, the player will not only focus on whether or not the gaming ball will enter the variable ball entry means, but also on whether or not the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while a gaming ball is on the displacement section, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

Feature I4. A gaming machine as described in Feature I3, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means.

According to feature I4, an opportunity for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also when it switches to the second state.

Feature I5. The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down along the displacement portion in a specific direction,
The gaming machine described in feature I3 or I4 is characterized in that the special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed within a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement section and the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

According to Feature I5, for a gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only must the gaming ball be resting on the displacement section that is in the first corresponding state, but the displacement section must switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the gaming ball is within a predetermined range. This draws the player's attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball resting on the displacement section and the timing of the change in the state of the displacement section, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

Feature I6. A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement section is provided upstream of the displacement section in the flow direction of the game ball,
A gaming machine described in feature I5, characterized in that the specified range is located on the side of the specific range in the specific direction.

According to Feature I6, the predetermined range in the displacement section that allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the specific range that the game ball will first reach in the displacement section. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement section must switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down the displacement section. This draws the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement section, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

Feature I7. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entrance means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entrance means,
A gaming machine described in feature I6, characterized in that the ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entry means is located on the side of the specified direction relative to the specified range.

According to feature I7, an opportunity for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also when it switches to the second state.

In this case, the ball entry section of the variable ball entry means is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the predetermined range in the displacement section that allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This means that a game ball that is on the displacement section but does not reach the ball entry section of the variable ball entry means will enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to turn the player's sense of disadvantage from a game ball that is on the displacement section but does not enter the variable ball entry means into a sense of advantage from the game ball entering the special ball entry means.

Feature I8. A gaming machine as described in Feature I7, characterized in that the predetermined range is set to a range in which the next gaming ball in the firing order is located when one gaming ball reaches the ball entry section when gaming balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle.

Feature I8 increases the likelihood that a gaming ball will be present within a specified range of the displacement section when the gaming ball enters the entry section of the variable entry means and the displacement section switches to the second corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a gaming ball will enter the special entry means when the displacement section changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

Feature I9. The special ball entry means includes a first special ball entry means (first special ball entry port 251) and a second special ball entry means (second special ball entry port 252),
The gaming machine includes: a means for awarding a first benefit when a gaming ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
A means for awarding a second benefit when a gaming ball enters the second special ball entry means (a function for executing the processing of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
When a first condition is satisfied in the special control state, a game ball can enter the first special ball entry means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I8, characterized in that when a second condition is met in the special control state, a gaming ball can enter the second special ball entry means.

According to Feature I9, the special ball entry means that is the target for the ball entry differs between the first special ball entry means and the second special ball entry means depending on whether the condition that is met in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. The benefits awarded when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means differ from those awarded when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. This allows players to not only hope that either the first or second condition will be met in the special control state, but also to hope that a condition will be met that will allow the game ball to enter the more profitable special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game during the special control state.

Feature I10. The variable ball entry means has a displacement section (guiding plate section 214) that, when the variable ball entry means is in one of the first state and the second state, becomes a first corresponding state and a gaming ball flowing down from upstream of the variable ball entry means is placed on the first corresponding state, thereby preventing the gaming ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and when the variable ball entry means is in the other of the first state and the second state, becomes a second corresponding state, thereby allowing the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction;
The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down along the displacement portion in a specific direction,
The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) that is a part of the displacement section, the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction, thereby allowing the game ball to flow in;
The gaming machine described in feature I9 is characterized in that the second special ball entry means is provided at a position where, when a gaming ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2), which is a part of the displacement section, the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction, allowing the gaming ball to enter when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

According to feature I10, when a gaming ball is resting on a displacement section that is in the first corresponding state, attention is paid to the position of the gaming ball resting on the displacement section, in the hope that the displacement section will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state when it is within a range that allows the ball to enter the more profitable special ball entry means.

Feature I11. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means;
It is more advantageous for the player if the gaming ball lands in the first special ball entry means than if the gaming ball lands in the second special ball entry means,
A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement section is provided upstream of the displacement section in the flow direction of the game ball,
the second predetermined range is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
the first predetermined range is located on the side of the second predetermined range in the specific direction,
A gaming machine described in feature I10, characterized in that the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is located on the side of the specific direction relative to the first predetermined range.

According to feature I11, an opportunity for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, but also when it switches to the second state.

In this case, the first predetermined range, which is the range in the displacement section that allows the ball to enter the first special ball entry means, is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the second predetermined range, which is the range in the displacement section that allows the ball to enter the second special ball entry means, and the entry section of the variable ball entry means is located further down the displacement section in the direction of the game ball's flow than the first predetermined range. It is therefore more advantageous for the player if the game ball enters the first special ball entry means than if the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. Therefore, a game ball located closer to the entry section of the variable ball entry means on the displacement section is more likely to enter the first special ball entry means, which is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's benefit in situations where the player feels more disadvantaged by the ball unfortunately not entering the entry section of the variable ball entry means.

Note that the configurations of Features I1 to I11 may also be combined with one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C4, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E7, Features F1 to F45, Features G1 to G18, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I11, Features J1 to J9, and Features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32 in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 in the fifteenth embodiment) that is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down and is switchable between a first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter;
A special control means (a function of executing an open setting process for special electric power and a close setting process for special electric power in the main side CPU 63) that executes special control to change the variable ball entry means to the second state after the first state;
A transition means (a function for executing a special chart determination process in the main CPU 63) for transitioning the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
Special ball entry means (through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first special ball entry port 251 and second special ball entry port 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, and first through gate 263 and second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment) that restricts the entry of game balls in a predetermined game state and allows game balls to enter in a game state other than the predetermined game state;
A ball entry means (a sudden gate 311) that allows a game ball to enter at least in the predetermined game state;
a trigger ball entry means (second operating port 34) that, based on the game ball having entered the special ball entry means, becomes a state in which a game ball can be entered, and based on the game ball having entered the acquisition corresponding ball entry means, becomes a state in which a game ball can be entered;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that a trigger for transitioning to the special control state occurs when a gaming ball enters the trigger ball entry means.

Feature J1 allows a ball to be scored into the special ball scoring means, which triggers the trigger ball scoring means to enter a ball scoring state, in a gaming state that is not a specified gaming state. This means that players hoping for a gaming ball to score into the trigger ball scoring means will be hoping for a gaming state that is not a specified gaming state to occur. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, even in a specified game state, the trigger ball entry means becomes eligible for entry when a game ball enters the acquisition-compatible ball entry means. Then, when a game ball enters the trigger ball entry means that is in a ball entry-enabled state, an opportunity to transition to a special control state occurs. This makes it possible for the trigger ball entry means to enter a ball entry-enabled state not only in game states that are not specified game states, but also in specified game states, creating a situation in which a special control state occurs when a game ball enters the trigger ball entry means.

Feature J2. A gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein the special control state is included in the gaming states other than the specified gaming states.

According to feature J2, when the game state transitions to the special control state, not only does it become possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, but it also makes it possible for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This increases the benefits of transitioning the game state to the special control state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature J3. A gaming machine as described in Feature J1 or J2, characterized in that it is equipped with a restriction means (limiting pin 312) that makes the probability of a gaming ball entering the acquisition-related ball entry means lower than the probability of a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means in a gaming state other than the specified gaming state.

Feature J3 makes it possible to reduce the probability of a transition to a special control state occurring when a gaming ball enters the acquisition-compatible ball entry means in a specified gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction when a transition to a special control state occurs when a gaming ball enters the acquisition-compatible ball entry means in a specified gaming state.

Feature J4: The machine is provided with a predetermined ball entry means (first actuation port 33) that allows a game ball to enter the machine at least in the predetermined game state;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, an opportunity to transition to the special control state occurs,
The gaming machine described in feature J3 is characterized in that the regulating means makes the probability of a gaming ball entering the acquisition-corresponding entry means lower than the probability of a gaming ball entering the predetermined entry means.

According to feature J4, the probability of a game ball entering the game is lower with the acquisition-responsive ball entry means than with the predetermined ball entry means, in which a game ball can enter the game in a predetermined game state and the occurrence of a game ball entering the game triggers a transition to a special control state. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the transition to a special control state occurring based on a game ball entering the acquisition-responsive ball entry means in a predetermined game state.

Feature J5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J4, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S4413 in the main CPU 63, a display control device 82) that executes an acquisition-responsive notification when the trigger ball entry means enters the ball entry possible state based on a gaming ball entering the acquisition-responsive ball entry means.

Feature J5 makes it possible to notify the player by executing an acquisition-responsive notification that a game ball has entered the acquisition-responsive ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means is now ready to enter. This makes it less likely that a game ball will enter the acquisition-responsive ball entry means, and the trigger ball entry means will be ready to enter, but the player will not realize this and lose the opportunity to enter the trigger ball entry means.

Feature J6. A gaming machine according to Feature J5, wherein the notification execution means executes the acquisition-responsive notification on the condition that a gaming ball has entered the acquisition-responsive ball entry means in the specified gaming state.

In game states other than the specified game state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means, so the player's attention is likely to be focused on the trigger ball entry means entering a ball entry-enabled state. However, in specified game states, game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, so the player may not be aware of the trigger ball entry means entering a ball entry-enabled state. In this case, feature J6 executes an acquisition-enabled notification on the condition that a game ball has entered the acquisition-enabled ball entry means in the specified game state, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the trigger ball entry means entering a ball entry-enabled state. Furthermore, by not executing an acquisition-enabled notification in game states other than the specified game state, in which the player's attention is likely to be focused on the trigger ball entry means entering a ball entry-enabled state, it is possible to prevent the execution of the acquisition-enabled notification from being a nuisance to the player.

Feature J7: A means for acquiring special opportunity information based on a game ball entering the special ball entry means, and a means for acquiring the special opportunity information based on a game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means,
The opportunity goal-going means is configured to enter the goal-going state based on the acquisition of the special opportunity information,
The gaming machine described in feature J5 or J6 is characterized in that the notification execution means executes the acquisition-responsive notification on the condition that the special trigger information is acquired when a gaming ball enters the acquisition-responsive ball entry means in a situation where the special trigger information has not been acquired.

Feature J7 makes it possible to execute an acquisition response notification in situations where the player is not very aware that the opportunity ball entry means is in a state where a ball can be entered.

Feature J8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J7, characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the acquisition-compatible ball entry means are provided in an area where the gaming ball flows down when the launch operation is performed in a predetermined manner.

According to feature J8, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined manner, it is possible to aim for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the acquisition-compatible ball entry means.

Feature J9. A gaming machine as described in Feature J8, wherein the trigger ball entry means is located in a position where the gaming ball is more likely to reach the trigger ball entry means when the firing operation is performed in a specific manner than when the firing operation is performed in the predetermined manner.

According to feature J9, when the trigger ball entry means is in a ball entry enabled state in a specified game state, it is possible to make it easier for a game ball to enter the trigger ball entry means by performing a firing operation in a specific manner.

Note that any one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features J1 to J9: Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C4, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E7, Features F1 to F45, Features G1 to G18, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I11, Features J1 to J9, and Features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group F, feature group G, feature group H, feature group I, and feature group J can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to be configured to award a benefit to the player by transitioning the gaming state to a special control state when a predetermined transition condition is met.

Specific examples of pachinko machines include those that transition to a special control state when an internal lottery is won based on a gaming ball entering a ball entry section in the play area, and those that transition to a special control state when a gaming ball enters a specified ball entry section. When a transition to a special control state occurs, for example, a ball entry device in the play area begins to open and close, and gaming balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A first variable ball entry means (first special winning device 291) that is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down and is switchable between a first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter;
a second variable ball entry means (second special electric winning device 292) that is provided downstream of the first variable ball entry means and is switchable between a first state in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter;
A unit control means (a function of executing the special power open setting process shown in FIG. 85(a) in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the special power close setting process shown in FIG. 85(b)) that controls so that a period occurs in which both the first variable entrance means and the second variable entrance means are in the first state in the unit control state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, a gaming ball that fails to enter the first variable ball entry means that is in the first state in the unit control state can enter the second variable ball entry means that is in the first state. This makes it easier for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means in the unit control state.

Feature K2. A means for transitioning the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the unit control state is executed multiple times (a function for executing a special chart determination process in the main CPU 63) is provided,
A gaming machine described in feature K1, characterized in that when the unit control state of one execution round ends, a gaming ball that begins to flow down from the position of the first variable ball entry means toward the second variable ball entry means enters the second variable ball entry means, which is in the first state in the unit control state of the next execution round.

According to feature K2, gaming balls that have reached the position of the first variable ball entry means at the time the unit control state ends but are unable to enter the first variable ball entry means will enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution. This makes it possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the variable ball entry means despite a firing operation being performed in the special control state with the aim of causing the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means.

Feature K3. A gaming machine described in Feature K1 or K2, characterized in that the unit control means controls both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to enter the first state when the unit control state is initiated.

According to feature K3, by controlling both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to enter the first state when the unit control state is initiated, it is possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the timing at which these variable ball entry means enter the first state is set individually. In addition, a game ball that fails to enter the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one execution may enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution.

Feature K4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K3, characterized in that the unit control means controls both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to be in the first state when the unit control state begins, and controls both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to be in the second state when the unit control state ends.

Feature K4 makes it possible to reduce the processing load required to control each variable ball entry means in the unit control state. Furthermore, with this configuration, while the first variable ball entry means is the primary target for game balls in the unit control state, game balls that fail to enter the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one execution may enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution.

Feature K5. A means for transitioning the game state to a special control state in which the unit control state is executed multiple times (a function for executing a special chart determination process in the main CPU 63) is provided,
A gaming machine described in feature K3 or K4, characterized in that the period from the end of the unit control state of one execution to the start of the unit control state of the next execution in the special control state is shorter than the period required for the gaming ball to reach the position of the first variable ball entry means from the position of the second variable ball entry means.

According to feature K5, a game ball that has missed entering the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one execution may enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution. Furthermore, a configuration that makes it less likely for such balls to miss can be realized by adjusting the positional relationship between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means.

Feature K6. The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are configured so that a game ball flowing down a predetermined game area can enter the game,
The gaming machine described in feature K5 is characterized in that when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, the first variable ball entry means has a first displacement section (guidance plate section 214 of the first special electric winning device 291) that guides game balls flowing down the specified game area to the entry section of the first variable ball entry means and prevents game balls from flowing toward the second variable ball entry means.

Feature K6 prevents game balls from leaking into the first variable ball entry means when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state. Furthermore, by incorporating the configuration of feature K5, even if a game ball leaks into the first variable ball entry means at the end of the unit control state of one execution, that game ball is more likely to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it becomes less likely that a game ball will leak into the variable ball entry means in the special control state.

Feature K7. The gaming machine described in Feature K6 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means has a second displacement section (guiding plate section 214 of second special electric winning device 292) that, when the second variable ball entry means is in the first state, guides game balls flowing down the specified game area that have flowed downstream of the first variable ball entry means to the entry section of the second variable ball entry means, preventing game balls from flowing downstream of the second variable ball entry means.

According to feature K7, even if a game ball fails to enter the first variable ball entry means at the end of a unit control state of one execution, the game ball will still enter the second variable ball entry means.

Feature K8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K7, characterized in that it is equipped with a blocking means (flow-down blocking member 303) that is located downstream of the first variable ball entry means and upstream of the second variable ball entry means, and is switchable between a blocking state that blocks gaming balls that have flowed down from the upstream side from flowing further downstream, and a non-blocking state that does not block the gaming balls from flowing further downstream.

According to feature K8, even if a game ball leaks into the first variable ball entry means, the blocking means can prevent the leaked game ball from flowing downstream. Then, when the second variable ball entry means is in the first state, the blocking means can be switched from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, allowing the game ball, whose flow downstream is blocked by the blocking state, to enter the second variable ball entry means.

Feature K9. A gaming machine as described in Feature K8, characterized in that it is equipped with a blocking control means (a function for executing a flow-down blocking control process in the main CPU 63) that causes the blocking means to enter the blocking state at a timing before the first variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state, and causes the blocking means to enter the non-blocking state at a timing after the second variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state.

According to feature K9, the blocking means is in the blocking state before the first variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state, making it possible for the blocking means to block game balls that have failed to enter the first variable ball entry means from flowing further downstream when the first variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state. The blocking means then goes into the non-blocking state after the second variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, allowing game balls blocked by the blocking means to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible for the blocking means to prevent game balls from failing to enter the variable ball entry means.

Note that any one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of features K1 to K9: features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above group of features K can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to be configured to award a benefit to the player by transitioning the gaming state to a special control state when a predetermined transition condition is met.

Specific examples of pachinko machines include those that transition to a special control state when an internal lottery is won based on a gaming ball entering a ball entry section in the play area, and those that transition to a special control state when a gaming ball enters a specified ball entry section. When a transition to a special control state occurs, for example, a ball entry device in the play area begins to open and close, and gaming balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to optimize the execution of special control states, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a picture display device that variably displays multiple pictures, in which the variable display of the multiple pictures is initiated by operating a start operating means, and the variable display of the multiple pictures is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the picture displayed after the stop.

10... Pachinko machine, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 35... Through gate, 45b... Entrance section, 63... Main CPU, 82... Display control device, 214... Guide plate section, 241... Guide nail group, 251... First special ball entrance port, 252... Second special ball entrance port, 261... First special electric winning device, 262... Second special electric winning device, 263... First Through gate, 264...second through gate, 265...first large prize opening, 266...second large prize opening, 267...first guide nail group, 268...second guide nail group, 271...first guide plate, 281...second guide plate, 291...first special electric prize winning device, 292...second special electric prize winning device, 303...flow prevention member, 311...emergency gate, 312...limiting nail, PA...play area.

Claims (1)

a predetermined storage execution means for executing a predetermined storage process so that when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, thereby causing the predetermined information to be stored in the predetermined storage means;
an information calculation means for calculating, each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, behavior information corresponding to a game result during a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
a result storage execution means for sequentially storing the aspect information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means;
Equipped with
the result storage execution means includes means for causing the mode information to be stored among the mode information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means to be stored in the calculation result storage means;
the state information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means, which is not a storage target, is not stored in the calculation result storage means;
The gaming machine is provided with a means for generating a specific advantageous period when a specific opportunity occurs,
When a specific event occurs that stops the game progress control, the predetermined storage process is not executed by the predetermined storage execution means.
the information calculation means calculates the status information using the predetermined information in the specific advantageous period as the status information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period ,
A gaming machine characterized in that an alarm means capable of notifying content corresponding to the status information stored in the calculation result storage means is provided in a position that is visible when a door body that can be opened and closed is in the open state .